JPS5886641A - Computer - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To eliminate the need to increase the frequency of arithmetic clock pulses, by obtaining the same number of arithmetic steps in each arithmetic routine of a computer applied to a camera, and making arithmetic time invariably constant. CONSTITUTION:The instruction ROM504 at the center control part of a camera executes instructions in 2<8>=256 steps according to combinations of inputs to eight input terminals A0-A7, and executes 8 routines consisting of 32 steps. Then, 8 arithmetic control routines are executed according to combinations of signals CU inputted to terminals A5-A7 and signals from output terminals D1 and D2 of a program selector 508, and respective routines in 32 steps are executed in accordance with input from output terminals Q1-Q5 of a program counter 582 to the terminals A0-A4.

Description

[Detailed description of the invention]

The present invention is applicable to combinators, especially cameras.
It concerns Eta. As is well known, the calculation time for each calculation routine is
An exciting combiator and – Data updates are carried out at regular intervals.
Combiator is used in combination with equipment that has a high need to perform
When this happens, correct arithmetic processing cannot be performed. Therefore, in conventional combinators, any calculation routine
In order to keep the calculation time virtually constant, the calculation process is
The frequency of the tartuta pulse was constantly increasing. deer
Increasing the frequency of the tartuta pulse like this
It is not a good thing because it causes problems in daily life.
Ta. The aim is to provide a combiator. Note that the description related to the present invention is mainly shown in FIG.
Figure 0 (pages 548 to 548 related to these figures)
Page 367, detailed description of the invention below for ease of understanding.
In the description, drawings other than those mentioned above will also be explained in detail.
. Hereinafter, the camera system of the present invention will be further explained according to the drawings.
Explain in detail. FIG. 1 shows a camera system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
This is a six-sided view of the applied camera device, and (a) is a front view.
, the same figure (b) is a top view, the same figure (c) is a bottom view, the same figure (d)
) is a right side view, (e) is a left side view, and (f) is a back view.
Each figure shows a plan view. The camera device with the configuration shown in the figure is dual-purpose using the TTL photometry method.
Single-lens reflex camera with automatic exposure control mechanism
It is a camera with a parts arrangement that focuses on its operability.
We are currently setting up. This camera device consists of a lens device 2, which is an optical system, and a main body system.
It is composed of 4 bodies, which are different types of
Various combinations of lens devices and main body systems are possible.
Conventional single-lens reflex cameras are capable of capturing a wide range of images.
Same as Kusu Camera. The lens device 2 includes a distance adjustment ring 6 and an aperture adjustment ring.
It is attached to the body 4 by a tightening ring 10.
be done. Note that this lens device 2 is attached to the distance adjustment ring 6.
Therefore, it is possible to change the imaging position of the subject, and it is possible to change the imaging position of the subject immediately.
Focusing operation is possible, and there is also an aperture adjustment link.
You can preset the aperture value by
Ru. Here, the aperture value preset refers to the aperture adjustment ring.
8, the aperture value display 9 displayed on the circumference
It tells you to align it with the index 7 attached to the lens barrel of the lens device 2.
In fact, in this state, the lens device 2 is in an open state. In this way, the preset aperture value can be set by the shutter release.
Depending on the driving force from the body 4 during exposure after
Narrow down the aperture blades of lens device 2 to the preset position
Obtained depending on the situation. But as a rule, this camera
The device's operability is focused on automatic exposure control.
In order to
12 to index 7, press the aperture value from the body 4 side.
This machine is configured so that it can be reset.
The structure is the central point when controlling the aperture with this camera device.
It will fulfill its function. In addition, this lens device 2
Mechanism that transmits information regarding the open aperture value, etc. to the body 4 side
This fortune-telling mechanism is equipped with an arithmetic operation built into the body 4.
Information necessary for the device to perform calculations for exposure control
This is an important mechanism for incorporating Most basically, the body 4 is
Therefore, in order to form an image of the introduced subject on the film surface.
This is the dark box of the film.
Built-in 35mm roll film
- Wind the film onto the winding spool one frame at a time.
Depending on the situation, exposed surfaces are replaced. Nyatta is fi
The two-curtain running type is placed on the lens device 2 side of the exposed surface of the lume.
This is a focal plane shutter, which will be explained in detail later.
, the running force of the second act depends on the charged spring force.
, and control the running timing of the second act, that is, the start of running.
Control is carried out by electrical means. Body 4 is
Quick Return Mirror and Pe/Yu Prism Part 1
It has a built-in fine and fine mechanism centered around 1.
7 reaming operations before shooting through the inner window 13
The camera is configured to perform focusing and focusing operations. this'
Regarding the viewfinder mechanism, the well-known single-lens reflex camera
It is exactly the same as the finder mechanism of . However, the difference is
As will be explained in detail later, the viewfinder window 13 is used for shooting.
This means that you can obtain most of the information you need.
This is one of the features of this camera device. Furthermore, this
The finder mechanism was introduced through the lens device 2.
Added TTL photometry function to measure the brightness of the subject light.
The object brightness information required for calculations for automatic exposure control is
information (apex value: BV). On the top of body 4, there is a
Wind the film one frame, and then
A spring for moving the mechanical parts necessary for release.
A winding lever 14 is provided for charging the windings.
Ru. The film is wound up by this winding lever 14.
The number of frames in the film is displayed on the film counter 15.
. It should be noted that the winding lever 14 is provided at the center of rotation thereof.
The button 16 shown above is a multiple exposure button.
If you operate the fist raising lever 14 while holding it down, the necessary machine will be activated.
Only the structural parts are charged, and the film is not wound.
Not done. Furthermore, this winding lever 14 has a
The function is a power switch for the electrical functions within the camera device.
The role of the tip is to pull it out slightly in the direction of the arrow α.
Then turn on the power. This function consumes a lot of battery power.
In particular, battery consumption may cause serious malfunctions in its functions.
Camera devices with automatic exposure control mechanisms that are likely to cause
This is effective in preventing you from forgetting to turn off the power. 18 is the shutter release button, which is different from conventional cameras.
Similarly, when holding body 4 with both hands, the difference between the right hand and
This button is placed on the top surface of the body 4 and can be pressed with a finger.
Required after shutter release depending on the pressure of button 18.
Various operations will begin. By the way, the shutter
The hole 20 provided in the center of the release button 18 is
, insertion of cable release or air release
It is a hole. Near the shutter release button 18
By rotating the button 18, various
Selector lever 22 configured to select a function
is arranged. This selector lever 22 is the shutter
・Use the same finger that operates the release button 18, that is, the button
It can be operated with the index finger of the right hand while holding D4.
. Now, the selector lever 22e? -ri24 is selected.
When rotated to the desired position, the shutter release
-Button 18 is locked and cannot be pressed. This lo
In the locked state, the shutter release button 18 is pressed down.
If the mark 24 is selected after the
It can also be applied when pressing button 18 and holding it until 1.
Therefore, if the shutter speed is selected for uneven pulp position,
It also allows for long exposures. That is, this
The selection of the mark 24 by the selector lever 22 is
Prevents the release button 18 from being pressed by mistake
It has two functions: it also allows for long exposures.
It will be applied when obtaining. Also, when the mark 26 is selected on the selector lever 22,
AE (Automatic-E)
xposure) becomes locked. This person is like E-lock.
In this mode, automatic exposure control is in progress and metering and calculations are not being performed.
The resulting exposure (combination of aperture and shutter speed)
, in order to maintain the amount just before mark 26 was selected, the photometry
Even if the amount of photometry is kept fixed and the amount of photometry changes, the previous
When the exposure amount is fixed and the actual exposure is performed, the previous exposure amount is fixed.
The fixed exposure amount will be followed. This feature is
When photographing a subject with a large brightness difference,
the frame you want and the frame you want to capture only the subject brightness related to photometry.
What can be applied very effectively when the frames are different
So, if your camera has an automatic exposure control function, be sure to
Both are necessary functions. This AE lock mechanism has mechanical
A deflection lamp mechanism and an electrical processing mechanism are considered, but
This camera device uses an electrical processing mechanism.
This will result in Note that the lever selecting the mark 26
-22 is after pressing the shutter release button 18
Upon return, it will automatically return to its original position. By the way,
An external force is applied that prevents the lever 22 from returning.
This is not the case. Also, when the mark 28 is selected on the selector lever 22,
If the self-timer is set to
becomes. In this camera device, the self-timer is
Unlike conventional cameras, time is counted electrically.
This self-timer set has a
shutter release button 18 is pressed.
The sequence of actions accompanying the shutter release is
It depends on an electrical signal that is emitted after a predetermined period of time.
controlled by Note that the period when the self-timer is operating is
The selector lever 22 is arranged on the upper surface of the body 4.
When the is in its original position, the light emitting diode hidden underneath it
The LED lamp 32 blinks and the self-timer is activated.
・Notify that it is in operation. Note that the self-timer
During operation, return the selector lever 22 to its original position.
For example, the self-timer set is canceled and the system is
Normal shutter release button 18
Release becomes possible. Also, the cell in this camera
The shutter timer mechanism is used when the shutter release operation is performed.
The self-timer is set again because it is not released even after
Self-timer shooting is possible repeatedly without performing any movements.
be. As will be discussed later, this function
Automatic shooting at timed intervals depending on the combination with the device
is possible, and its usefulness is extremely large.
Hey. Move the selector lever 22 to the position where the mark 30 is selected.
If the battery is set to the correct position, the battery will be checked. child
is in the battery check state and the LED lamp 32 is on.
If it blinks, it indicates that the power battery has sufficient voltage.
If the light remains off, the voltage of the power battery has decreased.
The electrical functions of the camera device may not be able to function properly.
Let me know. Note that the position of mark 30 is
The lever 22 always depends on the biasing force of the spring.
A return force is applied toward the position of mark 28, and the
After checking the details, release your finger and it will return to the position of mark 28.
be done. This function is activated after battery check.
If you forget to put 2 back, the camera device may not function properly.
The LED lamp 32 blinks without any help.
This is to prevent power consumption from occurring. 34 sets the aperture value or shutter speed in the exposure information.
The setting value is displayed on the display window 36.
be done. This camera device is equipped with an automatic exposure control mechanism.
As mentioned above, especially when using aperture priority or
Either one of the shutter speed priority methods will be adopted.
It is possible to selectively use both methods instead of
This method adopts the so-called dual priority method. Therefore, narrow down
Aperture that automatically calculates and controls shutter speed by setting a value
Set the priority mode and shutter speed to automatically adjust the aperture υ value.
There are two modes: shutter speed priority mode, which is controlled by calculation.
You can choose between (1) and (2) listed above.
As is clear from the formula, even if the shibori is selected preferentially,
Even if the shutter speed is selected preferentially, the
The handling of is exactly the same and therefore one dial
34 to set the desired amount corresponding to the aperture value or shutter speed.
The structure is as follows. Now dial 34.
The amount set is the aperture value or shutter speed.
This can be determined by switching the mode selector switch 38.
do. In addition, depending on the switching of the mode changeover switch 38,
, the contents of the numerical values displayed on the display window 36 are changed. That is, the mode changeover switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode.
When the aperture value is changed, the aperture value is displayed on the display window 36,
Also, when switching to shutter speed priority mode, the display
The shutter speed is displayed on the window 36. This mechanism is
Select either the aperture value or shutter speed displayed in the row.
A single item that selectively blocks currency is sufficient. 40 is the ASA sensitivity setting dial, which allows you to set the speed of the film you are using.
This is for setting the ASA sensitivity. Pinch this dial 40 slightly with your finger in the direction of arrow β.
It can be rotated by raising it and releasing your finger after setting the film sensitivity.
, the spring will return to its original position in the opposite direction to the arrow β and the setting will be completed.
Fixed position. This is to prevent the dial 40 from rotating accidentally during shooting.
This is a mechanism installed in 42, when performing automatic exposure control, adjust the exposure amount to the appropriate amount.
On the other hand, if you take a photo with too much or too little exposure.
When the time is right, move the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40,
Change the set film speed to the actual film speed.
index to obtain over- or under-exposure by
This is the scale. This is the relational expression (1) listed earlier.
, As is clear from (2), the actual film sensitivity
On the other hand, if you change the set film sensitivity, the calculation result will be
, the exposure amount that is considered appropriate and calculated is based on the actual field used.
for the film by the change made to the set film speed.
Focusing on excess or shortage, calculate the arithmetic circuit or its
Easily overloaded without special changes to calculation routines
It allows you to take photos with exposure or underexposure.
It can be said that this is an extremely effective method. 44 is a film rewind knob, which houses the rewind lever 46.
1 frame at a time depending on the winding lever 14.
When is the film being exposed as it is being wound?
, by rotating this knob, it is re-accommodated in the cartridge.
Ru. When rewinding the film, body 4. of
Press the rewind button 48 on the bottom to
The film winding mechanism 9 was released from the film winding lever 14.
At the top, pull the rewind lever 46 from the film rewind knob 44.
Pull it out and rotate it in the direction of the arrow γ. This fill
It is well known that the rewinding of the program is well known. This camera device has - just like any other camera,
A accessory shoe 50 is provided. Of course, the main purpose is for strobe or flash photography.
This is to attach a light emitting device to the camera of the present invention.
・The strobe included in the system will be explained in detail later in 1.・
It works closely with this camera device. Also, this
The accessory 7 u50 includes the camera system of the present invention.
The external photometry adapter included in the stem can be connected.
Ru. Note that this accessory shoe 50 is a synchronizer connection.
In addition to point 52, it can also be controlled from a strobe, external metering adapter, etc.
A control terminal 54 for capturing information and a data terminal for capturing data.
A terminal 56 and an AE lock terminal 58 are provided. The above system
Several levels of level signals are input from the control terminal 54, and
Instruct the camera to operate in different modes and use the data
From terminal 56, the aperture value set on the strobe and external measurement data are input.
The data regarding the subject brightness measured by the optical adapter is now available.
Input as analog value. In addition, we will discuss the non-tropo and external photometry adapters later.
Explain in detail. 60 is an eyepiece shutter lever. The eyepiece shutter is used to block light from the finder window 13.
This is provided in the
When you take your eyes off the viewfinder window 13,
Prevents light entering from 13 from exposing the film surface.
In addition, especially the prerequisites for performing automatic exposure control.
The brightness information of the subject and the light entering from the finder window 13
This is to prevent the addition of errors due to
Operate the peace shutter lever 60 in the direction of arrow C.
Depending on the situation, the finder window will be closed. This mechanism is T
A must-have book for cameras with TL metering function.
Will. 62 is an X contact, which is equipped with a general camera.
It has exactly the same function as a strobe or 7-5 flash.
Configuring synchronization contacts for shooting using
It is something. 64 is the aperture lever, and when pushed in the direction of the arrow δ, the aperture lever is
The lens device 2 is narrowed down. Now, the aperture adjustment of lens device 2
When the aperture value is preset by knot ring 8
, by operating the aperture lever 64, the lens device 2
will be narrowed down to that preset position, and
Make sure that the mark 12 on the aperture adjustment ring 8 is aligned with the index 7.
In this case, the operation of the aperture lever 64 is restricted.
. Note that when the aperture lever 64 is operated to the aperture position,
Align mark 12 on aperture adjustment ring 8 with index 7.
It is possible to do this, but this will be fined as it is an erroneous operation.
A warning is issued in the folder 13. Note that this lens device 2
Condition of aperture adjustment ring 8 and aperture lever 6 of body 4
Regarding the relationship between the status of 4 and mode switching 1 inch 38
will be described in detail later. This aperture lever 64
It is locked when operated in the locked position, but this lock
The lock is released by pressing the release button 66, and the lever
-64 returns to the original position.゛On the bottom of this camera device, there is a screw hole 68 for fixing a tripod.
This screw hole 68 is provided for the motor drive.
It can also be used to attach devices. In addition, the motor
When installing the drive device, the shaft of the winding lever 14
By removing the lower cover 70, the winding lever 1
Fit the shaft of 4 and the hoisting shaft of the motor drive device to start the machine.
A mechanical connection is performed. Attaching the motor drive device
Sometimes, the motor is connected through the contact device 72 on the bottom of the body 4.
- A control signal is given to the drive device. This motor
The drive device will be explained in detail later, but this motor
After the shutter release, the drive device
After all camera operations associated with the
Depending on the driving force, instead of the film winding lever 14,
Wind the film and charge other necessary parts.
The shutter release has the effect of
This allows the photographer to capture the desired scene.
It makes it easier to seize opportunities.
, apart from the volume and weight for the motor and its drive power source.
, it is an extremely useful function. Note that when you pull up the reel rewind knob 44, the button
The case back 74 on the back of the D4 opens and the cartridge containing the file is opened.
You can refill Lum. By opening the back cover 74, the filter on the top surface of the body 4 is removed.
The time counter 15 is reset and returns to the original indicated position.
Ru. The above is a brief explanation of the configuration of each part of this camera device.
However, the specific details of the lens device 2 and body 4 are
Exchange of information or lens device 2 from the body 4 side
The aperture control mechanism is attached to the accessory shoe 50.
The operation of the flash or external metering adapter and camera device
Due to the nature of the work, the motor drive installed on the bottom of the body 4
The relationship between the operation of the device and the camera device, and the inside of the viewfinder 13
Information or data display and operation and operation of camera equipment
Since there is insufficient information regarding the relationship between
do light work FIG. 2 shows the lens device 2 and body of the first illustrated camera device.
This is a perspective view to explain the case where the lens device 4 is separated.
2 is moved relative to body 4 as shown by the arrow λ and assembled.
It will be done. The body 4 is mounted on the mounting surface of the lens device 2.
The mount ring 76 is provided with a mount ring 76 at its outer peripheral end.
Three independent collar parts 78A, 78B, and 78C are protruded from the part.
I'm letting you do it. This mount ring 76 is perpendicular to the optical axis.
1 or phi parallel to the plane. The optical path is parallel to the lumen plane.
It is firmly fixed to the body 4 so as to surround it. this is,
This mount ring 76 connects the lens device 2 to the body 4.
This is the only component that
will definitely have a negative effect on the subject image formed on the film surface.
It depends on giving. In contrast, the lens device
A tightening ring 10 is rotatably provided on the second side.
With the attached ring 10 in the illustrated state, the lens device 2 is moved in the direction of the arrow λ.
When moved and assembled to the body 4, the mount ring 76
Each of the flanges 78A, 78B, and 78C has good passing performance.
A circular ring having cutouts 80A, 80B, and 80C,
Each collar portion 78A, 78B of the mounting ring 76. 78C and the corresponding notches 80A, 80B and 180C.
After passing, rotate the tightening ring io in the direction of the arrow φ.
By doing so, each of the flanges 78A, 78B, 78C is
Tightening ring 10 (7) non-notched portions 82A, 82B, 82C
The lens device 2 is configured to be fixed to the body 4 by matching the lens device 2 to the body 4.
It is something that will be done. On the mounting side of the lens device 2 to the body 4, there is a
There are various mechanisms for information exchange and control between
available. 84 is related to the number of aperture stages from the open position of the lens device 2.
The lever moves along the annular hole 86 in the directions of arrows ψ and φ.
It is arranged in a dynamic manner. This lever 84 has a strong spring
is biased in the direction of the arrow φ by the lens mount-2.
is not attached to the body 4, and the tightening ring 1o is
- When the preparation state is as shown, the arrow mark inside the annular hole 86
It is held in a state of movement in the φ direction. In this state, in order to attach the lens mounting f2 to the body 4,
It is released by rotating the tightening ring 10 in the direction of the arrow φ.
It will be done. At this time, the lever 84 is applied to the biasing force of the spring.
Therefore, it moves in the direction of arrow φ, but when it reaches a certain position
Its movement is regulated. This certain position means that the lens device
Number of aperture steps from the open position for the preset aperture value of 2
The closer to the arrow ψ direction, the smaller the
The smaller the number of aperture stages, the closer to the arrow φ direction, the larger the
This corresponds to the number of aperture stages. this lens
The device 2 presets the aperture value using the aperture setting ring 8.
As mentioned earlier, there are many things that can be done.
The movement restriction position of the bar 84 depends on this preset aperture value.
The lever 84 also moves accordingly.
So, depending on the position of this lever 84, the aperture setting ring
Open aperture for the preset aperture value set by 8
Possibility of transmitting the number of aperture steps from the
have The term “possibility” here applies to this example.
The camera equipment that has been developed is mainly used for automatic exposure control.
The main focus is on the body of the camera device, which will be explained in detail later.
Since it is also possible to preset the aperture value from the lens side,
The aperture setting of the lens device 2 is performed by detecting the position of the bar 84.
It is necessary to detect the number of aperture stages preset in /g8.
This is because it is not necessary. This lever 84 has a mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8.
When set to index 7, always use the maximum aperture of the lens device.
The position corresponding to the number of stages, that is, depending on the biasing force of the spring.
state in which they are moved all at once in the direction of the arrow φ in the annular hole 86.
becomes. By the way, the lever 84 moves in the φ direction according to the biasing force of the spring.
No matter where the movement is restricted, the number of aperture stages is small.
direction, that is, the direction of the arrow ψ, the spring
It is possible to move against the urging force. That is, lever 8
4 to the desired position against the biasing force of the spring.
In some cases, the desired aperture value may be set without relying on the aperture setting ring 8.
This can be set. This characteristic is unique to servo motors.
The aperture value is automatically adjusted by controlling the position of the lever 84.
It is applicable to a so-called servo type AE camera that controls
Although it has been realized, it has drawbacks such as slow response, so
In the example, this characteristic is utilized by another method.
. Now, what is shown at 88 is the aperture lever.
The aperture lever 88 is in the open position of the aperture in the direction of the arrow Ω,
In other words, it corresponds to the large diameter side, and depending on the spring, it is always on this side.
is biased in the direction. Also, the direction of arrow ν is the lens aperture.
In order to correspond to the narrowing position, that is, the small diameter side, the aperture reno <
-88 in the direction of arrow ν against the biasing force of the spring.
By moving the lens device 2 from the open position to the
The aperture is narrowed down by the number of aperture stages corresponding to the position of the lever 84.
This will result in Moreover, what is indicated by 90 is the open aperture of this lens device 2.
An open bottle with a protrusion amount corresponding to the value of
On the other hand, it is used to transmit the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2.
It will be done. This open air. 90 is an exposure based on subject brightness information using TTL metering.
Various corrections for calculating accurate subject brightness information in calculations
It is an important presence in corrective action. Also, 91 indicates the maximum aperture of this lens device 2.
Minimum diameter pin with protrusion corresponding to the value, i.e. the minimum diameter
transmits the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 to the body 4.
used to do. This minimum diameter pin 91 is
When controlling the lens device, check the limit of the aperture of the controllable lens device 2.
It is used for issuing. 92 is when the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7.
When the lens device 2 side is
indicates that the aperture value has not been preset.
It was set up to transmit information to the other side. On the other hand, each of the lens devices 2 as described above is provided on the body side.
Equipped with a mechanism that cooperates with the seed mechanism. 94 has its surface on the arrow δ side provided in the lens device 2.
A that operates by contacting the surface of the lever 84 on the arrow φ side.
Use the E lever to constantly bias in the direction of arrow δ with a weak spring force.
has been done. This lever 94 is biased in the direction of arrow a.
The spring moves the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side in the direction of arrow φ.
is extremely weak compared to the force urging the lever 84.
cannot resist the force that tries to move in the direction of the arrow φ.
stomach. Therefore, this AE lever 94 is the lever on the lens device 2 side.
It is always urged in the σ direction by the bar 84. child
The AE lever 94 is activated when the winding lever 14 is operated.
The arrow moves along with the lever 84 and against its biasing force.
It moves in the direction of mark δ and is locked in the position shown. this
The lock is released when the shutter is released, but the lock is released when the shutter is released.
As a result of the release of the lever 84, the AE lever 94 naturally
It will run in the direction of arrow σ depending on the urging force of . In addition, the
D4 is set by dial 34' or calculated.
Based on the control aperture) value obtained as a result, the AE lever 94
This clamp has a mechanism to clamp it in an appropriate position.
When the lamp mechanism operates, the AE lever 94 is clamped.
Stop at a position. Therefore, naturally, the lever 84 is also
In the direction of arrow φ at the position corresponding to the clamp position of lever 94
The preset number of aperture steps will be restricted.
1, that is, the AE lever 94 is clicked.
The lamp position determines the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2.
therefore, detecting its clamp position is extremely important.
A highly accurate mechanism is required. Such a mechanism
, the AE lever 94 is based on the locked position,
Converts the amount of movement in the direction of arrow σ into pulses.
Depending on the
A configuration is applied in which the desired number of 9 stages of aperture is obtained by counting.
Ru. In addition, due to its structure, the aperture provided in the body 4
Push the closing lever 64 in the direction of arrow δ to narrow down the lens.
If you want, lock the AE lever 94 at the standard position or
The clamp at the desired position is released and the AE lever 9
4 runs in the direction of the arrow σ due to the biasing force of the lever 84.
Become. When zooming in, use the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side to adjust the aperture.
If an aperture value has been selected, the aperture range up to this aperture value will be
The lever 84 is restricted from traveling at a position corresponding to the number of steps.
, Therefore, the AE lever 94 also stops its movement, and eventually the setting
The aperture will be stopped down to the specified aperture value, but the aperture setting
If mark 12 is set on ring 8, lever 8
4 is the maximum aperture value position, that is, the travel restriction until the minimum aperture position
As a result, the aperture is stopped down to the maximum aperture value.
This will result in Therefore, in this embodiment, the aperture setting ring 8 is
When setting the filter 12, the aperture lever 64 is not operated.
The configuration is such that it is locked so that it cannot be used. but
, for some reason the gong lever 94 is not locked in the reference position.
For multiple exposures if released before the shutter release
Operate the winding lever while pressing button 16.
In some cases, this AE record can be easily
The bar 94 can be locked at the reference position. Na
Oh, this AE lever 94 is locked at the standard position.
This means that the AE charge is being made, and the AE charge is being made.
It is said that we will perform Renoku. Also, the AE lever 94 is at the reference position.
The act of being released from a position is called an AE discharge. 96 is a wide-open input for taking in the wide-open aperture value of the lens device 2.
Use the force pin to contact the open pin/90 of the lens device 2 and tighten the pin.
A signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the lens 90, opening of the wholesale lens device 2
This is to receive a signal according to the aperture value. In addition,
This open input pin 96 converts the amount of movement into a digital value.
It is connected to a converting mechanism, and eventually the lens device 2
The open aperture value will be captured as a digital value. 97 is the maximum aperture value for capturing the minimum aperture value of lens device 2.
A small diameter input pin, which is connected to the smallest diameter pin 91 of the lens device 2.
A signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91 upon contact, that is, a lens
A signal corresponding to the maximum aperture value of device 2, that is, the minimum aperture aperture.
It is meant to be taken in. In addition, this minimum diameter mold/
97 is the maximum aperture that converts the amount of movement into a digital value
The value will be imported as a digital value. 98 is an aperture drive lever, and the surface in the direction of arrow ε is the lens device.
Contact the surface in the direction of the arrow Ω of the tightening lever 88 of No. 2.
are facing each other, and the arrow is pressed before the exposure starts when the shutter is released.
Move in the ε′ force direction and move the diaphragm drive lever 88 in the arrow ν direction.
and move the aperture of lens device 2 from the open position to the lever.
A device that allows the aperture to be narrowed down to the aperture position specified by 84.
It is. Note that this aperture drive lever 98 is
, moves in the direction of the arrow ω and returns to the original position, and the lens device 2
Open the aperture again. This aperture drive lever 98
is to operate the aperture lever 64 of the body 4 in the direction of the arrow δ.
It is also possible to move in the direction of the arrow ε by this is
, through the lens device 2 narrowed down from the finder 13.
This is a necessary mechanism for viewing the subject image. 100 is an AE facing the AE bin 92 of the lens device 2.
At the detection unit, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2
When the arc 12 is selected, the protruding AE bin 92
11j to detect and indicate that mark 12 is selected
It is provided to receive control signals. In addition, as is clear from the above explanation, the lens device 2
When trying to control the aperture value from the body 4 side, the aperture setting
Mark 12 on fixed ring 8 must be aligned with index 7.
From now on, this mark 12 will be referred to as AE mark.
It is called ku. Next, attach the lens device 2 to the body 4 and then narrow down the
, that is, the lever 8 until the shutter release is performed.
4, AE lever 94, aperture cutting lever 88, aperture drive lever
For each movement of bar 98, aperture setting ring 8
Fig. 3 explains the case where is set to some aperture value.
According to the diagram, set the aperture setting ring 8 to the AE mark 12.
Explain each case according to the explanatory diagram in Figure 4.
I will clarify. As mentioned before, Fig. 3 shows that something happens on the lens device 2 side.
The aperture value is amazing. Each lever in the set state
This is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the
With the lens device 2 in the ready state, the tightening ring 10 is
Since the lever 84 has not been rotated to the mounting position, the lever 84 is
-84 against the force of the spring that urges it in the direction of the arrow φ.
, is held in a state of being moved in the direction of the arrow ψ. Now, the lens device 2 can be tightened without attaching it to the body 4.
When only the lever 10 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ, the lever 8
4 is regulated by the aperture setting ring 8 as shown in the same figure (b).
move in the direction of arrow φ to the specified position. This movement is
A spring that tries to move the bar 84 in the direction of the arrow φ
Depends on the power of. Next, AE charge this lens device 2.
Unfinished or narrowed down (-64 is suppressed)
Let's assume that it is attached to body 4 when it is in use. in this case,
The AE lever 94 on the body 4 side has a spring in the direction of arrow θ.
energized, but not specifically locked.
Therefore, turn the tightening ring 10 of the lens device 2 in the direction of the arrow φ.
Rotate it and attach it to the body 4, and the Leno <-84
The biasing force of the spring that tries to rotate it in the direction of mark φ
tries to move the AE lever 94 in the direction of arrow a.
Since the biasing force of the spring is superior, the lever 84' is the same.
As shown in Figure (C'), it is determined by the aperture setting ring 8.
move in the direction of the arrow φ to the position shown. Along with this,
The AE lever 94 is pushed by the lever 84 as shown in FIG.
The situation will be as shown in . Narrowing down body 4 here and now
With the lever 64 returned to its original position, the winding lever 1
If AE charge is performed by operating 4, then A
The E lever 94 moves in the direction of arrow θ against the biasing force of the lever 84.
and is locked at its reference position as shown in the same figure.
It will be done. Therefore, the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side is the eaves lever 9.
4 and held in the state shown in the same figure (D').
It happens. In addition, the record is added to body 4 after AE charging is completed.
When the lens device 2 is installed, the AE lever 9
4 and Leno <-84 are shown in the same figure (Dl (l [shown in 51)
It is obvious that it will be held in such a position. next
When the shutter release is performed, the AE lever 94
Since the lock is released, lever 841dAEL/bar 9
It ran in the direction of arrow σ against the spring biasing force of 4, and
The position defined by the aperture setting ring 8 as shown
Stop at. At this time, I was pushed by lever 84 and came running.
The AE lever 94 also stops when the lever 84 is stopped, as shown in
It will stop at the specified position. Next, the aperture drive lever of body 4
When 98 moves in the direction of arrow ε as shown in ■ in the figure,
As shown in the figure, the aperture lever 88 of the lens device 2 is
is driven in the ν direction, and the aperture is defined by the lever 84.
The position will be narrowed down to the desired position. In this state, the exposure is
However, the state shown in the drawing is at least until the exposure stops.
It is held until Note that the aperture drive lever is
-98 returns to the direction of arrow ω, lever 84 closes the aperture.
The lever 88, AE lever 94, and aperture drive lever 98 are the same.
The state will return to the state shown in Figure (Q (6). Through the above operations, the lever 84, AE lever 9
4 does not have any particularly meaningful action. this is
- As mentioned earlier, in this embodiment, from the lever 84
Preset by aperture setting ring 8 for body 4
Equipped with a mechanism that captures information on the number of deviation steps related to the aperture value that has been set.
However, the AE lever 94 is not in the desired position.
By pressing, ni〕=-84 runs in the direction of arrow σ.
The 1f set of diaphragms is controlled from the so-called body 4 side.
The diaphragm on the lens device 2 side
The aperture is preset using the setting ring 8.
As mentioned above, the levers 84 and 94 are not performing any action.
. However, as is clear from the explanation of the figure, each lever 84
．． 94 each have independent functions, but
Unrelated modes will not cause any interference or operational failure.
There isn't. This is the A for a given lens device configuration.
Arrangement of E lever 94 and lever 84, energizing each lever
Much depends on the force distribution of the spring. As mentioned before, Figure 4 shows that there is no aperture on the lens device 2 side.
Each lever in the state where the value system is not preset
This is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the
With the lens device 2 in the ready state, the tightening ring 10 is
Since the lever 84 has not been rotated to the mounting position, the lever 84 is
84 in the direction of the arrow φ,
It is kept moved in the direction of the arrow ψ. now
, the tightening ring without attaching the lens device 2 to the body 4.
When only the lever 10 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ, the lever 84
moves in the direction of the arrow φ as shown in the same figure (b).
. By the way, this movement position is set by the aperture setting ring 8.
Same position as specified when selecting the minimum aperture of the device
It is. Note that this moving force moves the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.
It depends on the force of the spring you are trying to move. This time,
If the lens device 2 is not AE charged or the aperture is
Mounted on the body 4 with the included reno <-64 pressed.
Let's say I arrived. In this case, the AE lever 9 on the body 4 side
4 is the previous shooting situation or narrowing down, <-64
It is in an uncertain position depending on the state. In other words, the body 4 side?
When performing preset control of the aperture, the AE lever 9
4 is clamped at a location according to the aperture value to be controlled,
Remain in position until next AE charge
When the aperture lever 64 is operated again, the AE data is
The clamp is released at the same time as the charge is applied. Therefore, the tightening ring 10 of the lens device 2 should be moved in the direction of the arrow φ.
When the lever 84 is rotated and attached to the body 4, the lever 84
It is attached toward the position shown in the same figure (b) by the spring force.
However, in reality, the fart lever 94 is
location (this is an example, what is the actual location)
It is unclear whether the lever 8
4 is shown in the same figure (C') by the AE lever 94.
position in the direction of the arrow φ and rely on the AE lever 94.
further movement is restricted. body here and now
4 winding lever 14 is operated and AE charging is performed.
If it is, the biasing force of the AE lever 94 is <-84.
is driven in the direction of arrow θ, as shown in (6) in the same figure.
It is locked at that reference position. Therefore, the lens device 2 side
The lever 84 in FIG. 1 is pushed by the AE lever 94.
It will be kept in the state shown. In addition, AE Char
Even when the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 that has been completely
In exactly the same way, the positions of the AE lever 94 and the lever 84 are in the same figure.
It is obvious that it will be held at the position shown at 00.
Ru. Next, when the shutter release is performed, the AE
Since the bar 94 is unlocked, the lever 84 is
Runs in the direction of the arrow σ against the spring biasing force of the bar 94.
start. The AE lever 94 is pushed by the lever 84 and
It runs in the direction of mark σ, but in the meantime, inside the camera device, the AE
The amount of travel of the lever 94 is detected in a pulse manner and the body 4 is
Aperture stage corresponding to the aperture set or calculated on the side
When the vehicle travels a distance corresponding to the number, the AE lever 94 is clicked.
lights and restricts further driving. Therefore, A.E.
The lever 94 is clamped and held in the position shown in the figure.
However, at the same time, the lever 84 also depends on the AE lever 94.
Its travel is restricted at the position shown in the figure. More than
Through the operation, the aperture set or calculated on the body 4 side
This means that the current state is preset. Next, the body
The aperture drive lever 98 of the
When moving in the direction, the aperture of the lens device 2 as shown in the figure.
The closing lever 88 is driven in the direction of the arrow υ, and the closing lever 88 is driven in the direction of the arrow υ.
The position is narrowed down to the position regulated by 84. In this state, exposure starts, but the condition shown in the drawing is
The condition is maintained at least until the exposure stops. In addition,
After the exposure is completed, the aperture drive lever 98 returns to the direction of the arrow ω.
Then lever 84, aperture lever 88, AE lever 9
4. The aperture drive lever 98 is shown in the same figure (c) (as shown in Cb).
It will return to the same state. The above operations are performed while performing open metering with lens device 2.
cormorant. Automatic exposure control including aperture 2 priority and shutter speed priority
It is an action that is performed when a control action is applied, and it is a special action.
When controlling the aperture value from the body 4 side of the camera device,
Effective. FIG. 5 shows the strut applied to the camera system of this embodiment.
This figure shows an example of a robot. Figure (a) is a front view, and (b) is a front view.
A rear view, and (c) a bottom view. I am familiar with this strobe.
It has an automatic light control function, but it also has a camera device and
It is distinctive in that it has an information exchange function. In the figure, 102 is a light emitting part, which indicates the light emitting ability of this strobe.
Emits a flash of light. Further, 104 is the light emitting section 10.
Detect the reflected flash from the subject in order to dim the flash of step 2
This is a light detection section. The auto flash applied to this strobe
With the dynamic flash control method, the strobe is fired once when taking a photo.
The same effect occurs when the light emitting unit 102 emits light onto the subject.
At times, the light detection unit 104 measures the light reflected from the subject.
When the total amount of the reflected light reaches a predetermined value, the light emitting section
By stopping the light emission from 102, the film surface
The purpose is to provide an appropriate amount of exposure to the image. In addition,
In order to perform automatic flash control, the film sensitivity and shooting
The aperture value of the lens must be given as setting information in advance.
The film sensitivity setting driver was created for this purpose.
dial 106 and aperture value setting dial 108. here
Considering this, setting information regarding film sensitivity and aperture value is
, film sensitivity setting dial on the side of the camera device
40 and a die for setting the aperture or shutter speed
It seems like it could be done through Yaru 34, but this
In this example, the strobe is connected to a camera other than this system.
In order to make it possible to use it in the system, we deliberately designed it automatically.
A means of inputting the prerequisite information necessary for dimming is provided on the strobe side.
. Note that the aperture value setting dial 108 is a manual or
mode, that is, the operator can set the aperture value without relying on automatic light control.
setting mode and the desired setting for automatic light control.
You can select the mode of selecting the aperture value.
. This selection can be made using the manual written on dial 1°08.
mode display 110 or aperture value display 112.
Dial 1 to match the index 114 provided on the flash body
This is done by rotating 08. Also, the above
The film sensitivity setting dial 106 regulates its rotation.
By moving the lock lever 116 in the direction of the arrow τ,
It becomes possible to rotate. This lock lever 116 is always
, is biased by a spring in the direction opposite to the arrow τ, and the
Film sensitivity setting dial 106 does not rotate inadvertently.
I'm doing it like that. Note that depending on the rotation of the dial 106,
The film is inserted into the window 118 provided on the dial 106.
The ASA sensitivity display 120 appears, and the desired A
Index 1 with SA sensitivity display 120 provided on the dial 106
By setting the value to 22, the film sensitivity setting is completed. Note that this film sensitivity setting dial 106 is a guide/sensitivity setting dial 106.
It also serves as a number calculation board, and depends on dial 108.
If manual mode is selected, the subject or
Manually set the aperture value of lens device 2 based on the distance at
It can be used when In other words, the aperture value setting dial
When the control unit 108 is set to manual mode,
The 9-point flash does not perform automatic flash adjustment, and
Emit the maximum amount of light. Therefore, it is suitable for the film surface.
In order to give a positive exposure amount, the shooting distance and the aperture of the shooting lens are important.
It is necessary to select an appropriate combination of values, but
The guide number calculation board used for this purpose has a film feel.
Matches the guide number of the strobe according to the degree.
For example, if you change the combination of aperture value and shooting distance,
A new configuration is taken. -Therefore, the film speed setting dial
It is natural to use Le 106 as a guide number calculation board.
Of course, in this example, the da
A series of aperture values is displayed in the window 124 provided on the ear 106.
126 on the periphery of the window 124 of the dial 106.
A series display 128 of shooting distance is performed, and a table of corresponding aperture values is displayed.
The photographer manually selects the focus from the display 126 and the shooting distance display 128.
By setting the aperture value on the camera device side, it is possible to adjust the
The structure is such that it provides a positive exposure amount. In addition, good
As is well known, most strobes are of the capacitor discharge type.
It has a configuration that boosts the voltage of the battery or commercial power supply and clocks it.
After setting the voltage to enough to cause the Senon discharge tube to emit light,
Accumulates in the capacitor and distorts the charge on the capacitor when shooting.
By discharging through a non-discharge tube, the discharge tube can be made to emit light.
The structure has been adopted such that Therefore, xenon mentioned above
In order for the discharge tube to reliably emit light, the capacitor must be
It is necessary that the capacitor is charged to the voltage of
If you take a picture before the battery is fully charged, the
Since the robot does not emit light, sufficient exposure to the film surface cannot be obtained.
There will be no such thing. Therefore, what is needed is a charging completion table.
It is an indicator light 130, which emits light when charging is complete to alert the photographer.
It is to make things known. In addition, this charging completion - display
The light 130 also serves as a switch for the light emission test, and this
The strobe emits light by pressing the switch. This machine
Measure exposure using a flash meter, etc.
It can be used effectively in some cases. 132 is the power switch
By turning on this switch at
Charging will start. The functions of this strobe described above have been known for a long time.
It has roughly the same function as a strobe with an automatic light control device.
However, as mentioned earlier, this strobe is
One structure of camera system depending on the combination with camera device.
component, and can greatly improve the operability of camera equipment.
It is something that The strobe shown in the fifth figure is an accessory for the camera device shown in the first figure.
・It can be attached to the shoe 50, but in that case, the camera
Shoe 134 installed at the bottom of the strobe body from the rear side of the
After fitting and installing the accessory shoe 50, tighten it.
It is fixed by tightening with the attached ring 136. In addition
, there is a synchronization contact on the bottom of the strobe shoe 134.
138, control signal contact 140, data signal contact 14
2, and when the strobe is attached, the accessory
synchro contact 52, control terminal 54, data
They are electrically connected to the terminals 56, respectively. Furthermore, the above system
Nue 134 includes a ground terminal 144 in a part thereof,
When attaching the strobe, attach the accessory shoe 50 to the main body.
and ground it. When taking pictures using strobe light, the focal
A camera with a plain shutter can emit strobe light and
The shutter speed that allows synchronized exposure is
The robot synchronization shutter speed TSYN is generally 1/60th of a second.
Although it is on the slow side of 1/125th of a second or less, camera operation
It often happens that this setting is made incorrectly,
I also reset the shutter speed for flash photography.
Doing so may impede its operability and require some countermeasures.
Measures were needed. On the other hand, the strobe applied to this example is
In a passive manner, such as simply issuing a warning in preparation for
The shutter speed required for flash photography from the flash side.
We have adopted an active method of controlling the temperature. this
Before taking pictures using strobe light, the camera equipment side
No matter where the speed is set, it will automatically stop.
All functions that allow the shutter to be released at the robot synchronized shutter speed TSYN
The automatic method and the shutter speed on the camera device side are the same as the strobe.
The shutter speed was set to a higher speed than TSYN.
Automatically synchronizes shutter speed TSY only if
Press N to release the shutter, and use this strobe synchronized shutter speed.
In the shutter speed range smaller than TSYN, the camera device side
Semi-automatic to release the shutter at the shutter speed set in
There are several possible methods, but in this example, a fully automatic method or
is configured to select and adopt a semi-automatic method as appropriate.
Ru. The choice between the fully automatic method and the semi-automatic method is
This is a changeover switch 146 provided on the back of the robot body. In addition, the discrimination signal of the switching position of this changeover switch 1.46
is controlled along with a signal indicating that strobe charging is complete.
Contact 140 to control terminal 5 of accessory shoe 50
4 as a signal containing two pieces of information. This is done by controlling the strobe side from the control terminal 54 on the camera side.
The current value flowing when voltage is applied to the contact 140 is
The settings are different depending on the switching position of the switching switch 146.
This is possible by Note that these two pieces of information are
, an AND clause with information indicating that strobe charging is complete.
The information is given to the camera device side according to the condition. follow
If the strobe is not fully charged, the camera device side
There is no signal transmission to. The strobe is now fully charged.
If a signal indicating that is given as the first information, then
is captured by the camera device as a signal indicating the fully automatic method.
In addition, the charging completion signal is given as the second information.
If the camera
It will be taken into place. from this control terminal 54.
This camera device hisses depending on the first or second information signal.
Flash photography mode is activated, and the shutter speed is set to the flash photography mode.
Synchronized shutter speed or lower seconds (semi-automatic)
), and at the same time the data terminal 56 or
This data terminal 56 is connected to the aperture setting dial 108.
The information set is given as an analog value. That is,
In automatic light control mode, as mentioned earlier, the lens
The information about the aperture value is essential and should be
I configured it so that it is set on the flash side, but if you change this setting value to that
In order to use it as the aperture control signal on the camera device side, the transmission must be
A transmission system is required. That's why it was installed on the strobe side.
is provided at the data contact 142, and is also provided on the camera body side.
The data terminal 56 is connected. Now, the camera device side is charged.
When the power completion signal is input, the camera device connects the data terminal 5.
6, import the analog information about the aperture value and
Aperture control will be performed according to the information. In addition, Stro
The aperture setting dial 108 is set to manual mode.
If selected, that data contact 142 has other
Analog information other than the level corresponding to the aperture value, e.g.
analog data at a relatively higher level than the data representing the value.
A signal is output, and the strobe is set to manual mode depending on the signal.
A signal indicating that it is in the mode and will emit maximum light intensity.
The signal is transmitted to the camera body. At this time, aperture control is not performed on the camera device side.
, the desired or guide number meter on the lens device 2 side.
The aperture value calculated from the abacus is set through the aperture setting ring 8.
It is necessary to define According to the configuration as described above, the power in this embodiment is
The Mera system uses an auxiliary light called a strobe to take photos.
Even if you hit a shadow, you can get the correct exposure completely automatically.
It has traditionally been used for shooting with automatic flash photography.
When hit, synchronize the speed of the camera device with the strobe.
Possible strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or less, e.g.
Set the aperture value to 1/60th of a second or less and automatically adjust the aperture value.
Because of the light, it is necessary to set the value specified by the strobe side.
However, the shutter speed setting is also the aperture value setting.
is also done completely automatically, greatly improving operability and
It is possible to avoid erroneous operations. Also, on the camera device side,
Automatic exposure control will continue until the flash is fully charged.
Since charging will be carried out, shutters will be applied even to the trenches where charging is not completed.
Even if you release the camera, the exposure will be at or close to the correct exposure.
Since the photo will be taken in large quantities, it will be difficult to obtain a good photo.
The probability of obtaining an image increases, which means that
When the camera device performs strobe photography,
If the battery is not fully charged, the flash will fire when the shutter is released.
If not, the shutter set for flash photography.
Compared to the speed and aperture value, there were many cases of underexposure.
This is a great progress. Additionally, this camera system does not allow flash photography.
Therefore, it is possible to simply store data without any special operations on the camera device side.
Attach the robot to the camera device and turn on the strobe power switch.
When the strobe is charged enough to fire
, the camera device automatically switches to flash photography mode.
After that, simply adjust the distance and release the shutter.
It is only an operation, and there are various types of conventional strobe photography.
Compared to camera equipment that required setting operations, it has a wide range of operability.
We are trying to improve. The most important thing to include in your camera is automatic exposure control.
One of these is the photometry system. This metering system is an exposure calculation
A function to import subject brightness information, which is one element for
The brightness of the subject is measured through the photoelectric conversion element.
The most commonly used configuration is one that converts the signal into an electrical signal.
Ru. Currently, light meters are incorporated into -eye reflex cameras.
Most of them use internal light (TTL) photometry.
This is a single-lens reflex camera with automatic exposure control.
- Cameras are no exception. This TTL photometry method
actually measures the brightness of the subject that enters through the lens.
This allows for relatively accurate photometry, and
It can be applied equally even when using lenses with different distances.
Therefore, its usefulness is extremely large. Also, the metering area or frame can be viewed through the viewfinder.
It is also possible to easily make corrections to the photometric leaf.
come. There was a discussion regarding camera equipment using this TTL photometry method.
The problem is related to the photometric area in the frame. This photometric area also covers specific parts of the frame, such as the center.
Partial metering area and all parts of the frame
It is roughly divided into two areas: the average photometry area, which measures the average photometry.
1. Inside, this partial photometry area and average photometry area are combined.
Alternatively, you can divide the average photometry area into several areas and
Irregular photometry areas such as changing the light are also being considered. For camera equipment that incorporates an automatic exposure control function, this
Is it better to apply the average photometry area to the photometry area for instant shooting?
Since it is convenient from a perspective view, the average photometry area is widely applied.
However, it still has some problems. . This becomes a big problem when using wide-angle lenses etc.
However, the background is brighter than the actual subject you want to photograph.
When the background is extremely different, the automatic exposure control mechanism
Exposure control is performed according to the brightness to adjust the exposure to the actual subject you want to photograph.
The subject may be extremely underexposed or overexposed.
There is a risk that it will happen. In order to deal with this point, the
The solid AE lock mechanism is provided, but like this
With a camera device that performs average metering, it is possible to
If you want to measure only the brightness of the subject at
The camera often approaches the subject so that a specific position of the subject is in the frame.
After 7 raming so as to occupy most of the area, photometry was performed.
, then move away from the subject while operating the AE lock mechanism.
to achieve the desired framing and focusing.
The troublesome operation of performing the shutter release on the
It clings to me. In order to avoid this, it is necessary to adjust the subject brightness using partial metering.
photometry is preferred. The camera system of this embodiment has such problems.
In order to cope with this, accessory shoe 50 of the camera device
It is configured so that an external photometer other than the TTL photometer can be attached to the
At the same time, automatic exposure is performed based on the photometry results from this external photometer.
The configuration is such that the output control is performed. Figure 6 shows the external structure applied to the camera system of this embodiment.
・This shows a perspective view of the photometer, showing the bottom surface 14 of this photometer.
The contact 146 provided at 5 is an accessory on the camera device side.
- Can be contacted with the control terminal 54 provided inside the shoe 50
, when the photometer is attached to the accessory shoe 50.
This is to inform the camera of this fact. This is a
All strobes attached to the accessory shoe 50
A charging completion signal consisting of two pieces of information indicating automatic or semi-automatic.
is given to the camera device from the photometer as another third information.
It is something that can be done. The camera device that received this third information
, switches to external photometry mode and inputs from data terminal 56.
Incorporating the analog information that is displayed as subject brightness information
becomes. Note that the contact point 148 provided on the bottom of the photometer is
When the photometer is attached to the accessory shoe 50, the data end
It is possible to contact the child 56 , and the radiation incident through the light-receiving window 150 can be
Outputs the brightness of the subject light as analog data, and
The data is transmitted to the camera device side through the data terminal 56. Said reception
The acceptance angle of the light window 150 should be fixed and set as appropriate depending on the purpose.
However, in this example, a zoom function is added to the light receiving angle, and measurement is possible.
Depending on the dial 152 on the top of the light meter, the shooting lens to be used can be adjusted.
The acceptance angle can be adjusted freely according to the focal length and desired photometry area.
The configuration is such that it can be set variably. In such a configuration, the camera device is equipped with an accessory shoe.
-50 automatically when a photometer for external photometry is attached.
Switches to external photometry mode and uses photometry information from the photometer.
Therefore, automatic exposure control will be performed, and the scope of its application will be changed.
Further expansion is possible. Now - TTL exposure incorporated into ocular reflex cameras
When considering the external photometer and the external photometer mentioned earlier, these measurements
The light method uses a configuration that measures the light reflected from the subject.
Since this is a so-called reflected light metering method, the amount of light measured depends on the subject.
The brightness corresponds to the actual brightness of the subject.
However, this subject brightness depends on the color tone and surface condition of the subject.
Therefore, apart from practical use, accuracy is greatly affected by
By measuring the brightness of the light, that is, the illuminance,
When trying to make accurate exposure decisions that are not affected by color tone, etc.
In this case, it cannot be said that it is an appropriate method. For example, under the same lighting
When metering an all-white subject and an all-black subject, the reflection
When measuring light using the optical method, there will naturally be differences in the amount of light measured.
However, when photometry is performed using the incident light method, the amount of photometry is naturally
Because it depends only on the lighting conditions under which both wave objects are placed.
, there is no difference between the two. Therefore, the actual amount of exposure
When trying to find out the
equipment, especially camera equipment with automatic exposure control function.
Automatic exposure control is possible based on the photometry results based on the incident light method.
It is preferable to From this point of view, the camera system in this embodiment
The system also uses an incident light type exposure meter as an external photometry system.
Included in Figure 7 shows the incidence applied to the camera system of this embodiment.
This figure shows a perspective view of an optical exposure meter, and this exposure meter 60 is
It is connected to the camera device by a cord 154. This code 15
4 is various information or information from the exposure meter 160 to the camera device.
Contains a signal line for transmitting data, with coupler 1 at one end
56 to the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device.
At the same time, the plug 158 provided at the other end is connected to the exposure meter 160.
By attaching the exposure meter 160 to the socket 162 of
Connected to camera equipment. A contact point 166 provided on the bottom surface 164 of the coupler 156 is connected to the camera.
The control provided in the accessory shoe 50 on the side of the
In the case of the external photometer mentioned above, which can be contacted with the control terminal 54,
Exactly the same way, a light meter 160 was connected to the camera device.
This is to notify the camera of this fact. this is
Similarly, the stroker attached to the accessory shoe 50
Charging completion consists of two pieces of information indicating whether the battery is fully automatic or semi-automatic.
From the exposure meter to the camera device as a third piece of information separate from the signal
It is given. The camera that received this third information
The device switches to external metering mode and the data terminal 56
Capturing input analog information as illuminance information
Become. This illuminance information is obtained from the external photometer mentioned earlier.
Completely equivalent value in terms of input subject brightness information and exposure calculation
be treated as such. In addition, on the bottom of the coupler 156
Contacts 168 provided are connected to the accessory shoe 50.
It can be contacted with the data terminal 56 when attached to the exposure meter 1.
Analog data of illuminance information obtained as a result of photometry at 60
is transmitted to the camera device side through the data terminal 56.
send Furthermore, a contact point provided on the bottom surface of the coupler 156
170 is an AE lock of the accessory shoe 50;
It is possible to contact the terminal 58, and it is the same as attaching the coupler 156.
At times, this contact 170 contacts the AE lock terminal 58.
The automatic exposure control mechanism of the camera device, especially the amount of light metering
Check. This AE lock is a photometer installed on the exposure meter 160.
It is released only while the button 174 is pressed. In addition, this
The exposure meter 160 starts measuring by pressing the metering button 174.
Start the light and stop the photometry by releasing it. 176 to explain the exposure meter 160 in more detail.
is a rotatable light-receiving head, and its light-receiving part is half-shaped.
It is covered with a spherical diffusion member 178. During photometry,
The light receiving section of the light receiving head 176 is connected from the subject section to the camera device.
After positioning it toward the side, press the photometry button 174. child
The AE lock on the camera device side is released by the operation of
, the calculation for automatic exposure control starts, and the exposure
A total of 160 is the illuminance measured by the light receiving unit after starting photometry.
related data is sent to the camera device through code 154.
Given as analog data. Here, the AE lock
The unlocked camera device performs calculations for automatic exposure control.
This is performed based on the data regarding the illuminance. In addition, when metering
The illuminance obtained as a result of photometry is the meter on the exposure meter 160 side.
It is also displayed depending on the data data 180. Therefore, the photographer
From the instruction of the pointer 182 of the meter 180 through the calculation board 184
The combination of aperture value and shutter speed necessary to obtain the correct exposure
You can also know what is going on. When metering is finished, press metering button 17.
By releasing the pressure in step 4, the camera device returns to AE mode.
When the lock state is entered, the pointer 182 of the meter 180 is turned off.
lamped. In this state, move the exposure meter 160 to the light measurement position.
from the camera, frame and focus as appropriate on the camera device side.
After performing operations such as shutter release, etc.
Automatically exposes based on the AE-locked calculation result.
It is possible to control the exposure and obtain exposure under desired conditions. Please note that this incident light type exposure meter has an AE lock of the camera device.
The reason why we added this function was because the incident light type exposure meter was unavoidable.
Use the camera near the subject, away from where it was installed when shooting.
Therefore, the light metering operation by the exposure meter 160
The location where the camera will be photographed and the location of the camera equipment used for filming must be
The shutter release is not the same, and the shutter release is not the same.
If you zoom in, the exposure meter will be inside the subject and the picture will be taken.
The reason is that there is a risk of error and it is necessary to avoid this.
Based on. That is, the exposure meter 160 is used alone -
Similar to an optical exposure meter, you can temporarily adjust the light metering near the subject.
and release the AE lock of the camera device only when metering.
performs calculations for automatic exposure control based on photometric data.
Therefore, after the photometry is completed, the calculation result during photometry will be displayed depending on the AE lock.
, and then remove the exposure meter 160 from the metering position.
Exposure control based on the calculation results during photometry is now possible.
It is something that As mentioned above, a camera device with an automatic exposure control function
Automatic exposure control based on photometric data from an incident light exposure meter
By adding functions, the scope of application of camera equipment can be widened.
It can be expanded without any expansion. The camera system of this embodiment uses a motor drive device.
This makes the application possible. This motor drive device
automatically advances the film after shutter release
It has a mechanism to perform continuous shooting of moving objects,
Extremely effective for capturing accurate photo opportunities
It can be used, especially for film winding operations.
Since there is no need for a frame for taking photos,
In addition to being able to concentrate on focusing and shutter shooting,
This increases the possibilities for shooting.
It can be raised. Motor drive applied to the camera system of this example
Live equipment is very effectively applied for photography,
Operability of camera device compared to before motor/drive installation
It is a compact and highly functional product that does not worsen the
something is required. Figure 8 shows the modes applied to the camera system of this embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of a data drive device;
186 is the motor drive device main body, 188 is the main body
It protrudes rotatably on the 186 and is attached to the body of the camera device.
It can be screwed into the screw hole 68 provided on the bottom of the book 4.
Camera mounting screw for attaching body 186 to body 4, 1
90 is pivotally connected to the camera mounting screw 188, and
The mounting ring 192 for rotating the screw 188 is this
The power switch for the motor drive device, 194 is the operating switch.
The number of frames that can be taken with the film or the mode desired by the photographer.
For setting the desired number of frames to be taken using the data drive device.
The frame number setting gear 196 is this motor drive device
The remaining film that can be photographed is advanced one frame at a time depending on the
The number of frames or set by the number of frames setting gear 194.
Film counter for displaying the set number of frames, 1
98, this motor drive device is attached to the camera device.
A contact that is connected to the contact device 72 on the bottom surface of the body 4 when the
Terminal 200 is connected to the cover when installing this motor drive device.
It fits into the shaft of the winding lever 14 of the camera device and is mechanically connected.
Winding coupler for tying, 202 is camera device body
4 Rewinding when a motor drive device is installed on the bottom
Since button 48 cannot be operated, press this button 48.
Winding provided for operation from the motor/drive device side
The rewind lever 204 operates the rewind lever (-202).
Depending on the construction, it protrudes above the main body 186 and a camera device is installed.
Winding for pressing the rewind button 48 on the bottom of the body 4
It is a return pin. Please note that when attaching the motor drive device to the camera device,
In this case, remove the fourth lid 70 on the bottom of the body and install the camera device.
The uncoupler 206 that interlocks with the shaft of the winding lever 14 is exposed.
You need to let it come out before you do it. After removing the lid 70,
The motor drive device main body 186 is connected to the camera device body 4.
When attached to the bottom, the winding coupler 2 on the main body 186 side
00 and the coupler 206 on the body 4 side are fitted, and the motor
It is possible to wind the film from the data drive device.
Become. In addition, the motor drive device attached to the camera device
It is necessary to operate in close coordination with each operation of the camera device.
For this purpose, some kind of information transmission method is required between the camera device and the camera device.
steps are required. Contact device 72 and motor drive device on the camera device side
The contact terminal 198 on the side is provided for this purpose.
When the data drive device is attached to the camera device, the camera device
Three contacts 2 included in the contact device 72 on the bottom of the mounting body 4
14.216.218 is the motor drive device main body 18
Three contacts 208.21 included in the contact terminal 198 of 6
o1212, respectively. In addition, here
The contacts 208 and 214 are in contact with the camera device and the motor.
・It connects the ground wire of the drive device, and also
The contacts 210 and 216 are brought into contact by the motor from the camera device side.
Winding is completed from the completion of exposure to the data drive device.
The signal that drives the hoisting motor is transmitted until
The contacts 212 and 218 are in contact with each other.
Shutter release device installed on the motor drive device side
For controlling the shutter release of the camera device from
It is something. In addition, 220 is the shutter release device mentioned above.
, remote operation of camera equipment, especially shutter release
and a motor drive device to wind the film.
It is a device for This shutter release device 220 can control the length appropriately.
Motor drive device body 186 according to code 222
This is connected to the tip of the control cord 222.
Connect the provided plug 224 to the motor drive device main body 186.
This is done by inserting it into the socket 226 provided in the
Ru. This shutter release device 220 has an operation button 228
However, by pressing this operation button 228, the
from the data drive device to the camera device as described above.
Shutter release signal through contacts 212 and 218
is given. This operation button 228 has an effect on the camera device.
Shutter release button provided on the top of the side body 4
It is exactly the same as 18. Note that the operation button 228 is
Press and hold it and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
It will be locked in this state. Regarding the motor drive device configured as described above,
To be more specific, we will add a motor drive device to the camera device.
When applied, firstly, a
After removing the lid 7o, remove the bottom of the camera device body 4 and the motor.
- Align the top surfaces of the drive device main body 186. In this state,
The winding coupler 200 is in a position where it can be fitted with the coupler 206
The mounting screw 188 can be screwed into the screw hole 68.
position, and the pin 204 is aligned with the rewind button 48.
each contact 208 of the contact terminal 198
．． 2101212 is the corresponding contact 21 of the contact device 72
4. Position it so that it can come into contact with 216.218.
There is a need for This positioning is done by the camera device and the motor.
The motor drive
The retaining edge 228 provided on the edge of the soil surface of the main body 186
By holding the bottom of the camera device body 4, it is easy to
And it can be done quickly. Next, attach the mounting ring 190.
By rotating the mounting screw 188, the bolt
It is screwed into the screw hole 68 on the bottom of the motor drive
Firmly fix the device to the camera device. in this state
, the winding coupler 200 and the coupler 206 are fitted, and the contact
Each of the contacts 208, 210, 212 of the terminal 198 is a contact.
Abutting the corresponding contacts 214, 216, 218 of the device 72
do. In addition, the winding coupler 200 and the coupler 206-
For fitting, couple the two claws 230 of the winding coupler 200.
By inserting it into the two retaining holes 232 of the rubber 20'6.
However, depending on the rotational position of each coupler, the motor
The claw 230 of the winding coupler 200 when installing the drive device
does not engage well with the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206
There is. In preparation for such a case, the winding coupler 200 is
It is possible to sink in the axial direction, and the spring
It is held protrudingly by the biasing force. That is, the winding cup
The claw 230 of the coupler 200 engages with the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206.
If not, the claw 230 will fit into the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206.
Because it is pushed by other parts and sinks, the motor drive equipment
This prevents excessive force from being applied to the couplers when installing them.
Ru. However, the operation of the winding lever 14 on the camera device side
Or, it depends on the rotation of the motor on the motor drive device side.
Therefore, the winding coupler 200 or coupler 206 rotates.
Then, the claw 230 and the engagement hole 232 are in a positional relationship where they can engage.
Then, the claw 230 protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring.
It engages with the retaining hole 232. By installing a motor drive device, this camera
The device is capable of automatic film winding after shooting and continuous shooting.
True photography becomes possible. The photographer uses the motor drive device
If you want to take pictures depending on the power switch 192,
Turn on the power to the motor drive device. At this time, already
If film winding is completed on the camera device side, the motor
・The drive device is in a rough condition, but if the film is
If the removal is not completed, the motor drive unit will
After the ilm winding operation is performed, the camera enters the standby state. next,
Press the shutter release button/18 on the camera device side
Depending on the situation, the post-photographing process using this motor drive device
Film winding is performed. In addition, the shutter lever
Press and hold the release button 18.
Therefore, the shutter release and film advance are performed continuously.
Repeated. Note that each time the film is wound, the film is
- Counter 196 performs subtraction counting, and this counter
When the content of 196 becomes "P0", this motor drive
Live devices are regulated in their operation. This is a film
protection of perforations and motor drive equipment.
Important in the sense of not applying excessive force to the motor
This is a great feature. After shooting all the film frames, rewind the film.
In this case, rotate the rewind lever 202 in the direction of the arrow.
The pin 204 pushes the rewind pin 48 of the camera device.
This allows the film to be rewound. Note that the shutter release device 220 is attached to the camera device.
Exactly the same as the provided shutter release button 18
It has the function of
The shutter release and film winding are performed.
Should I keep the operation button 228 pressed?
Continuous shutter release by locking
The film is wound. In addition, there is a selector lever provided on the top surface of the camera device body 4.
-22 to the position where mark 28 is selected, press the screen.
Keep the shutter release button 18 pressed.
holding or operating the shutter release device 220
If the button 228 is pressed and locked, the self-
At time intervals specified by a timer mechanism 1. S
The shutter release and film advance are repeated.
It will be done. As mentioned above, this applies to the camera system of this embodiment.
The motor drive device used for this camera device is
The range can be greatly expanded, and the mobility of the camera device can be improved.
This greatly improves quick shooting performance and operability. The viewfinder plays an extremely important role in camera operation.
Framing is the basics of camera operation.
Most camera operations, including steering and focusing operations,
Since the work is done while looking through the viewfinder,
The viewfinder has an important relationship with the operability of the camera.
As mentioned earlier, there is a
Most of the information necessary for camera operation is provided through the viewfinder.
If we can know this, we can greatly improve its operability.
I can do it. However, the shooting information displayed in the viewfinder is
, it is necessary to efficiently arrange it in a limited area, display
It is also necessary that the information be easy to confirm. This thing is
The shadow person may concentrate on 7raming and focusing.
It is important in the sense of coming. The camera system of this embodiment has a camera device viewfinder.
The main purpose is to efficiently and easily view shooting information, and to prevent camera errors.
New features that prevent manipulation and improve operability
It is equipped with an information display system. The operator can set the shutter speed and aperture through this information display system.
Values low brightness warning, high brightness warning, automatic or manual, pulp
, flash charging completion, warning against incorrect operation, etc.
information is available and therefore looked in the finder
Obtaining information to deal with any situation while remaining in the current state
becomes possible. Figure 9 shows the view through the finder window 13 of the camera device.
This is an explanatory diagram of finder information when
7 orcasing more reliably on the log screen 234.
The split section 236 and micro-
A prism section 238 is arranged coaxially. This four
The casing screen 234 projects the subject onto this screen.
out and perform focusing and 7-raming operations.
This is the most important part of
・In a part outside the outer periphery of Screen/234, the operator cannot take pictures.
You can obtain the desired information you need. Shooting information is in the dark
This can be confirmed even during strobe photography and stage photography.
It is configured to display using light emitting elements such as LEDs.
However, in this embodiment, the information is further digitalized.
It is characterized by displaying. Digital display of shooting information has traditionally been used
Methods of obtaining relative shooting information such as fixed point type and pursuit type
Because photographers can obtain objective shooting information,
When performing framing, framing, orcasing operations,
It is possible to predict the depth of field, hand movements, etc.
Photography operations are now possible. This LED display is the focusing screen 23
A symbol table is provided in a part outside of 4 to represent reciprocal numbers.
It consists of a display section 240 and an 8-character segment, and contains a 4-digit number or
Number symbol display section 242 for displaying numbers and decimal point
A first display section 2 consisting of a decimal point display section 243 for displaying
44, decimal point display part 246 and 8 characters to represent the decimal point
For displaying 92-digit numbers or symbols consisting of segments
a second display section 250 consisting of a numeric symbol display section 248;
°°M when in manual to display manual or automatic mode
” consists of a third display section 252 that displays the characters
There is. The first display section is mainly used to display the shutter speed.
The second display section is mainly used to display the aperture value.
However, depending on the operation mode, other information may be displayed.
There are some things. That is, the first display section displays a display time of 60 seconds to 1/2000 seconds.
In addition to displaying the shutter speed up to
If pulp is selected, “buLb” will be displayed.
Also, when the flash is fully charged when shooting with flash,
The photographer should be informed that flash photography is possible.
Change the 'EF' display to the shutter speed for flash photography.
It is also displayed to confirm that the shooting was performed normally.
As a warning to let the photographer know that
EEI:” is also displayed blinking. Also, the second display section displays the aperture values from Fl, 2 to F22.
In addition to displaying the
Well, manually adjust the exposure by operating the aperture setting ring 8.
In this case, the manually set aperture value is insufficient for proper exposure.
When it is excessive, the flashing “op” display is displayed, and when it is excessive, it is displayed as C.
The blinking display will be 'L'', and the table will be 'oo'' when it is appropriate.
The camera also shows the appropriate aperture to the photographer.
In addition, the photographer may not be able to shoot properly.
A flashing “EE” will be displayed as a warning to prevent people from entering the area.
This is done together with the first display section. The information in the viewfinder as explained above is stored in each camera device.
The following sections are closely related to the operation mode.
1. While explaining each operation mode of the illustrated camera device,
What information is displayed in the finder accordingly?
This is made clear through the explanatory diagram showing the display example in Figure 10.
I'll do it. Now, automatic exposure with shutter speed priority using the camera device shown in the first picture.
When performing controlled photography (hereinafter referred to as AE photography), the body
4 Set the mode selector switch 38 on the top to the shutter speed priority mode.
Set it on the side of the screen and turn the dial 34 to
Allow setting input of shutter speed. Also, the lens
Set the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the device 2 side to the index mark.
settings and preset the aperture of lens device 2 from the body 4 side.
Make it possible to control the cut. In such a situation, this camera
The camera is now in a state where AE photography with shutter speed priority is possible.
Therefore, if you turn the dial 34 now, the first display section 2 will be displayed.
The shutter speed displayed on the dial 44 is determined by the rotation of the dial 34.
It changes depending on the movement. In addition, the shutter speed μ at this time
The illustration is as shown in Figure 10(a)-(1), but the
The shadow person is displayed at the shutter speed displayed on the first display section 244.
By rotating the dial 34 while checking the
You can select and set the desired shutter speed. simultaneous
An arithmetic circuit (not shown) calculates the brightness of the object corresponding to the brightness of the object.
Based on the subject brightness information (still illuminance information), the appropriate exposure or
is over or under exposure by the number of steps desired by the photographer (
This company has an ASA sensitivity setting dial on the top of the body 4.
The setting is made by selecting ←) or ←) on scale 42 at 40.
(hereinafter, this exposure will also be referred to as appropriate exposure).
The aperture value necessary to obtain the desired value is calculated and displayed on the second display section 250.
The screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 10(a)-(1). , subordinate
Therefore, the photographer has to adjust the shutter speed that he or she has set.
Knowing the calculated aperture value before shutter release
I can do it. In this state, release the shutter.
For example, the camera device can adjust the lens device up to the calculated aperture value.
2 and set the shutter speed at the set shutter speed.
Leeds will be held. Note that there is an upper limit to the aperture, or aperture, of the photographic lens device 2 used.
There is a lower limit, and if for the set shutter speed
The calculated lens aperture is the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2.
If it is larger than that, that is, if the subject brightness is low, the calculated
It is impossible to control the aperture with a small aperture value. In such a case,
The second display section 250 is displayed to inform the photographer of this fact.
indicates the maximum aperture of the photographic lens 2 that allows aperture control.
Displays the aperture value and the maximum aperture value blinking. In addition, shooting
The maximum aperture that can be controlled by the lens 20, that is, the maximum aperture value, is determined by the lens
from the release pin 290 of the camera 2 to the release input pin on the body 4 side.
96. Also, if the shutter speed set by the dial 34
The aperture of the lens calculated for the degree is
If the aperture is smaller than the minimum aperture of 2, that is, if the subject brightness is high.
In this case, aperture control using the calculated aperture value is impossible. child
In such cases, a second table will be provided to inform the photographer of this fact.
The display section 250 displays a photographic image corresponding to the minimum aperture that allows aperture control.
Display the aperture value of shadow lens 2, that is, the maximum aperture value, blinking.
. Note that the minimum aperture that can be controlled by the photographic lens device 20, that is,
The maximum aperture value is determined from the minimum aperture pin 91 of the lens device 2 to the body.
It is taken in through the minimum diameter input pin 97 on the 4 side. Note that the subject brightness may vary depending on the set shutter speed.
If it is too low or too high, the second display section 250
The open aperture value or maximum aperture value will flash and issue a warning.
shutter release is possible even when
In this case, the aperture value is displayed blinking on the second display section 250.
controlled according to the value. Also, when performing aperture-priority AE shooting next time,
Set the front mode selector switch 38 to aperture priority mode.
Then input the aperture value by rotating the dial 340 times.
Make it possible. Also, the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side
is set to index 7, and the aperture of lens device 2 is set to the body 4 side.
The preset control output is set to the aperture value set with the dial 34.
Let it come. In such a state, this camera device has aperture control.
The next AE shooting is now possible, and now the dial
34 is displayed on the second display section 250.
The aperture value changes according to the rotation of the dial 340. Na
Oh, the aperture value display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (a) - (1)
The photographer is the same person as shown in the second table above.
Without looking at the aperture value displayed on the display 250,
Select and set the desired aperture value by rotating the lever 34.
can be determined. At the same time, an arithmetic circuit (not shown)
Subject brightness information (or illuminance information) corresponding to the brightness of the subject
The shutter speed required to obtain the correct exposure is determined based on the
10(a)-(
It is displayed as shown in II). Therefore, I am the photographer.
The shutter speed calculated for the aperture value set in
You can know this in advance of Chatta Relics. this state
Then, if you release the shutter, the camera device will be set.
The lens device 2 is stopped down to the aperture value calculated and the calculated image is
The shutter release will be performed at the shutter speed. Note that there is an upper limit to the aperture, or aperture, of the photographic lens device 2 used.
There is a lower limit, and if it depends on the dial 34 on the body 4 side,
The set lens aperture is the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2.
If it is larger, aperture control at the set aperture value is not possible.
It is Noh. In such a case, the aperture value was set incorrectly.
Some kind of countermeasure is required, but in this example, this
In case of incorrect settings such as
It is treated as if the value, that is, the maximum aperture value has been set. example
For example, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is F nano Z- and 1.
8”, dial 3 on the body 4 side
4 and set the aperture value to '1.4'' in F number.
In this case, in actual camera equipment, the set aperture value is the F number.
This value is treated as “1.8” set in
The shutter speed is calculated based on 0. At this time, the fine
The display inside the folder is as shown in Figure 10(e)-(1).
Used to control actual exposure regardless of the setting value of ear 34.
The aperture value, shutter speed, and ivy speed will be displayed. Conversely, the level set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side
If the aperture of the lens is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2,
In this case, aperture control using the set aperture value is impossible. child
In such a case, the aperture value was set incorrectly and there is no explanation.
However, in this example, some countermeasures are necessary.
In case of such incorrect settings, set the aperture value of the minimum aperture of the photographic lens.
, that is, it is treated as if the maximum aperture value has been set. example
For example, the maximum aperture value of lens device 2 is F number 16”.
Despite this, the aperture can be adjusted using the dial 34 on the body 4 side.
If you set the value to '22' in F number,
In actual camera equipment, the set aperture value is F number 16.
” and shunt based on this value.
Calculate the data speed. At this time, the display in the finder is
The setting of the dial 34 as shown in Fig. 10(e)-(■)
The aperture value and series are used to control the actual exposure regardless of the fixed value.
Shutter speed is displayed. Furthermore, the shutter speed can be controlled by the camera device body 4.
has an upper and lower limit, and if the performance is
Shutter whose calculated shutter speed can be controlled by body 4
If it is slower than the speed, that is, if the subject brightness is low, the
It is impossible to control the shutter at a certain shutter speed. child
In such cases, please use the first table to let the photographer know.
The display section 244 shows the maximum time that shutter control is possible.
flashing shutter speed. Also, if the aperture value set by the dial 34 is
A system in which the shutter speed calculated by
If it is faster than the shutter speed, that is, if the subject brightness is high,
It is impossible to control the shutter with the calculated shutter speed.
be. In such a case, the shutter at the calculated shutter speed
control is not possible. In such a case, take a picture of the matter.
A shutter control is provided on the first display section 244 to notify the user.
The fastest shutter speed that can be controlled will be displayed blinking. Please note that the subject brightness may be too low for the set aperture value.
If the first display section 244
The shutter speed or maximum shutter speed will flash and warn you.
Temo, shutter release is possible if
In this case, the shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244.
is controlled according to the displayed value. The camera device shown in Figure 1 is mainly a shutter speed priority AE system.
The two methods mentioned above are shooting or aperture priority AE shooting.
Although it is mainly designed to be used in mode, it is usually
When taking photos, use the above two modes.
It seems that most of the requirements can be satisfied. However, on the lens device 2 side, the aperture setting/g.
Mark 12 is not always used in conjunction with crest 7;
When the aperture value display 9 on the ring 8 is aligned with the index 7,
There is a possibility that such an operation will be performed. In such a case, the
The camera device is in wide open metering and manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. child
When , the dial changes depending on the setting position of the mode selector 38.
Set the shutter speed as a priority in step 34 and then install the lens.
Mode and dial 34 for manually setting the aperture value on the 2nd side
After setting the aperture value with priority, also set the aperture value on the lens device 2 side.
There are two possible modes: manually setting the same aperture value.
Ru. The mode selector 38 is now set to the shutter speed priority side.
is set, the dial 34 sets the shutter speed.
This diamond is used as a dial to
Select any shutter speed by rotating the lever 34.
Can be set. Note that the selected shutter speed
The degree is displayed on the first display section 24 as shown in FIG.
4 will be displayed. On the other hand, the camera device passes through the lens device 2.
The subject brightness information measured by the camera and the set shutter speed
of the photographic lens device 2 necessary to obtain proper exposure based on etc.
Calculate the aperture value and obtain the result as shown in Figure 10(a)-(I).
is displayed on the second display section 250. In addition, at this time, the
The aperture value displayed on the display section 250 of 2 is from the body 4 side.
It is not controlled by the aperture setting reset on the lens device 2 side.
8, the second aperture value display 9 above it will be displayed.
By adjusting the aperture value displayed on the display section 250 to index 7.
Therefore, it is preset on the lens device 2 side. like this
, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is the lens device.
Inform the photographer that the settings need to be made manually on the second side.
To close the screen, the third display section 252 in the viewfinder displays "M".
0 is displayed.Also, the mode selector 38 is
If it is set to the priority side, the dial 34 changes the aperture value.
It will be used as a dial for setting, and this
Select any aperture value by rotating the dial 34
Can be set. The selected aperture value is shown in Figure 10 (a) - (m
) is displayed on the second display section 250. -force,
The camera device measures the subject brightness through lens device 2.
Necessary to obtain proper exposure based on information, set aperture value, etc.
By calculating the required shutter speed,
[[] is displayed on the second display section 244 as shown in parentheses. Na
Oh, at this time, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is
The lens device 2 is not controlled from the body 4 side.
Depending on the aperture setting ring 8 on the side, the aperture value display 9 above it
The aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is the same as the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250.
The aperture value, that is, the aperture value set by the dial 34.
By aligning with index 7, the preset is performed on the lens device 2 side.
will be played. In this way, the information displayed on the second display section 250
It is necessary to manually set the aperture value on the lens device 2 side.
A third table in the viewfinder is displayed to let the photographer know that
The character “M” is displayed on the display section 252. As mentioned above, the shutter speed or aperture can be adjusted using the dial 34.
250 in the finder.
Manually preset the aperture value on the lens device 2 side according to the instructions.
When the shutter is released, the lens
Device 2 is manually narrowed down to a preset position;
In body 4, the shutter is set by dial 34.
Shutter at the speed or shutter speed determined as a result of calculation.
This allows you to take pictures with proper exposure. Note that even in this aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode,
In particular, the -\need selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side.
is set, the aperture value and lens set using the dial 34.
in advance so that the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side always matches.
It is important to set this to A, which gives priority to the aperture of this camera device.
E Photographing operation will be performed. In other words, the aperture ratio %AE shooting is
, calculates and controls the exposure time for the set aperture value.
Therefore, the record is adjusted for the preset aperture p value.
When presetting lens device 2, □Place it on the body 4 side.
Whether performed from the beginning or from the lens device, the operation of the system
This is because they are the same. However, in this case, the aperture value should be
Must be set on both D4 and Renjo device 2.
Therefore, it is unavoidable that there will be significant problems with operability. Note that in the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the setting
The aperture υ value calculated for the specified shutter speed is
The aperture value was smaller than that of lens device 2, and
This may also occur if the value is larger than the maximum aperture value.
However, in that case, it is assumed that the value cannot be set, and the
Display of open aperture value or maximum aperture value to let the person in the shadow know
Warning is given by flashing the display. Also, in this mode, the set aperture value
The shutter speed calculated is the minimum that can be controlled by body 4.
The voice was lower than the shutter speed (low speed), and the
This may occur if the value is larger than the large shutter speed (high speed).
However, in that case, it is assumed that the value is uncontrollable.
In order to make the photographer aware of this, the minimum shutter speed
1 display or the maximum shutter speed display will flash to warn you.
I do. In addition, in this mode, especially the mode selector 38
is set to the aperture priority side, use dial 34 to set
The range of aperture value to be set and the output that can be set on the lens device 2 side.
Naturally, the range of aperture values will vary. One! The aperture of the photographic lens device 2 used, that is, the aperture, is
There is a limit and a lower limit, and if it depends on the dial 34 on the body 4 side.
The aperture of the lens set in
If the aperture is larger than the aperture, the aperture control at the set aperture value will be
It's impossible. In such a case, the aperture value may have been set incorrectly.
Some kind of countermeasure is required, but in this example, this
In case of incorrect settings such as
It is treated as if the value, that is, the open aperture value has been set. child
Regarding this, it is completely different from the case of aperture priority AE shooting mode.
It's the same. Conversely, the level set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side
If the aperture of the lens is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographing lens device 2,
In this case, it is impossible to control the aperture at the set aperture value. child
In such cases, the aperture value may have been set incorrectly, and what should I do?
However, in this example,
For incorrect settings, the aperture υ value of the minimum aperture of the shooting system
In other words, it is treated as if the maximum aperture value has been set. this thing
is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.
It is. Each of the above-mentioned shutter speed priority and aperture priority AE shooting and
Full-open metering and manual exposure adjustment shooting modes are all full-open metering.
Therefore, the focus of the viewfinder
Depending on the screen 234, the effect of the squeeze, especially the
If you can't check the shutter release for depth of field effect
There is a problem. Especially when shooting with AE, the second display in the viewfinder
The displayed aperture value is the preset value after the shutter release.
Since it has a configuration that looks like it is set, the shutter release
- Confirm the narrowing down using the narrowing down lever 64 before zooming.
I can't do it. This is clear from the explanation of Figure 2.
As shown, the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is used for AE photography.
When the selection is set to Markcro for
When the lever 64 is operated, the AE charge is canceled and the button is turned off.
It becomes impossible to control the aperture from the lens device 2 side from the D4 side.
For this reason, as mentioned earlier, in a case like this
The aperture lever 64 is locked and cannot be operated.
It is. On the other hand, in the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode,
The lens device 2
The aperture and aperture positions preset with the side ρ aperture setting ring 8.
The lens device 2 can be narrowed down to the desired position. This operation
Throughout the process, the photographer uses the focusing screen 234.
Image when the lens device 2 is narrowed down to the set position.
You can know the status of By the way, the narrowing down at this time
Depending on the operation, the camera device changes from wide-open metering to closed-down metering.
mode changeover switch 38 gives shutter priority.
or aperture priority is selected.
The control operation of the device will be different. If the mode switching
When the switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the camera
The device has an aperture-focus metering aperture-priority AE shooting mode.
The switch 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side.
If the camera device is in aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
It becomes C. Now, I will explain about aperture-focus metering and aperture-priority AE shooting.
, the lens device 2 is always in a stopped-down state, and its aperture is
The value changes depending on the setting position of the aperture setting/g8. one
On the other hand, what aperture value is set on the dial 34 at this time?
Even if it is, it will be ignored. At this time, in body 4,
Narrowed down to the position set by setting ring 8
Brightness with the aperture value of the subject taken into account through lens device 2
photometry is performed, and the appropriate exposure is determined based on this.
A shutter speed calculation is performed. Calculated like this
The captured shutter speed is displayed in the first display section in the viewfinder as shown in Figure 10 (a).
It is displayed as shown in ■. After the above operations, when you release the shutter, the lens
On the device 2 side, the aperture value in the narrowed state is maintained,
In the body 4, the result of the calculation is obtained and displayed on the first display section 244.
The shutter will be released according to the shutter speed displayed.
, it is possible to take pictures with proper exposure. Note that even in this mode, the results of aperture metering cannot be calculated.
Shutter speed that can be controlled by body 4
If the shutter speed is too slow, use the calculated shutter speed.
Control is impossible. In such cases, please inform the photographer
The shutter control is displayed on the first display section 244 to notify the user.
The shutter speed corresponding to the possible/longest time will be displayed blinking.
let Also, if the shutter speed calculated as a result of aperture-shape metering is
is faster than the shutter speed that can be controlled by body 4,
It is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed.
. In such cases, the first step is to inform the photographer of the situation.
The display shows the fastest shutter speed possible for shutter control.
Display the degree blinking. In addition, in this mode, the second
The aperture value is not displayed on the display section 250. because
, As mentioned in the explanation of Fig. 2, the body 4 has a lens.
Take the aperture value set with the aperture setting ring 8 on the device 2 side.
This is because they do not have the means to enter. Next, I will explain about aperture metering and manual exposure adjustment shooting.
In this case, the lens device 2 is always kept in the aperture-down state.
The aperture value changes depending on the aperture and the setting position of the setting ring 8.
. On the other hand, the dial 34 is used to set the shutter speed.
However, the set shutter speed is
It is displayed on the first display section 244 within. At this time, the body
4, to the position set by the aperture setting ring 8.
The aperture value of the subject is added through the narrowed-down lens device 2.
The measured brightness is measured, and the settings are
Determine whether proper exposure can be obtained using the shutter speed.
cormorant. If the combination of aperture value and shutter speed of 721 degrees is
Normal exposure or exposure within a certain tolerance range for proper exposure.
If it is determined that the amount of output can be obtained, Fig. 10 (a)
-ff), the second display section 250 shows a display of 00”.
The aperture value and shutter setting will be displayed to the photographer.
Ensure that the correct exposure or allowable exposure amount can be obtained at the shutter speed.
Inform. On the other hand, the combination of the currently set aperture value and shutter speed
In this case, the exposure may be insufficient compared to the proper exposure or the allowable exposure amount.
If it is determined that the first
As shown in Figure 0 (a)-ff), the blinking “OP” display is displayed.
the aperture value and shutter speed set by the photographer.
This will notify you that the exposure is insufficient compared to the correct exposure. child
In contrast, the photographer operates the aperture setting ring 8 to
Should I reset the shadow lens device 2ρ aperture to a larger diameter side?
, operate the dial 34 to set the shutter speed to a lower speed.
to adjust the setting exposure on the second display.
250 until you see "06" indicating proper exposure.
required to obtain proper exposure or allowable amount of fog, depending on
You can set the aperture or shutter speed. Depending on the speed combination, the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount
, if it is determined that there is overexposure, the second display section 2
50, as shown in Figure 10(a)-ff), the point cL"
The aperture value and shutter setting set by the photographer will be displayed.
At the shutter speed, the exposure is to the correct exposure or the allowable exposure amount.
Let me know if it's too much. In contrast, the photographer
and operate the setting ring 8 to set the aperture of the photographic lens device 2.
Either reset it to the smaller diameter side or operate the dial 34.
, reset the shutter speed to a higher speed, or adjust the settings.
The correct exposure is displayed on the second display section 250 when the constant exposure is corrected.
Proper exposure can be achieved by repeating the process until the display shows 00".
or the aperture or shutter necessary to obtain the acceptable exposure amount.
You can set the speed. , Please note that this aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode
In this case, the third display section 252 in the viewfinder shows the manual mode.
"M" will be displayed to indicate that the mode is on. After the above operations, when you release the shutter, the lens
Device 2 maintains the aperture value in the closed state and
4, the shutter speed set by the dial 34
The shutter will be released and you can take a picture with the correct exposure. Next, the mode selector switch 38 is set to the shutter speed priority mode.
When it is switched to the mode side, the pulse is changed by dial 34.
You can select the drop mode. This dial 34
When set to pulp, shutter release button
The shutter will remain open while you press button 18.
The shutter speed depends on the operator's intention, but many
In this case, the pulp is used for long exposure.
Ru. Now, when performing pulp photography, the pulse
In addition to setting the aperture setting ring on the lens device 2 side.
If mark 12 is aligned with index 7 according to step 8, the shirt,
Since the speed is not set, the aperture value to be controlled must be calculated.
It is not possible to do this. Therefore, the aperture is set manually to some value.
It is desirable that the aperture value is set.
If not, in this example the pulp will generally have a low brightness.
Focusing on the point that is often used on the degree side, open the aperture value.
It is configured to control the aperture value. At this time,
buLb" is not displayed on the first display section 244 in
The second display section 250 displays the information of the photographic lens device 2 being used.
The display of the open aperture value is shown in Figure 10 (b) - (I).
This is the circular shown in . On the other hand, when performing pulp photography, it depends on the dial 34.
Then, set the pulp and also set the aperture on the lens device 2 side.
According to the aperture value display 9 on the fixed ring 8, the lens device 2 side
If you set the aperture value in
It becomes C. At this time, the display in the finder is shown in Figure 10 (b).
- As shown in (II), "bu" is displayed on the first display section 244.
Lb'' is displayed, and 'M'' is displayed on the third display section 252.
will be displayed. At this time, the settings on the second display section 250' are set on the lens device 2 side.
As mentioned many times before, the aperture value that has been set is not displayed.
Now, the aperture value set in lens device 2 is taken.
This is because the body 4 side is not equipped with a means for sinking. Next, I will talk about strobe photography, but this camera device
, especially in the Honjibushi camera system, mainly
The structure is similar to that of the strobe shown in Figure 5, and the flash
Automatic exposure control photography using a flash is possible. As mentioned earlier, the strobe shown in Figure 5 has an automatic light control function.
It is equipped with an accessory shoe for the camera device body 4.
The body 4 depends on fitting and installing the shoe 134 on the -50.
, synchro contact 138, control signal contact 1
40, each of the data signal contacts 142 is connected to the body.
4 side synchronization contact 52, control terminal 54, data terminal
56. When considering this strobe, be sure to use the automatic flash mode.
There are two types: when used in mode and when used in full emission mode.
It is necessary to consider them separately. The automatic light control mode depends on the aperture setting dial 108.
It is selected when the desired aperture value is set using
, Proper exposure on the film surface at the set aperture value.
The light emitting unit 102 emits a flash of light and
The reflected light from the subject is detected by the light detection unit 104 and the emitted light is
A configuration is adopted in which the flash light emitted from the light section 102 is dimmed.
As mentioned earlier, this
The aperture value set by the hour aperture setting dial 108 is
From the data signal contact 142 to the data terminal 56, the
It is given to the D4 side as an analog signal. On the other hand, the full flash mode depends on the aperture setting dial 108.
The mark "M" was set without setting any particular aperture value.
It is selected when the light is emitted from the light emitting unit 102.
The flash produced by this strobe is not controlled in any way and can be used to
The amount of output light is emitted. At this time, the strobe is fully fired.
Being in optical mode means that data is transmitted from the data signal contact 142.
A predetermined level is applied to the body 4 side through the data terminal 56.
is given as an analog signal. Please note that this strobe device does not work even in automatic flash mode.
Even in full flash mode, the camera device body 4
A signal is given to control the shutter speed. this
is the currently known focal plane shutter
is a shutter time of 1/60th of a second or 1/125th of a second or more
Due to the fact that the strobe cannot synchronize with the speed
I mentioned earlier that it was designed to
As you can see, there are two types of control: fully automatic or semi-automatic.
It is applied in such a way that the format can be freely selected. This whole thing
Automatic or semi-automatic switching is possible by selecting the changeover switch 146.
The fully automatic method is currently selected.
If the dial 34 of the body 4
Even if a shutter speed of
At the same time as the completion, the control signal contact 140 from the strobe side,
When the charge completion signal reaches the first level through the control terminal 54,
It is input as an analog signal and is applied to the shutter speed on the body 4 side.
Flash synchronization shutter speed TSYN is set, and semi-automatic
If the dynamic method is selected, dial 34 on body 4
Depending on the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or higher,
strobe speed is selected.
At the same time as charging is completed, the control signal contact 140 is sent from the strobe side.
, a second level analog input through the control terminal 54.
The body 4 side depends on the charging completion signal given by the log signal.
The strobe synchronization speed TSYN is automatically set to the shutter speed of
is set, and the strobe is synchronized depending on the dial 34 of the body 4.
Shutter speeds set below the control speed TSYN are
This is used as the shutter speed for control. In addition, the selector switch 146 on the strobe side is set to all white 1 method.
Whether the selected or semi-automatic method is selected, the body
The human pulp that depends on the dial 34 on the side 4 is set.
In this case, the pulp has the highest priority and the shutter of the camera device is
It will be controlled by loop control. On the other hand, what is the state of the camera device body 4 and the strobe?
Even if the aperture setting on the lens device 2 side is
The position of the ring 8 depends on the position of the ring 8.
The operation of mela devices varies widely. It is a diaphragm setting.
Select so that mark 12 points to index 7 according to
It depends on whether it has been done or not. Please note that when shooting with a flash, the body 4 is charged from the flash side.
When the completion signal is input, the first display section 2 in the finder
The lower two digits of 44 indicate that the strobe can fire when charging is complete.
There is no "EF" display to let the photographer know that
It will be done. This display is as shown in FIG. 10(C). Various control or operation methods are listed below.
The various methods described below can be used appropriately depending on the purpose of shooting.
Needless to say, it is necessary to First, if the strobe is in autoflash mode and
Fully automatic is set for the printer, and the shutter is
The clock speed is set in seconds using the dial 34.
, when mark 12 is selected for aperture setting ring 8
However, 1. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device
is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and allows AE shooting.
battery, but the flash indicates that it is fully charged.
When the signal is given to body 4, the camera device is fully automatic
Switches to dynamic flash control/automatic flash shooting mode. At this time,
The shutter speed in Bossy 4 is automatically synchronized with the strobe.
The shutter speed is set to 1/60th of a second, for example.
, the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set by the aperture setting dial on the flash side.
from the body 4 side at the aperture value set according to rule 108.
It will be controlled. At this time, in the finder is
The display as shown in Figure 10(c)-(1) shall be made.
Tonanashi, the first display section 244 has a strobe synchronized shutter.
Speed TSYN, e.g. 1/60th second display and strobe
"EF" to notify the photographer that charging is complete.
is displayed, and the second display section 250 shows the strobe side.
The set aperture value will be displayed. Note that in this state, the
When you release the flash, the flash automatically adjusts and fires independently.
The camera device displays the same shutter as the viewfinder display.
It is controlled by the cutter speed and aperture value. Second, if the strobe is in autoflash mode and
Fully automatic is set for the printer, and the shutter is
The clock speed is set in seconds using the dial 34.
, if the aperture setting ring 8 does not have the mark 12 selected.
However, at this time, the charging completion quotient of the strobe is
The camera is in open metering, manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, and shooting is possible.
However, the strobe is fully charged and indicates this.
When a signal is given to body 4, the camera device is fully automatic.
Switches to automatic flash/manual flash shooting mode. At this time
, the shutter speed in body 4 is automatically synchronized with the strobe.
When shooting, the aperture of /Z2 is set to the same shutter speed.
Settings are controlled manually using the setting ring 8. In addition, at this time, in the finder there is a screen shown in Fig. 10 (c) - (
11) The display 755 shown in FIG.
The display section 244 displays the strobe synchronization shutter speed and the shutter speed.
EF to notify the photographer that flash charging is complete
” is displayed on the second display section 250, and a strobe light is displayed on the second display section 250.
The aperture value set on the side is displayed, and the third display section 252
It is necessary to manually adjust the aperture according to the aperture setting/g8.
'M' is displayed to indicate that the photographer
is the aperture pattern displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder.
value, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side.
It is necessary to set the aperture on the device 2 side, but in this state
When you release the shutter, the flash automatically adjusts automatically.
It emits light, and the camera device displays the same information as the viewfinder display.
Shutter speed and aperture value manually set on lens device 2
Thirdly, if the strobe is in automatic flash mode and the shutter is
The printer is set to fully automatic, but the shutter
Set the speed to dial 34. Therefore, the pulp position is set, and the aperture setting ring 8
is the case where mark 12 is selected, but at this time,
Before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode.
mode, allowing pulp photography at wide open aperture.
However, when the strobe is fully charged, the signal indicating this is displayed on the body.
When the camera device is given to
＼Switches to automatic flash photography mode. At this time, the body
Shutter speed in 4 is set to maintain the knob priority.
The aperture of the taking lens 2 is set using the aperture setting dial on the strobe side.
With the aperture value set by Yaru 108, the 4th side of the body
It will be controlled from At this time, in the finder
is displayed as shown in Figure 10(c)-(II).
To do so, the first display section 244 is displayed with nokurupu photography.
``B7 display indicating something and flash charging completed.
@gP” is displayed to inform the photographer of the situation, and the
2 display section 250 shows the aperture value set on the strobe side.
is displayed. In addition, in this state, the shirt release
If you do this, the flash will auto-adjust and fire independently, and the camera will
The device can be set to any shutter speed and file size according to the photographer's wishes.
It will be controlled with the same aperture value as the inside and outside of the lens. Fourth, if the strobe is in autoflash mode and the
Fully automatic is fixed for the printer, and the shutter is
The pulp position is set according to the dial speed and L'34.
If the aperture setting ring 8 is set to 12,
However, at this time, the strobe is fully charged.
Before, the camera device was in pulp shooting mode and the lens was not installed.
Pulp photography is possible at the aperture value set on the second side.
There is a signal indicating that the strobe is fully charged.
When given to body 4, the camera device is pulp automatic dimming
・Switches to manual flash photography mode. At this time, the body
The shutter speed at 4 is set to maintain pulp preferentially.
The aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually adjusted by the aperture setting ring 8.
The settings will be controlled automatically. In addition, at this time, fine
There is no indication as shown in Figure 10 (C)-(Rotation) inside the folder.
The first display section 244 shows a pulp photograph.
"b" indicates that the strobe is fully charged.
EF” is displayed to inform the photographer, and the second table
The display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side.
The third display section 252 displays the manual aperture settings.
There is no "M" display indicating that it is necessary to match according to setting 8.
be done. Therefore, ``the photographer must use the second table in the
The aperture value displayed on the display 252, that is, set on the strobe side.
Set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value set.
It is necessary to release the shutter in this state.
, the strobe automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device
is an arbitrary shutter speed and lens device depending on the intention of the photographer.
It will be controlled with the aperture value set to 2 manually. Fifth, if the strobe is in auto'flash mode and the
The shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the shutter is set to semi-automatic.
The shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34.
When mark 12 is selected for the iris and aperture setting ring 8
However, the camera device must be shut down before the strobe is fully charged.
/ The camera is in priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting.
However, when the strobe is fully charged, a signal indicating this is displayed on the body.
The camera device will be semi-automatic, auto-flash, and auto-flash.
Switches to dynamic flash photography mode. At this time, in body 4
The shutter speed depends on the dial 34 of the body 4.
The set shutter speed is the strobe synchronization shutter speed.
If the degree TSYN or higher, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS
Also, if the strobe synchronization shutter speed is below TSYN,
If there is, the second is set using the dial 34 and the shooting record is set.
The aperture of Lens 2 is set using the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side.
Controlled from the body 4 side with the aperture value set by
It's a sumi ink. At this time, Figure 10 is in the viewfinder.
(c) - The display shown in (V) will be displayed,
The first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronized shutter speed and the set shutter speed.
'EF' to notify the photographer that the battery has been fully charged.
The second display section 250 shows the strobe side.
The set aperture value will be displayed. Note that in this state, the
When the shutter release is performed, the flash will automatically adjust automatically.
It emits light, and the camera device is the same as the display in the viewfinder.
It is controlled by the shutter speed and aperture value. Sixth, if the flash is in autoflash mode and the shutter
The shutter is set to semi-automatic, and
The clock speed is set in seconds using the dial 34.
, if the aperture setting ring 8 does not have the mark 12 selected.
However, at this time, the camera is not installed before the strobe is fully charged.
The camera is in open metering, manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, and shooting is possible.
The strobe is fully charged and the flash is fully charged.
When the signal indicating is given to body 4, the camera device is semi-automatic.
・Switches to automatic flash control/manual flash shooting mode. this
At this time, the shutter speed for body 4 is
The shutter speed set by the rule 34 is
Synchronized shutter luck is better than Natsu's i-robo I-guchi' Jun-shut
If the shutter speed is lower than the strobe synchronization shutter speed,
, the second is set with the dial 34, and the shooting lens 2
The aperture is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8.
This will result in At this time, the viewfinder shows Figure 10 (C)-(Season
A display as shown in is displayed, and the first display section 24
4 and set the robot synchronized shutter speed TSYN or
The displayed shutter speed is displayed and the strobe charging is completed.
"EF" is displayed to notify the photographer, and the second
The display section 250 shows the aperture value set on the strobe side.
is displayed, and the third display section 252 shows the manual aperture setting.
“M11” indicates that it is necessary to align the ring 8.
A display is made. Therefore, the photographer must use the second
The aperture value displayed on the display section 252, that is, on the strobe side.
The aperture is set on the lens device 2 side according to the set aperture value.
It is necessary to perform the shutter release in this state.
If you do this, the flash will auto-adjust and fire independently, and the camera will
The shutter speed and lens are the same as those displayed in the viewfinder.
It is controlled by the aperture value manually set in the zoom device 2.
Ru. Seventh, if the flash is in autoflash mode and the shutter
The shutter is set to semi-automatic, and
The pulp position is set by the dial 34.
When setting ring 8, mark 12 is selected.
However, at this time, the camera must be turned off before the strobe is fully charged.
The camera is in pulp shooting mode, and the camera is in pulp shooting mode.
The flash is ready to take pictures, but the flash is not fully charged.
When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera
Switch to pulp, automatic light control, and automatic strobe shooting mode.
Poor. At this time, the shutter speed for body 4 is prioritized.
The aperture of the photographing lens 2 is set to maintain the pulp.
The aperture setting dial 108 on the camera side
The value will be controlled from the body 4 side. Furthermore, this
At the same time, there is a table in the finder as shown in Figure 10 (C)-■.
The first display section 244 shows the pulp
The "b11" display indicates that a photo is being taken, and the strobe is charging.
There is no “EF” display to notify the photographer that the process has been completed.
The second display section 250 shows the settings on the strobe side.
The aperture value will be displayed. Note that in this state, the shutter release
When the flash is flashed, the flash automatically adjusts and fires independently.
, the camera device can use any shutter speed depending on the photographer's intention.
The aperture value will be controlled using the same aperture value as displayed in the viewfinder.
Ru. Eighth, if the flash is in autoflash mode and
The shutter is set to semi-automatic, and
The pulp position is set by the dial 34.
and the aperture setting ring 8 does not select mark 12.
However, at this time, the camera may not be connected until the strobe is fully charged.
The camera is in pulp shooting mode, and the lens unit 2 side is
Pulp photography is possible at the set aperture value.
, a signal indicating that the strobe is fully charged is sent to body 4.
When given to
Switches to flash photography mode. At this time, in body 4
The shutter speed is set to preferentially preserve the pulp and shoot
The aperture of lens 2 is set manually using the aperture setting ring 8.
It will be controlled. At this time, in the finder is
The display as shown in Figure 1'θ (C)-1 will be displayed.
The first display section 244 indicates that it is pulp photography.
b” is displayed and the photographer is informed that the flash is fully charged.
"EF" is displayed on the second display section 25.
0 displays the aperture value set on the flash side, and
2, the display section 252 shows the manual setting of the aperture setting ring 8.
Therefore, M”° will be displayed indicating that it is necessary to match.
. Therefore, the photographer should look at the second display section 252 in the viewfinder.
The aperture value displayed is the aperture value set on the flash side.
It is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the
However, if you release the shutter in this state, the
The robot automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device is controlled by the photographer.
Manually to any shutter speed and lens device 2 depending on the intention of
It will be controlled by the aperture value set in . Ninth, if the strobe is in full flash mode and the
Fully automatic mode is set for the printer, and
The shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34.
When setting ring 8, select mark 12.
However, at this time, the camera must be turned off before the strobe is fully charged.
The device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and AE shooting
However, the flash is fully charged and the
When a signal indicating this is given to body 4, the camera device
Switches to dynamic, full flash, and minimum aperture strobe shooting modes.
. At this time, the shutter speed for body 4 is automatically set to
Flash synchronized shutter speed TS” ■For example, to 1/60th of a second
The aperture of the photographic lens 2 is determined by the photographic lens device used.
The maximum aperture value is 2. Furthermore, at this time,
Inside the finder, there are
The first display section 244 has no display.
, strobe synchronization, ivy speed, e.g. 1/60th of a second.
The shutter speed is displayed and the flash is fully charged.
EF for cell known to the shadow person" is displayed.In addition, the second
Although no display is made on the display section 250 of
This means that the lens device 2 is stopped down to the maximum aperture value.
However, it does not necessarily give the correct exposure; rather, it may result in incorrect operation.
This is to give a warning to the photographer. In this state, perform the shutter release and the strobe.
The camera device is set to the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the maximum of lens device 2.
This is controlled by the aperture value, resulting in two things. 10th, the strobe is in full flash mode,
The shutter is set to fully automatic mode, and
In addition, the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34.
and select mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8.
However, at this time, before the strobe is fully charged,
The camera device is in open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
The flash is ready to shoot, but the flash is fully charged and cannot be used.
When a signal is given to body 4 indicating that
Switch to automatic, full flash, manual flash, and toshipo shooting modes
Waru. At this time, the shutter speed for body 4 is automatically set.
The strobe synchronization speed is set, and the shooting lens 2
The diaphragm is manually set and controlled by the diaphragm setting ring 8.
It will be. In addition, at this time, the number
Figure 10Cd) - Display as shown in (II)
Therefore, the strobe synchronization shutter is displayed on the first display section 244.
Displays the flash speed and informs the photographer that flash charging is complete.
"EF" is displayed to notify the user, and the third display section 2
52, it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture 9 using the setting ring 8.
"M" is displayed to indicate that
is the guide number calculation board 1 that comes with the strobe.
06, based on the distance from the camera device to the subject.
Find the aperture value to be set on lens device 2 using
It is necessary to manually set the aperture using the /g8. In this state, if you release the shutter, the strobe will be turned off completely.
The camera device emits the same amount of light as the display in the viewfinder.
Shutter speed and aperture value manually set on /z device 2
It will be controlled by. 11th, if the strobe is in full flash mode and the
Fully automatic mode is set for the shutter, and
The shutter speed is controlled by the dial 34 to adjust the pulp position.
is set, and the aperture setting ring 8 selects mark 12.
is selected, but at this time, the strobe is fully charged.
Before shooting, the camera device was in pulp shooting mode and the aperture was wide open.
The camera is ready for pulp photography, but the strobe is full.
When the power is completed and a signal indicating this is given to body 4,
The camera device is pulp, full emission, minimum aperture strobe photography
mode. At this time, the shutter in body 4
The speed is set to maintain the pulp preferentially, and the shooting lens 2
The aperture is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used.
This will result in At this time, the 10th
Displays as shown in Figures (d)-(III) will be made.
Then, the first display section 244 shows that it is a loop shooting.
Take a picture of the "b" display indicating that the strobe is fully charged.
"EF" is displayed 7jX7& to inform the person. In this state, if you release the shutter, the strobe will be turned off completely.
The camera device emits a large amount of light, and the camera device can be adjusted freely according to the photographer's will.
Controlled by shutter speed and maximum aperture value of lens device 2
It happens. 12th, if the strobe is in full flash mode and the
Fully automatic mode is set for the shutter, and
In addition, the shutter speed depends on the dial 34 to adjust the pulp position.
is set, and the aperture setting ring 8 selects mark 12.
However, at this time, the strobe is fully charged.
The camera device is in pulp shooting mode and the lens is not installed before
Pulp photography is possible at the aperture value set on the second side.
There is a signal indicating that the strobe is fully charged.
When given to body 4, the camera device emits pulp/full light.
・Switches to manual flash photography mode. At this time, the body
The shutter speed at 4 is set to maintain pulp preferentially.
During shooting, the aperture of lens 2 depends on the aperture setting ring 8.
The settings will be controlled manually. 1 At this time, the viewfinder shows the images shown in Figure 10(d)-(
A display as shown in [V] shall be made, and the first display shall be made.
The section 244 is marked with “b” indicating bulb exposure.
Step 5 to notify the photographer that the strobe has finished charging
“EF” is displayed, and the aperture screen is displayed on the third display section 252.
Indicates that it is necessary to manually adjust the setting ring 8.
"M" is displayed.Therefore, the photographer must set the flash to
According to the included guide number calculation board 106,
Lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject.
Find the aperture value that should be set to , and use the aperture setting ring 8 to
It is necessary to manually set the aperture. In this state, if you release the shutter, the strobe will be turned off completely.
The camera device can be used at any time depending on the photographer's will.
Shutter speed and aperture value manually set on lens device 2
It will be controlled by. 13th, if the strobe is in full flash mode and the
Semi-automatic mode is set for grass and ivy.
In addition, the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34.
and mark 12 is selected on the aperture setting ring 8.
However, at this time, before the strobe is fully charged,
The camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and the AE
I'm ready to take a photo, but my CR port is fully charged.
When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device
is set to semi-automatic, full-flash, and minimum diameter strobe shooting modes.
Switch. At this time, the shutter speed in body 4 is
Shutter set by dial 34 of D4
High-speed side where the speed is higher than the strobe synchronized shutter speed TS”
If so, set the strobe synchronization speed TSYN and
If the flash synchronization shutter speed is lower than TS”
, the second is set with dial '44, and the shooting lens is
The aperture of 2 is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used.
It will be done. Note that at this time, the number
Displays as shown in Figures 10(d)-(V) will be made.
In the holding part 244, there is a strobe synchronizing shutter.
Speed or set light shutter speed display and strobe
'EF' to notify the photographer that the battery has been fully charged.
A display will be made. In this state, if you release the shutter, the strobe will not work.
The camera device is the same as the one displayed in the viewfinder.
is controlled by the shutter speed of and the maximum aperture value of lens device 2.
This will result in 14th, the strobe is in full flash mode,
The shutter is set to semi-automatic mode.
In addition, if the shutter speed is set, the seconds are set according to the diagram 34.
If the setting ring 8 is set, mark 12 is selected.
However, at this time, before the strobe is fully charged.
The camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
The flash is ready to take pictures, but the flash is not fully charged.
When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device
Switches to semi-automatic, full flash, and manual strobe shooting modes
. At this time, the shutter speed of body 4 is
The shutter speed set by dial 34 is
If the speed is higher than the flash synchronization shutter speed,
Synchronized shutter speed, and strobe synchronized shutter speed
If it is on the lower speed side, set the seconds with dial 34.
The aperture of the photographic lens 2 is determined by the aperture setting ring 8.
The settings will be controlled manually. Note that at this time, the
Inside the indenter, there is a display as shown in Figure 10(d)-(m).
The first display section 244 shows the stroke.
Synchronized shutter speed or set shutter speed
Informs the photographer that the display and flash are fully charged
'EF' is displayed on the third display section 252.
It is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the setting ring 8.
"M11" will be displayed. Therefore, the photographer should
Guide number calculation board 106 attached to the robot
Therefore, the lens is adjusted based on the distance from the camera device to the subject.
Determine the aperture value to be set on the lens device 2, and set the aperture setting ring 8.
It is necessary to manually set the aperture depending on the situation. In this state, when you release the shutter, the strobe is
The camera device is the same as the Ficida internal system.
Shutter speed and aperture manually set in lens device 2'
It will be controlled by the value. 15th, if the strobe is in full flash mode and the
Semi-automatic mode is set for the shutter, and
In addition, the shutter speed depends on the dial 34 to adjust the pulp position.
If the setting is set, select mark 12 for setting ring 8.
However, at this time, the strobe is fully charged.
Before, the camera device was in pulp shooting mode with wide open aperture.
The flash is ready for bulb photography, but the flash is not charging.
Once completed, a signal indicating this is given to body 4.
The camera device is pulp, full emission, minimum aperture strobe photography
mode. At this time, the shutter in body 4
The speed is set to maintain the pulp preferentially, and the shooting lens 2
The aperture is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used.
This will result in In addition, in the finder at ζ and time, the 10th
A display as shown in Figures (d)-(4) will be displayed.
The first display section 244 shows 'pulp photography'.
b" is displayed and the photographer is informed that the strobe is fully charged.
EF” will be displayed to notify you. In this state, if you release the shutter, the strobe will be fully turned off.
The camera device can be used at any time depending on the photographer's will.
Controlled by shutter speed and maximum aperture value of lens device 2
The 16th thing that happens is that the strobe goes into full flash mode.
Therefore, the shutter is set to semi-automatic mode.
The shutter speed also depends on the dial 34.
The pulp position is set by
In this case, the screen 12 is not selected.
The camera device is in pulp shooting mode before the flash is fully charged.
The aperture value set on the lens device 2 side
The camera is ready to take pictures, but the flash is fully charged and has not yet been charged.
When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device
Switches to pulp/full flash/manual strobe shooting mode
. At this time, the shutter speed in body 4 is prioritized based on the shutter speed.
The aperture of /Z2 is set to 1, and the aperture of 2 is set.
The settings are manually controlled by the log/g8. Na
Oh, at this time, in the finder there is a figure 10 (d).
The first display section 244 displays a display as shown in FIG.
When shooting with a bulb, there is a “b” indication and a stroke.
EF to notify the photographer that the camera is fully charged.
is displayed, and the third display section 252 shows the manual setting of the diaphragm.
M” indicating that it is necessary to align the ring 8
will be done. Therefore, the photographer must
The guide number calculation board 106 allows the camera device to
The settings should be made on lens device 2 based on the distance from to the subject.
Determine the aperture υ value and manually set the aperture setting using the aperture setting ring 8.
It is necessary to make settings.0 In this state, if you perform the shutter release, the strobe will be
The camera device can be used at any time depending on the photographer's will.
shutter speed and aperture manually set on lens device 2.
It will be controlled by the value. Note that in the strobe shooting mode mentioned above, the camera device
Body 4 (Ill mode selector switch 38 is set to
If the tip side is selected, the diaphragm is adjusted by dial 34.
The setting value is completely ignored, and the aperture value is set on the strobe side.
Set the aperture value or the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.
The aperture value is controlled to a predetermined aperture value or maximum aperture value. Now, when the strobe is in full automatic mode, the speed is
automatically synchronizes the strobe shutter speed, e.g. 60 minutes.
It is set to 1 second, but the strobe is in semi-automatic mode.
, the shutter speed set on the body 4 side is
If so, set the shutter speed to less than the strobe synchronized shutter speed.
There is a risk that related controls will not be possible. Therefore, the above
As a general rule, each mode is set to the mode selector switch 38.
The condition is that the shutter speed is on the priority side, but sometimes
The mode selector switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side.
It is also possible that semi-automatic strobe photography will be performed. Therefore, in order to deal with this problem, the camera of this embodiment
/Stem, when in flash shooting mode, the mode switching switch
When switch 38 is set to aperture priority, the
Even if semi-automatic mode is set on the device, the selector switch
146, the shutter speed is set to the strobe synchronization
Control in so-called fully automatic mode, where the shutter speed is set.
It is composed like this. This means that semi-automatic mode is used
, there is some kind of purpose regarding the shutter speed.
Since it is considered that it is time to
This is based on the opinion that there is no problem. The above is a diagram of the shooting modes for strobe photography explained above.
This is the prisoner shown in Figure 11. However, this figure is based on pulp photography.
Although it is not specifically mentioned, shutter speed
It is the same if you replace the pulp with the pulp. Next, we will explain how to prevent erroneous operations in the camera system of this example.
Explain the system. Originally, it should be based on a holistic and rational system design.
In the case of camera systems, the possibility of erroneous operation or malfunction
The design must be inconceivable, but currently we are
To the best of our knowledge, this is the best and most accurate photo.
Exposure control means that can obtain images, that is, a shutter device
The drawing device is mostly composed of mechanical components.
Its operation is a mechanical one with a fairly complex mechanism.
This is done by a sequence mechanism. On the other hand,
The Mela device should be viewed as a comprehensive system and should be controlled rationally.
In order to apply control, an electrical control mechanism must be introduced across the board.
However, this electrical machine interface
completely due to the constraints of the complex mechanisms of the face and camera equipment.
It is extremely important to adopt a configuration that prevents erroneous operations and malfunctions.
Have difficulty. On the other hand, in this embodiment,
If an erroneous operation is performed by a person, the erroneous operation
In addition to detecting errors and notifying the photographer of the situation,
The shutter release is performed to prevent malfunctions caused by
It uses a locking method to prevent it from being moved. In the camera device applied to this example, what kind of
Regarding whether performing an operation is considered to be an incorrect operation,
The explanation will be given below according to the logic explanatory diagram of FIG. 11(B). Note that the erroneous operation described here is caused by the
Lens device 2 (D lever 84 and AEL' on the bed 4 side)
It is closely related to the operating characteristics of the bar 94. That is,
Select mark 12 with aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side
If set, the lens device 2 side will use the aperture value as
This is considered equivalent to selecting the maximum aperture value, so the
There are five aperture controls depending on the AE lever 94 on the D4 side.
If not; the lens device is unconditionally set to the minimum aperture position.
It becomes impossible to control the situation. Also
, when attempting to perform AE photography, the AE lever 94 is turned off.
If the camera is not connected to the lens device 2 from the body 4 side,
Aperture control is not possible. In this example, the above two
If the book is locked as a malfunction, this is the case.
These cases are shown in Figure 11(B)K7'c (1),
This corresponds to the states shown in (II), (2), and (V). However, especially in the conditions of Tsukuda) and a), the film is wound
Condition after film winding is completed by operating lever 14
The condition is that This is because the AE lever 94
Special operations must be performed before AE charging by film winding.
It remains in the AE discharge state unless
This is because the state is not necessarily a malfunction state. In addition
, the aperture of the lens device 2 is narrowed down using the aperture lever 64.
The AE charging state in this state is clear from the explanation in Figure 2.
Since such a thing cannot exist, in the 11th episode) it is empty.
It is white. Nao, Figure 11 (B) - (1) ~ (ff) Ic
Think about the circumstances in which this erroneous operation situation might occur.
Now, the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked.
When 12 is selected, the camera device will switch mode.
Shutter speed priority or aperture priority depending on the switch status.
It is in AE shooting mode, and the 10th camera is in the viewfinder.
There is no display as shown in (1) or (It) in Figure (a).
It is being done. In this state, the photographer presses the second display section 2.
Actually stop the lens device 2 to the aperture value displayed at 50.
7 Eye/Da Screen 234 for deep depth of field
Even if I try to confirm, the AE lever 9 is not in AE shooting mode.
Due to the 4th structure, it is set on the 4th body side or calculated
It is not possible to narrow down the lens device 2 to the specified aperture value.
. Despite such conditions, if the aperture lever 64
If you narrow down lens device 2 with
The aperture position set by mark 12 of 8 is
Since it corresponds to the minimum aperture position of
At position 2, the aperture is narrowed down to the minimum aperture position. child
The state of is comparable to the state of Fig. 11 (B)-(T) and (If).
Although this will obviously be an incorrect operation, in this example
As mentioned above, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is
When 12 is selected, narrow it down (-64 is
This kind of situation is prevented because its movement is regulated.
has been done. On the other hand, the photographer uses the camera to check the depth.
, First, as the Ml procedure, set the aperture setting ring of lens device 2.
I canceled the selection of mark 12 due to 8 and confirmed it manually.
Set the desired aperture value on the lens device 2 side, and then stop down.
(-- Operate 64 to set lens device 2.)
There is no problem in narrowing down the camera to a certain position.
The device is in aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode or
Aperture-priority AE shooting mode with aperture metering and depth of field
It is possible to check the degree of In this state, as is clear from the explanation in Figure 2, the AE
The bar 94 is in the AE discharge state.0 However, if the photographer changes the aperture of the lens device 2 from this state,
If you reset setting ring 8, 12, the first
1 (B) - (1) or value), which is
As mentioned earlier, it was clearly an incorrect operation, and the
is the black “EEEE EE” shown in Figure 10(f).
A warning lock warning is displayed, and the shutter release is disabled.
is locked so that it cannot be accessed. Also, Fig. 11 Mountain)-(1) or ' is from the state of (II).
, if the photographer is 1. Depending on the filter release button 6゛6
Figure 11 (B
) - [1), (V)K show <AEL'ノ<-9'4
If the AE shooting mode is still AE discharged and charged,
This also means that AE photography is not possible.
This was an incorrect operation, and the viewfinder shows the message shown in Figure 10(f).
1 Like "EEEE EE" flashing table indicating warning lock
is displayed and the shutter is locked so that the shutter release cannot be performed.
be done. Figure 11 CB) - In the states of (1) and (II), the 10th
The photographer who received the warning of an erroneous operation as shown in Figure (f)
Aperture setting ring 8t of lens device 2 - Cancel from mark 12
Depending on the setting, you can use aperture metering, manual exposure adjustment shooting or aperture adjustment.
Inclusive metering aperture priority AE shooting power; now possible to narrow down the aperture further
The lens device 2 can be opened by pressing the release button 66.
It is also possible to take pictures with manual exposure adjustment depending on the aperture metering.
Ru. Furthermore, from this state, adjust the aperture setting ring of lens device 2.
8chi = r -ri 12'ft setting through and Figure 1.1
(B) -@), (warning lock again as shown in Vl)
However, this warning lock can be canceled using the following method.
I can do it. Figure 11 (B) -@), IV) In the (7) state, the
The photographer who received a warning of an erroneous operation as shown in Figure 10 (f) K
Release the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 from the mark 12
By doing so, it is possible to shoot with open metering and manual exposure adjustment.
Becomes Noh. In addition, as another method, it is possible to
While holding down the multi-exposure button 16, wind up the film.
By operating the lever 14, the AE lever 94 can be reset.
Charge and take shutter-priority or aperture-priority AE shots.
It is also possible to make shadows possible. '& O, ta Figure 11 (B) - QIO, IV)
It is determined as a malfunction only when the winding of the winding is completed, and the winding of the winding is completed.
When winding is not completed, shutter priority or aperture priority AE is used.
Although it is treated as a shooting mode, it is
The I-in (II) state is used for film winding, completion, and incompleteness.
As described above, the camera system of this embodiment
mechanical configuration or traditional lens device configuration.
and various controls introduced for new improvements and functional improvements.
Actively improve the various constraints that occur between control mechanisms.
We are trying to improve the performance and expand the range, and...
In addition, for unpreventable erroneous operations and malfunctions,
A warning will be displayed in the viewfinder to notify the photographer and
The vine mechanism is configured to lock and prevent photography.
There is. Next, various performances given to the first illustrated camera device will be explained.
We will explain in detail one specific step to achieve this. Traditionally known camera devices have an aperture of a lens device.
and the aperture control mechanism that determines the exposure to the film surface.
It is equipped with a shutter mechanism that determines the time between these two
Traditionally and in the future, mechanical control mechanisms
A configuration that includes is said to be common. "!>-L, turtle
In recent years, various control mechanisms that make up the LA system have been
A configuration with an additional electrical control mechanism was proposed and realized.
It's *is* being done. The configuration with these electrical mechanisms is
Most of this is in the exposure control mechanism, including the photometry system of the camera device.
This is summarized as 3, but this is because a general photometry system is
Information such as object brightness is converted into electrical signals using the conduction conversion function.
Since it is imported into the camera system, automatic
In order to control exposure, it is necessary to improve the interface between electricity and machinery.
This is because it is necessary to go through the interface. Such an interface is located within the camera system.
A simple mechanism is sufficient to perform a single function.
Although the specific structure has been known for a long time,
As the functionality required of camera systems increases,
The structure of systems is also becoming more complex. In contrast, currently
Many known camera systems have relatively simple applications.
An analog electrical control system is applied, but this is simply
Either shutter speed priority or aperture priority function
It is relatively simple and economical because it only has the configuration that is necessary for the purpose.
This is because it can be realized with a typical circuit configuration. However, the power of the above embodiment is that the shutter is
In addition to having both data speed priority and aperture priority functions, it also has various
On the other hand, a configuration with a judgment function is a considerably complicated configuration.
This is expected, especially if such a configuration has pure analog power.
Applying the Qi circuit not only has problems with accuracy.
The structure becomes complicated, the economical efficiency deteriorates, and the device becomes shaped like a dog.
This cannot be said to be a preferable measure as it may lead to On the other hand, one possibility is to collect most of the control circuits.
This is a method of configuring digital electrical circuits that can be integrated.
However, this applies to various camera systems, such as the camera system shown in Figure 1.
Extremely rational for realizing a camera device with functions
It can be said that it is a good method. This digital electrical circuit is an analog
System design is easier compared to standard electrical circuits.
In addition to easily realizing various control modes, it is also possible to change specifications.
Because it has the characteristic of being able to respond immediately to
As with the system, various format ff1 judgment functions, measurements, and displays
Extremely suitable for application to devices with functions
. Therefore, the control applied to the camera system of this embodiment
Most of the grid consists of digital electrical circuits.
The aim is to improve reliability and economy. Now, what kind of system does the camera device shown in the first figure use?
Before explaining how it works, let's first explain how the camera system works.
The location is based on photometric data, setting data, operating conditions, operating status, etc.
In what way and through what structure do you provide input related to the information?
I will explain about this. input such various information.
Things to think about when configuring a digital system
This is important, especially when it comes to camera systems.
The mechanical operations and moving parts of /JX are compacted into a small space.
must be taken into account in systems housed in
This is a big problem. The camera device basically has a TTL optical system.
The light receiving element is made of CdS or silicon.
It is applied to photoelectric conversion elements such as light-receiving elements. Said photoelectric transformer
The output of the conversion element is an analog signal, which is then logarithmically compressed.
A-D conversion after apex value conversion
It is converted into digital information through a device. Such a photometry system
In the case of open metering, the information obtained from the apex value is B.
If Vo is ``tB V s'' in the case of aperture metering, then ゛
BVo=BY-AVo AVc (8) BV
s = BV −AV AVe'<4)
In the above equation, AVo is the opening of lens device 2.
Maximum aperture value, AV is the actual aperture value depending on the aperture, AvC
is the bending error when lens device 2 is opened, and AVc' is the aperture
Each corresponds to the bending error when viewed. In addition,
The above-mentioned errors AVc and AVc' are for the photographing lens during photometry.
It is necessary to calculate and find it based on the aperture value of device 2,
Regarding the song 9 error when opening, open from the lens device 2 side.
Since the aperture value is input, it can be easily calculated.
Regarding the bending error during aperture, the lens device 2 side
Enter the actual filter value for body 41!1 from
Since there is no way to calculate it, it is impossible to calculate it. Therefore
, in the camera system of this embodiment, when narrowing down
The bending error of is ignored, and B V a' = BV - AV (
5) As is clear from the above explanation, the data obtained from the photometric system force
The data is the target expressed by the above equation (8) or (5).
This is data related to subject brightness. Note that the data is later converted into 8-bit data through an A-D converter.
This digital data is
The total data is the least significant bit; it has a weight of “1/8”.
The most significant bit power; binary data with a weight of “16”
It is. In other words, the optical data in Performance 11 is the apex value of h stages.
It will be converted into high-precision digital data. Regarding the TTL photometry system, the analyzer is proportional to the amount of light received.
The log voltage signal is logarithmically compressed to create an analog equivalent to the apex value.
A well-known circuit that converts the signal into a signal and outputs it is applied. Also, as mentioned before, this camera device has a body 4.
The ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 for photographic film is on the top surface.
provided. This ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is used
There is a function to set the ASA sensitivity of the film to be used, but
This ASA sensitivity is set in steps of the Apex value.
This is the current trend of commercially available films. Therefore,
This ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 allows you to adjust the film sensitivity.
ASAl 6.20, 25.32.40.50
．． 64.80.100.125.160.200.25
0.3201400,500,640.800...
..., input setting with i step precision using apex value.
It will be done. However, of course, this ASA sensitivity setting data
The film sensitivity data set by dial 40 is also
Although it will be input as a digital value, it is a binary value code.
It is not possible to enter a value equivalent to a - decimal number in the
It is Noh. On the other hand, the binary number may be configured to be treated as a value corresponding to the weight t-H"2" of the bit corresponding to the digit smaller than l"1" of the value code.
However, all other data in this camera system is binary.
Since the value has a precision of one step, there is a difference between it and other data.
The matching for the digital calculation cannot be obtained, and the multiplication or
It becomes necessary to perform complex arithmetic operations including division. On the other hand
, the calculation result for actual control is a binary value with one level of precision.
, such complicated arithmetic operations are meaningless.
It comes. Therefore, in this camera system, the filter
1-stage stacking data related to system sensitivity t1-stage stacking data
A method of approximation is used. '1'' ``f That is, , are respectively 3 1 '+-! -=0.375 ・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・ (6) 3 4 8 1 out of 1+-L=0.6 2 5 ・・・・・・・・・
(Compared to force 3 2 8 0.125 steps, the error range is sufficiently permissible.
It is. Therefore, depending on the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40,
The film sensitivity is set using a binary value code with 1 stop precision.
It will be input directly. Please note that this camera system
The film sensitivity is 7 vic digital data.
However, this digital data is
The lower bit has a weight of T and the most significant bit has a weight of 68”.
This is binary data with weight. Of course, this binary data
(6) and (7) As shown in equations (6) and (7), it can be seen that either the bit 1"2 with the weight of T or the bit with the weight of T is 1"2.
When entering data regarding
Later, it is possible to adopt a configuration such as setting 1" to the relevant bit.
Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, A
The SA sensitivity setting dial 40 allows you to adjust the film sensitivity.
The input data is a 6-pit binary code.
The structure is such that the data is converted to 7-bit data later.
There is. Figure 12 shows the settings from the ASA sensitivity/setting dial 40.
Tool for entering digital data regarding lume sensitivity
ASA sensitivity setting dial 40
A dial is attached to the shaft and rotated by the rotation of the dial.
From the digital data setting board 254, the rotational position of the dial can be set.
It is structured so that digital data can be obtained depending on the location.
Ru. The digital data setting board 254 is connected to the insulation board 2.
7 on the 55 corresponding to each bit of the ilm sensitivity setting data.
multiple concentric conductive rings 256 and this data setting.
through a radially extending conductor 262 of plate 254.
Common ring 2 maintaining electrical continuity with all of the conductive rings 256
58. Furthermore, the common ring 25
8 is always in contact with the brush 260, but this brush
260 is connected to the power supply Vc6 through a resistor 261
It is also connected to an inverter 263. In addition, 'before
Between each conductive ring 256' is each bit of film sensitivity setting data.
It is a data trunk that corresponds to
6 brushes corresponding to each bit of data for each block
264 are in contact. The track changes the film speed
Each setting of the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is set for each step.
Each bit of the digital value of the setting data corresponds to each position.
During the process, the brush 264 corresponding to the one with a weight of 2" and the front
In order to make electrical contact between the conductive rings 256,
From the conductive ring 256 to the portion that contacts each brush 264
It is made up of a conductive portion 66 extending in the radial direction.
Ru. As will be explained in detail later, this camera system has eight tags.
Controlled by timing pulses. Thailand
Ming Noculus is shown in Figure 13 <TBO~TB7
It is. This is for capturing film sensitivity data.
This is not an exception, and various setting data or settings
To enter the conditions, press 6 from TBI to TB6 shown in Figure 13.
timing pulses are used. In the configuration shown in the twelfth figure, the brushes 264 are each
The timing pulse TBI through diode 265
~TB6 is applied, but such a structure
The brush 26 to which the timing pulse was applied during the
4 is not in contact with the conductive part 266, the power supply Vcc is
Since it is applied to the inverter 263 through the resistor 261,
The inverter 263 outputs low level and also outputs a black level.
When the shield 264 is in contact with the conductive part 266, the inverter
The inputs of the motor 263 are the conductive ring 256, the brush 264,
Pulled to low level through diode 2615
Therefore, the inverter 263 outputs a high level. That is, the inverter 263 outputs the ASA sensitivity setting.
The ASA sensitivity appetizer set by the constant dial 40.
The 6-digit digital value equivalent to the tying pulse value is
Synchronized with TBI to TB6, the lower digits are output sequentially starting from the focus.
It will be done. The data of this 6-bit “111 +1111 bit” is data whose lower two bits are related to 7 and 1.
As mentioned above, if l' is set in any of the lower two bits, a weight of 1 is assigned.
Set “1” to the lower bit of “2” l
” ~ In the end, 7-bit data containing approximate data of ■ or i
converted. As mentioned above, regarding film sensitivity,
The data Sv (apex value) is finally calculated as the one-stage stacking degree.
It is imported as 7-bit digital data. Through the configuration described above, the camera device shown in the first diagram is used.
Shooting film film sensitivity 5Vt - Apex value equivalent
It is imported as a digital value. Furthermore, as mentioned earlier, this camera device has
The maximum aperture value AVO (apex value) of the photographic lens device 2
) is taken in as a digital value. This is the first
As clarified in the explanation of Figure 2, the lens device 2
An aperture with a protrusion amount corresponding to the lens's aperture value AVo.
A release pin 90 is provided, and the body 4 side is provided with a release pin 90.
Fully equipped with open mold 796 for detecting the amount of mold released. This open entrance
The force pin 96 detects the amount of movement and opens the lens device 2.
Aperture (connected to the mechanism that captures the direct A V o as a digital value)
tied. The detailed structure of this mechanism is shown in Fig. 14.
The open mold 796 has one end connected to the
It comes into contact with the open pin/90 and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the pin 90.
However, this amount of movement causes the other end of the open input pin 96 to
Swinging around the axis 270 of the abutting swinging lever 268
Replaced by quantity. The amount of this oscillation depends on its magnitude.
It is converted into a 4-bit digital value and extracted.
, for this purpose, a fan-shaped shape centered on the axis 270 is provided.
This is an open aperture value detection plate 272. Open aperture value check of this 5
The output plate 272 is a digital display of the open aperture value AVo on an insulating board.
centering on axis 270 corresponding to each bit of the file data.
Four concentric conductive rings 274 and
They are arranged in a circular shape, and the power supply vC is connected through the resistor 275.
Common connected to C and further connected to invanitor 279
A ring 276 is arranged. 'In addition, between each of the conductive rings 274
is each bit of the open aperture value AVo data of the lens device 2
This data track corresponds to
In contrast, the four blocks provided at one end of the swing lever 268
Rashi 280 corresponds. The brush 280 is
The common ring 271 is juxtaposed with
It is electrically connected to the brush 282. The guide
The electric ring 274 oscillates and corresponds to the amount of oscillation of -268.
In each bit of the lens's open aperture value AVo, '1''
A brush 280 that corresponds to a track that corresponds to something
said plastic on each track to form an electrically closed circuit with the
It is formed by extending the guiding turtle part 282 to the part that contacts the part 280.
The lens device 2 has an aperture of 90 to 4
Lens device 2 whose settings are input through the open input pin 96
Open aperture value AV. The digital value corresponding to the apex value is the brush 280.
and selective contact t' of the conductive portion 282.
It will be done. By the way, the maximum aperture value AVo of this lens device 2 is
Even when importing, the timing pulse shown in Figure 13
will be involved. Used to capture this open aperture value AVo.
There are four timing patterns TB3 to TB6.
It's Luz. In the configuration shown in FIG. 14, each conductive ring 274 is
The timing pulse TB3 through the diode 277
~Apply TB6! It has a configuration of 20 mm, but
A conductive ring with a timing pulse applied in a configuration
A blank 280 is in contact with a conductive portion 282 extending from 274.
If not, the power supply Vcc is input through resistor 275.
Since the voltage is applied to the inverter 279, the inverter 279 is low.
・Performs a level output and also provides a brush 28 on the conductive part 282.
0 are in contact, the input of the inverter 279 is
Common ring 276, common brush 283, brush 280. conductive
is pulled to low level through ring 274 and diode 277.
Therefore, the inverter 279 outputs a high level.
cormorant. That is, from the inverter 279, the open pin
Photographic lens input from 90 through open input pin 92
The 4-digit digital value corresponding to the maximum aperture value of zoom device 2 is
Upper bit in synchronization with timing pulses TB3 to TB6
are output sequentially from The data of these 4 pits is the top level
, the '1' digit has a weight of 4' and the least significant digit has a weight of i. When importing data regarding this open aperture value AVo,
The problem is that the opening pin provided in the lens device 2
Open aperture value AV of 90. This is the difference in the amount of protrusion corresponding to . That is, the lens device 2 and
Both the camera and body 4 are freed from space constraints.
The amount of protrusion of pin io can be changed widely for each open aperture value A to 'O.
In addition, lens device 2 and body 4 cannot be
Because it has a removable structure, there is no need to worry about minute bumps that affect accuracy.
It is difficult to reliably read the difference in output. This is special
The binary code digital data is stored in the configuration shown in Figure 14.
from the open numerical value detection plate 272 to the position of the brush 280.
When attempting to read correspondingly, the brush 280 is
Between the position showing data and the position next to it showing other data
If the brush 280 is located, it may be misread due to accuracy limitations of the brush 280, etc.
There is a risk that they will be taken away. Misread data at this time is never
It is not intermediate data between adjacent data, but completely different data.
Since the data will be retrieved as
Such misreading poses a major problem in operation. Therefore
, what was considered was the maximum aperture value AV of the lens device 2 used.
When reading o, gray code instead of binary code
This is the method of reading it. Such gray code is
As is well known, between adjacent digital data
, the content differs by only one bit, and the
14 Through a mechanism such as that shown in the drawings, the open input pin 96 is opened.
When reading digital data corresponding to the amount of movement,
It can be applied very effectively. Therefore, the real truth
In the camera system of the example, the lens device 2 is opened.
The mechanism for capturing the maximum aperture value AVo has a gray code.
is applied and later converted into binary data as data for processing such as calculations.
The structure is such that it is converted into a numerical code. To explain in more detail, the Gray code is the 15th
As shown in the comparison table in the figure, normal binary code and
In contrast, adjacent codes differ by only one bit, and l
Corresponds to O-base and binary codes as shown.
. Now, the relationship between this gray code and binary code
When you think about it, the two have a completely random relationship.
It's not a thing. That is, each digit of the binary code
After matching each digit of the Gray code to
If you look at the initial code, you will see the gray code "0".
” The digit corresponding to the digit has the same content as the next higher digit.
The digit corresponding to the “lo” digit of the Gray code is
The content is inverted with respect to the one higher digit of
Recognize. Therefore, in synchronization with timing pulses TB3 to TB6,
Gray code data imported from the upper digits is
As shown in Figure 16, the bar is removed by not taking it out through the circuit.
It can be obtained as data converted to binary code.
come. In other words, a J-type flip-flop enters its J-
When the force is the same human power, Q output as shown in FIG. 17 is performed. In other words, when both inputs to J- are "L", the next clock
In synchronization with the pulse, the Q output is inverted and the input is shared with J-.
0". At this time, the Q output is kept the same content. Therefore, the first
6 Connect the flip-flop to J- through the circuit shown in the diagram.
Apply the gray code to the input terminal of J- in order from the upper digit.
If it is, the clock pulse is synchronized from its Q output terminal.
The data obtained sequentially is the byte of the Gray code.
This is data converted into a binary code. As stated above, the first illustrated camera device is as described above.
Throughout the configuration, the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device used is A'%.
"O is imported as a digital value equivalent to the apex value.
Ru. In this camera device, lens device 2 has an aperture of
manually, that is, depending on the aperture setting ring 8, according to the photographer's wishes.
Manual state to preset the aperture E and its aperture
The aperture can be preset from the body 4 side.
The mark 12 is selected by the setting ring 8.
The state of the dynamic state is transmitted to the body 4 side.
As mentioned above, having a mechanism is required. That is, the lens device 2 side has a diaphragm setting ring 8.
When the arc 12 is selected, the protruding AE bin 92
The AE pin 92 and the AE pin 92 are provided on the body 4 side.
AE detector for detecting that the AE pin 92 has protruded.
Although an output section 100 is provided, this AE detection section 100
is interlocked with switch 284 as shown in FIG. This switch 284 is a normally closed contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 27.
5 to the power supply Vcc, and inno, (
- Connected to the input end of the 279, and the other end is a diode.
A timing pulse TBI is applied through the gate 277.
It is. That is, switch 284
Its state is sensed by the signal TBL, and the closed state is detected.
), the input of the inverter 279 is
Tsuchi 284 goes to low level through diode 277
Therefore, the inverter 279 outputs a high level.
and in the open state, the inverter 279
Power supply Vcc is applied to the input terminal through a resistor 275.
Therefore, the inverter 279 outputs a low level output. Therefore, when the AE bin 92 does not protrude, that is, when the AE bin 92 does not protrude,
When in the manual state, the inverter 279 outputs a voltage.
High level output in synchronization with timing pulse TBI
, and when the kE bin is protruding, that is, in the automatic state.
When a timing pulse is generated from the inverter 279,
Low level output is performed in synchronization with TBI. Through the configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment
The stem controls the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2.
The setting conditions, i.e. the aperture preset, are done on the lens side.
or in a state where it is performed on the body side.
It incorporates certain conditions. In addition, in the following explanation
In this case, the timing pulse is output from the inverter 279.
A no-i level signal that is output in synchronization with TBl.
It is called the MNAL signal. The first illustrated camera device also includes a lens device 2 and a body 4.
Narrow down by operating the narrowing lever 64 on the side.
I mentioned earlier that it has a configuration that allows for
As you can see, this aperture lever 64 is simply mechanical.
It not only has the effect of narrowing down the lens device 2, but also has the effect of narrowing down the lens device 2.
As shown in Figure 4, the lens device 2 is in the aperture state.
Switch 286 for detection. linked to. This switch 286 is a normally open contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 27.
5 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
It is connected to the input end of 79, and the other end is connected to the diode 27.
7, the timing pulse TB2 is applied.
Ru. That is, the switch 286
Its state is sensed by TB2, and it is in the open state.
If so, a resistor 27 is connected to the input terminal of the inverter 279.
5, the power supply Vcc is applied through the inverter 2.
79 outputs low level, and in the closed state
The input of the inno (-) 279 is the switch 286,
Because it is pulled to a low level through diode 277,
The corresponding inno(-279) outputs a level.
Then, operate the aperture lever 64 to adjust the photographing lens.
If 2 is the narrowing down state, the above Inno Kuita 279?
They are high level in synchronization with Timing Norculus TB2.
file output. Through the expansion configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment
Whether the stem is in a state where the lens device 2 is narrowed down or not.
It incorporates conditions related to In addition, in the following explanation
If the timing pulse is removed from the input terminal 279,
A level signal that is output in synchronization with TB2
is called a 5PDW signal. As is clear from the above explanation, the 14th illustrated inverter
The timing pulse TBl is output from the data controller 279.
The MNA L signal is synchronized with the timing pattern.
The 5PDW signal is synchronized with the timing of the bus TB2.
・Also synchronized with timing pulses TB3 to TB6 signals
Regarding the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used
This is because the data will be output sequentially from the high-order digits.
However, the output of inverter 279 is equal to the timing pulse
They will be appropriately separated according to TBI-TB5. In addition
, this configuration will be detailed later. As mentioned above, the camera device shown in the first diagram is based on the photographer's wishes.
Shutter speed or aperture value
TV (apex value), and aperture value AV (when aperture priority is set).
Apex value) are set and input as digital values.
The specific configuration is the ASA sensitivity setting dial.
To import the digital value of film sensitivity from Yaru 40
The configuration is similar to that of That is, the dial 34 is as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG.
The rotational position of the dial is determined from the digital data setting board 288.
How to input digital data into the system depending on the location.
It is composed of many parts. The digital data setting board 288 is
7 speed TV or aperture value AV data on an insulated board.
Multiple concentric circular conductors corresponding to each digital value pit.
The electric ring 292 and the data setting plate 288 extend in the radial direction.
All of the conductive rings 292 are connected to each other through the conductor 298 that is present.
A common ring 294 that maintains gas continuity.
It is. Note that the common ring 294 is always connected to the brush 296.
Although they are in contact, this brush 296 passes through a resistor 297.
is connected to the power supply 'Ice' and the inverter 299
It is connected to the. Note that between each conductive ring 292 there is a shutter speed TV or an aperture.
The data corresponding to each pit of the digital data of the value AV.
data tracks, and data is stored for each track.
Five brushes 290 corresponding to each bit are in contact with each other.
There is. The track has shutter speed TV or aperture value AV
For each setting position of the dial 34,
Among each bit of the digital value of constant data,
Electricity is connected between the brush 290 corresponding to the conductive ring 292 and the conductive ring 292.
to make contact with each of the brushes 290.
A conductor extending radially from the conductive ring 256
A power section 300 is arranged therein. Note that from this configuration, the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV
Timing pulses are also involved in order to capture the
I'm coming. In the configuration shown in FIG. 18, there are five brushes 29.
0 through the diodes 301, respectively.
・A configuration in which TB2 to TB6 are applied in the pulse
However, due to the overhanging configuration, the timing...
The brush 290 to which the irradiance is applied is in contact with the conductive part 300.
If not, the power supply Vcc is inverted through resistor 297.
Since the voltage is applied to the inverter 299, the inverter 263
Level output is performed, and the plan 290 is connected to the conductive part 300.
If they are in contact, the input of the inverter 299 is
Through electric ring 2゛92, brush 290, diode 301
Since the inverter 299 is pulled to the low level,
Performs high level output. That is, the inverter 299
From then on, the shutter is set by the dial 34.
5 digits equivalent to the avec 5th value of speed TV or aperture value AV
The digital value is the same as timing pulses TB2 to TB6.
The data is output sequentially starting from the lower digit pit. I have this too
, whose most significant bit has a weight of '8''
It is. By the way, depending on the setting of the dial 34, the above-mentioned
The digital data obtained through the
Is it data related to speed TV or aperture value AV?
It is necessary to specify whether the
What is provided is the mode provided on the top surface of the body 4.
This is a changeover switch 38. 'This mode selector switch 3
8 is a switch that closes when set to aperture priority mode.
It is linked with the switch 302. This switch 302 is a normally open contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 29.
7 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
99, and the other end is connected to the diode 30.
Timing pulse TBI is applied through 1
. That is, the switch 302 is connected to the timing pulse TB.
Its state is sensed by l, and it is in the open state.
In this case, a resistor 297 is connected to the input terminal of the inverter 299.
Since the power supply Vcc is applied, the inverter 299 is low.
・Performs level output, and in the closed state, the inverter
The input of the switch 302 and the diode 30
Since the inverter 2 is pulled to a low level through 1, the inverter 2
99 performs high level output. Therefore, the mode switch
When the switching switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode side
, from the inverter 299, the timing pulse
A high level output is made in synchronization with TBl, and the above
The mode selector switch 38 switches to shutter priority mode.
When the inverter 299 is
file output. . Through the configuration described above, the camera of this embodiment
The system allows the data set by dial 34 to
Is it related to shutter speed TV or aperture value?
It is determined whether the In addition, in the following explanation
In this case, the timing pulse is output from the inverter 299.
This refers to the A level signal that is output in synchronization with TBI.
It is called an ASLC signal. Note that in this embodiment, the shutter speed TV is
Select and set from values in 1 step increments depending on the dial 34.
, the aperture value can be selected from p-values in 7-step increments.
It is configured as follows. In other words, the shutter speed in 1 step increments
Despite the setting, the dial 34 is full of general data.
Since it is necessary to set the aperture value including
Depending on the setting position of 34, the shutter speed can be set, including general data as shutter 1-speed.
It will become known. To address this issue, this implementation
In the example, setting data regarding shutter speed is a necessary setting.
The value is multiplied by 1 for the fixed digital value, and the dial
Digital data read out according to the set position of 34
The data is later multiplied by 2 to obtain the apex value phase related to the shutter speed.
It is used as a digital data TV. As mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device has an inverter 29
From 9 onwards, the diagram is synchronized with the timing pulse TBI.
The data set by the file 34 is related to the shutter speed.
or whether it is related to the aperture value.
The AsLC signal for the timing pulse is output, and the timing pulse
The set data is output sequentially from the high-order digit side.
However, the output of the inverter 299 is
Appropriately separated according to timing pulses TB1 to TB6
It will be. This configuration will be explained in detail later.
. Through the configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment
The stem is set by the photographer using the dial 34.
data speed TV or aperture value AVi equivalent to the apex value.
It is imported as a digital value. In addition, this camera device has a camera lens device 2 to be used.
It has a configuration that detects the minimum aperture aperture value. This is the second
As clarified in the explanation of the figure, the lens device 2 is
The minimum diameter with a protrusion corresponding to the minimum aperture value of the lens.
A diameter pin 91 is provided, and the minimum diameter pin 9 is provided on the body 4 side.
A minimum diameter input pin 97 for detecting the amount of protrusion of 1 is provided. This minimum diameter input pin 97 detects the amount of movement and
The minimum aperture value of the lens device 2 is
A mechanism for identifying which aperture value it belongs to among the aperture values.
connected to. Such a mechanism is a real model whose detailed configuration is shown in FIG.
Notea has a minimum diameter input pin 97 with one end connected to the minimum diameter input pin 97.
Contacts the diameter pin 91 and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91
However, this amount of movement is different from that of the above-mentioned minimum diameter cabin 97.
Centered around the shaft 303 of the swinging lever 304 that abuts the end
Replaced by the amount of oscillation. This amount of oscillation is determined by the F number.
Fil, F16. F22. F32. Aperture of F45°F64
It is used as a quantity to select one of the values, but the
For this purpose, a sector-shaped minimum centering on the axis 303 is provided.
This is an aperture aperture detection plate 306. This minimum aperture detection plate
306 is the F number as the minimum aperture value on the insulation board.
Fil, F16. F22. F3ce, F45°F64
'6 electrodes 308 so that the aperture value can be selected
The electrodes 308 are arranged in the circumferential direction of the detection plate.
The brush 305 provided at the tip of the lever 304 and the lever
The bar 304 can be selectively brought into contact with the bar 304 depending on the amount of swing thereof. At the same time, the minimum diameter aperture detection plate 306
a common electrode 310 extending to the brushes 30 and 5;
is always connected to the common electrode 310 regardless of its swinging position.
one of the electrodes 308 and the common electrode
310. In addition, the above
Common electrode 310 is connected to power supply Vcc through resistor 314
connected to the inverter 3160 input terminal.
, six electrodes 308 are connected through diodes 312.
and apply timing pulses TBl to TB6, respectively.
be done. In the configuration, the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2
The protrusion amount of the minimum diameter pin 91 having a protrusion amount corresponding to
Detected by the minimum diameter input pin 97 on the body 4 side,
The amount of movement of the brush 305 of the minimum diameter input pin 97
Accordingly, one of the six electrodes 308 is selected.
conduction between the common electrode 310 and the common electrode 310. Now, the block
A diode 31 is connected to the electrode 308 that is in contact with the brush 305.
The corresponding timing pulse is input through 2.
If not, the input terminal of inverter 316 will be dependent on the power supply Vcc.
becomes high level, - its output is low level
Also, a diode F312 is connected to this electrode 308.
If the corresponding timing pulse is input through
Since the input terminal of inverter 316 is at low level,
The output will be at level A. Immediately, the inverter
From 316, is synchronous with the timing pulse corresponding to the detected minimum aperture value,
High level 1 output is performed, and the front 8th inverter
The output of the controller 316 is used as the timing pulse TBl-TB6.
By classifying based on the detected minimum diameter pin value
is F number and Fil. F16. F22. F32. F45. Which value of F64
It is possible to detect and quantify whether the following applies. As mentioned above, 1. The first illustrated camera device is used for photographing
You can input the minimum aperture value AMAX of lens device 2.
However, in the following explanation, the inverter 316
The output signals of are collectively referred to as AMAX'. As is clear from the above explanation, the set film feel 9
Open aperture value data for photographic lens devices using degree data Sv1
AvO, manual state, automatic state discrimination signal MNA
L lens device aperture signal 5PDW, shutter speed T
V or aperture value AV setting data, aperture priority mode selection signal
Minimum aperture detection signal of photographic lens device using No. ASLC1
All timing pulses TBI-TB6 for AMAX etc.
It is imported in synchronization with. That is, as shown in FIG.
From the figure), synchronized with timing pulses TBl to TB6.
Then, the data regarding film sensitivity Sv has a weight of "1"
bits Sv- with a weight of 4'8'' to bits Sv- with a weight of 8 V, are sequentially output.
Ru. Data regarding this film sensitivity Sv is converted
The matter is as stated above. In addition,
The timing pulse T
The aperture is selected on the lens device 2 side in synchronization with BI.
The MNAL signal indicating that the
The lens device 2 is in the aperture state in synchronization with the lens 1η.
The 8PDW signal indicating that the
・In synchronization with pulse TB, 3 to T11, use the lens device
Gray "1" for the open aperture value AVo of 2 - code data AVOGC has a weight of 100 bit A
They are sequentially output up to Vo4oo. The opening of this lens device 2
Gray code data AVo regarding maximum aperture value AVo
As mentioned earlier, GC was later developed into binary code.
The data is converted to AVo. Furthermore, inverter 299 (
From Fig. 18), it is synchronized with the timing pulse TBl.
Then, a signal λSLC indicating the aperture priority mode is output.
and synchronized with timing pulses T82 to TB6.
related to the set shutter speed TV or aperture value AV.
The data will be output. In addition, here, the timing
The data output in synchronization with the nozzle TB2 is the weight of y''.
output in synchronization with timing pulse TB3.
The data to be input has a weight of l”, and the timing −(rus
The data output in synchronization with TB4 has a weight number of '2'.
The timing is output in synchronization with ``]-''.
The data to be input has a weight of “4'' and the timing pulse
Data output in synchronization with STB6 has a weight of “8”.
However, this is based on the aperture, single value AV, or data input with one step precision.
Ru. In contrast, input from the common evening dial 34
The shutter speed will be set according to the "l" step density.
, the bit Tv1 with weight l” at the shutter speed is tied to
Data with a weight of “↓” in synchronization with Ming Noculus T
Bit TV2 with a weight of “2” is used as a timing
Data with a weight of “1” in synchronization with the programming pulse TB3
, the bit TV4 with a weight of “4” is the timing
・Data with a weight of 2” in synchronization with Noculus TB4
Then, bit TVs with a weight of '8'' are
Data with a weight of “4” in synchronization with the Norse TBS
Then, TV16 is a timing signal with a weight of '16''.
data with a weight of 8” in synchronization with the programming pulse TB6irc.
Each data will be imported as a data. Turn it over and say
If the data regarding the shutter speed TV is multiplied by i,
Matched the accuracy of the aperture value data as a data for the degree of stacking.
This is the same as the setting made using the common dial 34 above. Therefore, the timing voltage (T) from the inverter 299 is
The data output in synchronization with B2 to TB6 is set to the shutter speed.
When used as a digital TV, it will be used twice.6 Furthermore, from the inverter 316 (Fig. 19),
When the minimum aperture value of lens device 2 is F/par, Fil, F
16. F22. F32. F45. Which one is F64?
A signal AMAX: indicating the
Output AMAX' of converter 316, timing pulse
Depending on which one of TBt-TB6 is synchronized, the minimum
The diameter aperture value is kept constant. The camera device shown in the first diagram also has various functions for setting various operating conditions.
Has a switch mechanism, but buttons such as shutter release
The switch mechanism linked to 18 is one of them.゛
This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG.
However, when pressing the shutter/release button 0/18,
Sakuyo? The switch 81' closes and the inverter l
A high level output is made through the shutter release
This is to start the necessary camera operations after the initialization. Na
Oh, these movements are the flipping up of a reflex mirror.
, narrowing down to the preset position of lens device 2, act 2
Traveling type, focal brain, shutter front curtain travel opening
Includes actions such as beginning. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism
This is called SW2, and its output signal is called SR. Additionally, the selector lever 22 is connected to two switch mechanisms.
It's moving. One is the switch mechanism for the AE lock.
However, this switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in Figure 21.
mark 26 selects the selector lever 22.
When the switch 81 is set to the position shown in FIG.
A high level output is made through the converter 11, and
The photometric amount is held fixed based on the high level output. Below
In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5AELK,
The output signal is called AELK. The other one is self
・This is the switch mechanism for setting the timer.
The switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in Fig. 21.
, move the selector lever 22 to the position where the mark 28 is selected.
, the switch 81 closes and the inverter 1
A high level output is made through 1, and this high level
The shutter release button 18 is pressed depending on the bell output.
The shutter is released after a certain period of time after the shutter is released.
The so-called self-timer shooting is performed.
. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as SSE, L
F. The output signal is called 5ELF. In addition, the camera device shown in the first diagram can also be used to determine various operating states.
Equipped with a switch or mechanism for First, body 4
The AE lever 94 provided on the side is in the AE charging state.
To detect whether or not there is 1. AE charge detection switch
A chain mechanism is provided. This switch mechanism is shown in Figure 21.
The AE lever 94 is configured as shown in FIG.
switch S closes the circuit when the inverter is in the
-I is configured to output "l" from I. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5AE.
CG, and its output signal is called ABCG. It also detects whether or not the film winding is complete.
For this purpose, a winding completion detection switch mechanism is provided. child
The switch mechanism has a mechanism as shown in Fig. 21.
The winding lever 14 is used to wind the film and release the shutter.
Char of springs to move the necessary mechanical parts
When the switching is completed, switch SL closes and releases, and the inverter
It is configured to output "1" from I. Na
Oh, the switch S1 is used after the shutter release.
The movements are performed sequentially, with a two-act running focal play style.
The rear curtain of the main shutter remains closed until the end of travel.
Ru.・In the following explanation, we will not refer to this switch mechanism.
[P, its output signal is called the WNUP signal. Sarani, the front curtain of the focal plane shutter begins to run.
In order to detect whether or not the vehicle has started, the front curtain running detection switch
A structure will be established. This switch mechanism is shown in Figure 22.
When the leading curtain starts running, it
Switch S2, which had been closed until now, is now open.
It is configured so that the “l” output that was previously
It is something that can be done. The output of this switch mechanism is the shutter
Used to measure speed and control the start time of the trailing curtain.
It's something you can do. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5CT.
ST, and its output signal is called CTST. In addition, as mentioned above, the camera device shown in the first figure is a lens
Preset the aperture for controlling the zoom device 2 from the body 4 side.
The outline of the operation of this mechanism is as shown in Figure 2.
I already mentioned it in the morning. Immediately, if the shutter is about to be released and the AE
Bunny 94 is locked in the AH charge position.
, the aperture presetting lever 84 on the lens device 2 side,
The lens device 2 is held at the open aperture reset position.
Ru. This locked state is released when the shutter is released.
However, when the lock is released, the AE lever 94 is moved to the minimum position.
Release the lever 84 that is biased toward the diameter preset side.
The lever 84 is set to the minimum diameter preset side.
Start running towards. At the same time, the amount of movement of the lever 84 is detected by pulse means.
Depending on the movement of the lever 84, the tightening force is
Set number of aperture stages (this increases as the lever 84 moves)
When the number of apertures matches the 9 stages for control,
, by clamping the AE lever 94.
84 is stopped at a position where it has traveled the number of stages for control.
. Through the above operations, from the body 4 side, the lens device 2
This makes it possible to preset the aperture, but the
Figure 23 shows the pulse conversion of the travel distance of the lever 84.
This is a mechanism for detecting AE lever 94 is arm 3
This arm 318 is integrated with the shaft 320.
An arm 322 that can be pivoted around the center is rotated by a pin 324.
It is held movably. Depending on this configuration, the AE lever
-94 is movable in the direction of arrow δ or σ.
It is lightly biased in the direction of arrow a by a spring (not shown).
ing. The lever 326 is pivotally supported by a shaft 327 and
A part of the arm 318 is automatically rotated by a pin 328
This lever 326 is connected to the AE lever.
It was established to obtain the number of pulses according to the distance traveled by 94.
It is something. The lever 326 has a brush 33 at its tip.
0, in the direction of arrow a or σ of the AH lever 94.
oscillating around the shaft 327 in the direction of the arrow or a.
It is something that moves. The brush 330 emits fan-shaped pulses.
It is always in sliding contact with the raw board 322, and a part of it is grounded.
The common electrode 334 is always in contact with the common electrode 334, and the other parts are
It faces a comb-shaped electrode 336 that protrudes in one radial direction.
. The comb-shaped electrodes 3'3''6 are in a conductive relationship with each other.
, connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 338 and
Inverter 3400A is connected to the power end. In such a state,
If the AE lever 94 moves in the direction of arrow a or σ, the plate
The pin 330 is in sliding contact with the pulse generating plate 332 as indicated by the arrow
moves in direction a. At this time, the brush 330 has the comb-like shape.
Moving while repeating contact and non-contact with the electrode 336
However, when the contact state is 9, the input terminal of the inverter 340 °
is pulled to the ground side and becomes a low level, and its output becomes high.
level, and when the one-way valve is in contact, the inverter 3
The input terminal of 40 becomes high level depending on the power supply Vcc.
The output of -t becomes low level. Therefore, the AE lever
94) E, from the lock position in the AE charge state
It runs in the direction of the arrow σ according to the biasing force of the lever 84 on the side of the zoom device 2.
If you do this, naturally the brush 33θ will also run in the direction of arrow a.
The travel distance of the AE lever 94 is determined from the inverter 340.
A pulse signal corresponding to this can be obtained. Therefore, this
By counting the number of pulses of the pulse signal, the AE level is
The travel distance of the bar 94, that is, the number of throttle stages depending on the lever 84.
After knowing the nozzle reset position and reaching the desired number of aperture stages
By clamping the AE lever 94 at
The aperture is preset using the lever 84 of the lens device 2.
I can do that. In addition, mechanical parts such as AE lever mechanism and clamp mechanism, etc.
The output pulse signal of the inverter 340 is
There is naturally a difference in operating time between the electrical means of
However, based on empirical data, this is a mechanical
The problem must be solved by electrical correction.
Needless to say, it has to be done. Further, a pulse generating plate 3 having a configuration as shown in FIG.
Pulses obtained through a contact mechanism such as 32 are not necessarily
The waveform is a shaped pulse suitable for counting.
but when inverted through inverter 34=0
, will be formatted to some extent. However, if necessary, further waveforms can be added.
Waveform shaping may be performed through shaping means. Through the configuration described above, this camera system
Presetting the aperture of lens device 2 from the body side
It is a digital device called power runt of the number of pulses.
Click the lever for presetting the aperture through manual means.
Since the lap/pull position is determined, the aperture plate has extremely high precision.
Can be reset. In addition, in the following explanation,
Position inspection of the AE lever 94 including the output of the inverter 340
The pulse signals for output are collectively called FPC. The camera system in this example has a strobe inserted.
As mentioned above, flash photography is performed automatically.
As mentioned above, further according to Figure 24, this
The operation of the strobe will be explained in detail. In the same figure, 34
2 is an automatic flash unit that controls the amount of light emitted.
Controls the amount of light according to the reflected light from the subject.
From the film sensitivity setting dial 106 as an element for
Film sensitivity information and aperture setting dial 108
Aperture value information is used. Regarding the configuration of such strobe unit 342,
Since it is well known, detailed explanation will be omitted, but strobe
In order for the unit 342 to emit strobe light, it is necessary to
The discharge capacitor must be charged to the required voltage.
No. As this capacitor completes charging, this
The robot unit 342 is able to emit light,
In order to make this information known to the outside, through the signal line 344
A signal indicating completion of charging of the discharging capacitor is output. This signal is introduced into the current circuit 346;
The current circuit 346 of
, the first current amount signal as a fully automatic charging completion signal and the semi-automatic charging completion signal.
respective signals with the second current amount signal as the dynamic charging completion signal.
signal can be received from the control contact 140.
Ru. Note that the first connection is made from the control terminal 54 to the control contact 140.
A state in which a false current flow or a second current flow is possible.
In this case, the camera device will detect this and turn the camera on.
will automatically switch to flash photography mode and set the camera to body 4.
Analog information from the built-in TTL photometry system (not shown)
Instead, analog information from the data terminal 56 is converted from A to D.
The circuit switches to the circuit that imports the data. As mentioned earlier,
The camera is activated depending on the first current amount (fully automatic charging completion signal).
When the camera switches to flash photography mode, the body 4 side
6 automatically no matter what shutter speed is set.
The second current is controlled to 1/0th of a second.
Depending on the amount of charge (semi-automatic charging completion signal), the camera device may
When switching to camera shooting mode, 1/60th of a second is recorded on the body 4 side.
Only when a shutter speed higher than or equal to
□It will be automatically controlled to 1/60th of a second. Ten thousand,
The data terminal 56 is connected from the data contact 142 to the aperture on the strobe side.
Regarding the aperture value set using the setting dial 108.
data is stored in a register directly connected to the aperture setting dial 108.
The call is not received using analog information through the bell setting device 348.
Ru. This analog information is converted into A-1) and digitalized.
The information is taken into the camera device as data and used for aperture control.
It is used as data for the flash.
Camera device that becomes system strobe photography mode by taking
When the shutter release is performed, synchronization connection will occur.
Bottle to strobe unit 342 through point 52.138.
A light emission command synchronized with the shutter movement of D4 is given.
, the strobe Φ unit 342 automatically adjusts the brightness.
The camera device side is 1/60th of a second or less (semi-automatic)
If you release the shutter at a shutter speed of
In both cases, the aperture is controlled according to the aperture value set on the strobe side.
I do. In the following explanation, detection will be made through the control terminal 54.
A signal indicating the completion of fully automatic charging including the first amount of current issued
The C8Al signal, and also the semi-automatic charging complete including the second current amount.
The first signal indicating the completion of the C8A2 signal, and the charging of these two
The signals indicating completion are collectively referred to as the C8A signal. Also,
Data regarding the f value inputted through the data terminal 56.
The signals are collectively called the VSA signal. The camera system in this example is equipped with an external photometer □
This makes it possible to control a wider range of exposure.
This is the same as mentioned before, but in addition, Figure 25 and Figure 25
External photometry according to the block diagram of the external photometer shown in Figure 26.
The operation of the meter will be explained in detail. In Fig. 25, 350 is a reflected light type photometer.
Measures reflected light directly without passing it through a photographic lens, etc.
Has a function. This external photometer 350 is connected to the camera device side.
The external photometry mode signal is sent through the terminal 54 and the contact 146.
The current circuit 352 is equipped with a current circuit 352 into which a third amount of current can flow.
camera equipment equipped with this reflected light photometer.
On the side, the third current is applied from the control terminal 54 to the contact 146.
When current can flow in at a certain amount, it is detected and automatically disconnected.
Switches to partial metering mode, and the camera (not shown) built into the body 4
Instead of the analog information from the TTL photometry system, the data end
Analog information from child 56 is A-D converted and taken 1, including
The circuit is selected. At the same time, from #8 pin external photometry\- 1 total 35-〇, data terminal from data contact 148
56, the subject brightness information obtained as a result of photometry is converted into analog information.
This analog information is given as A-D conversion.
and is taken into the camera device as digital information.
Used as data for exposure control. In addition, in Fig. 26, 354 is an incident light type photometer, and the
It has a function to directly measure the illuminance of the area. This external photometer
354 is a control on the force/applying device side, similar to the photometer shown in Figure 25.
External photometry mode signal from control terminal 54 through contact 166
The current circuit 356 is equipped with a current circuit 356 into which a third current amount can flow.
), a camera device equipped with this incident light photometer
On the side, the third current is applied from the control terminal 54 to the contact 166.
When a certain amount of current can flow in, it is detected and automatically removed.
When switching to partial metering mode, the camera (not shown) built into body 4
Instead of the analog information from the TTL photometry system, the data end
Analog/gu information from child 56 is converted into A-D and imported.
A circuit is selected. At the same time 1 from the external photometer 354
is the result of photometry from the data contact 168 to the data terminal 56.
The obtained illuminance information is given as analog information, but
This analog information is A-D converted and becomes digital information.
The data is imported into the camera device and used as data for exposure control.
It is used as In addition, at this time, the information is input to the camera device side.
The data obtained is illuminance information measured using the incident light method.
Treat it equivalently to subject brightness information measured in advance using the reflected light method.
A particular problem arises when converting into a form that allows
do not have. As is clear from the above explanation, regarding external photometers,
Whether it is a reflected light type or an incident light type,
Although it is possible to treat them equivalently, especially regarding the incident light method,
The difference is that the camera device has an AE clock function.
It is. That is, the incident light type photometer 354 operates when the photometry button 174 is pressed.
Photometry is performed only while the pressure is pressed and the photometry data is sent to terminal 16.
It is configured to output to 8. Therefore, the metering button 7
574 is not pressed and the photometer gator is connected to terminal 168.
When there is no output, the camera device is in AE lock state.
It is preferable that it be in Therefore, the II7 light button
The switch 4 is interlocked with a normally closed switch (not shown), and the switch
The switch is connected to the button via the contact 170 and the AE lock terminal 58.
``AE lock switch 8AEL built into Day 2
Connected in parallel with K. As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment
Although optical and incident light external photometers can be used,
, in the following description, the detection through the control terminal 54 will be described below.
A signal indicating the external photometry mode including the third current amount
These signals are collectively referred to as LM signals, and are input through the data terminal 56.
The data regarding the photometric amount to be measured is called the OB multiplication signal. OB double signal apex value of ≧, subject brightness BVK equivalent
make it a thing. Through the mechanism configuration described in detail above, this example
In camera systems, settings are made for various input data.
Import data and information about operating conditions and settings
I'm here. As is clear from the above explanation, the camera 7 system of this embodiment
Suam collects the data necessary for exposure control through various means.
The system captures information about the device, operating conditions, and operating status.
, these input information are used by the digital control system described next.
Processed by the system. As explained before, the camera system of this embodiment is...
In addition to controlling the operation by organically linking the overall system,
, small size and high precision, simplifying manufacturing adjustments, and
Perform the most rational operation development based on a large number of input information
In order to make this possible, we are using digital technology as a control system.
A control system is applied. The following is a description of the data applied to the camera system of the present invention.
An example of a digital control system will be explained, but special
Due to the structural constraints and limitations of the camera, or as mentioned above,
Deploying a system that is not necessarily rational due to operational definitions, etc.
have not done so. ¥ indicates the camera equipment used in this example.
The camera mechanism is a major change from the concept of the conventionally known camera mechanism.
It has not yet reached the point where it has an ideal configuration that has made a huge leap in width,
The power-n-la system of this embodiment also goes beyond that.
This is because it is not. Figure 27 shows the camera equipment of Figure 1.
The position is taken in order to satisfy the various performances mentioned above.
This is a schematic block diagram of a digital control system.
The control system of the camera system is the most traditional
Various mechanisms, such as shutter travel mechanism, aperture squeegee mechanism,
In addition to the ra-up and quick return mechanisms, etc.
Various numerical data or operating condition setting functions and various mechanisms
3 for the mechanism part 358 including the operating state determination function, etc.
Divided into two large blocks. These three big blocks
Lock is input control section 360, central control section 362, output
In the control unit 364, each control unit is connected to an 11vA bus line.
366. Note that the mechanism portion 358 includes
, the information input section explained earlier, i.e. the photometry section, various data
data setting section, various condition setting section, various operation status determination section, etc.
It is equipped with various exposure control mechanisms and various display mechanisms. The input control section 360 receives an input from the mechanism section 358.
Photometric analog data and various condition settings are transmitted through system 368.
A constant signal and an operating state determination signal are input.
Data and signals are the optimal digital information for information processing.
centrally controlled through input path line 370.
The information is transferred to section 362. The central control section 362 receives an input system from the mechanical section 358.
Various setting data and various condition setting signals are sent through the control unit 3/72.
etc. are input, but here the data and signals are processed.
The input control unit 360 is converted into an optimal form for the purpose of processing.
The necessary arithmetic processing is added to the digital information,
After the calculation is completed, various exposures included in the mechanism part 358
Information necessary for controlling the control mechanism and various display mechanisms.
to the output control section 364 through the output bus line 374.
transmitted. On the other hand, the central control unit 362 controls the timing
・Through the 2-in 376, each of the 9 types is attached to the mechanism part 358.
Timing for importing setting data and various condition setting signals
Tie for dynamic driving of switching signals and various display mechanisms
It gives a timing signal. The output control section 364 receives input from the mechanism section 358.
Various condition setting signals, various operating state determination signals, and the above-mentioned
Based on the control information input from the central control unit 362,
Applying control signals to various exposure control mechanisms of the mechanism section 358
At the same time, necessary information is displayed on various display mechanisms. The functional configuration of the mechanical part of the camera shown in Fig. 27 is shown in Fig. 28.
This will be explained in more detail according to a schematic diagram. This mechanism part 358 is the input/output and control display of the camera device.
It is involved in all operations related to, and for input purposes.
Various setting switches or detection switches or measuring devices
, various switches and lines for output, various electrics for control.
It is equipped with a source glass/jar and various display mechanisms for display.
In the same figure, 378 is the T 1' L photometry means explained earlier.
, the output signal is logarithmically compressed and opened through means not shown.
For radiometric light, BVo2, 3V-AVO~AVc, aperture
Include all light "jA" tj: BVs = BV
AV - AV"c Analog equivalent to Apex
It will be output as a log value. Said TTL photometry means 378
The output analog signal is the signal switching port of the input control section 360.
A digital signal is provided to an A-D converter 382 through a path 380.
The data is converted to digital data and then input into the system.
Ru. Note that the signal switching circuit 380 is connected to the TTL photometer.
Other auxiliary light means other than stage 378, i.e., reflected light type photometer 35
0, from the incident light photometer 354 and strobe device 384
In converting analog data to digital values,
Provided to share the A-D converter 382
It is. A simple block diagram of the strobe device 384 is shown in FIG.
However, this strobe device 384 is attached to the camera device body.
When inserted into the strobe device 384, the data contact 1
42, control contact 140.7 control contact 138 each
This is the date provided on the accessory shoe 50 of Theory Day 4.
that of the data terminal 56, control terminal 54, and synchro contact 52;
contact each. In this state, - the strobe device 384
Turn on the power switch J32 (Fig. 6) to set the aperture.
Data regarding the aperture value set using the dial 108
~ri VSA connects data terminal 56 from data contact 142.
is input through the signal switching circuit 38 of the input control section 360.
given to 0. In this state, use the strobe device 384 to
If charging for strobe light emission is not completed, charging is complete.
There is no input of signal C8A indicating the data VS.
A is a state where the input is regulated by the signal switching circuit 380 section.
becomes. When charging of the strobe device 384 is completed, the control
From the terminal 54 to the data contact 140 on the strobe device 384 side
Through. Then, current can flow into the charging completion detection circuit 386.
. That is, from the strobe device 384 to the data contact point 1401
The signal C8A indicating charging completion through the control terminal 54 is a negative current.
This signal C8A is input in the form of a signal, and this signal C8A is input to the input control section 36.
It will be detected by the current detector 386 installed at 0.
Ru. This current detector 386 detects a current flowing from the control terminal 54 to the outside.
When the leakage occurs, a control signal is given to the signal switching circuit 380.
In place of the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378,
The analog signal input from the terminal 56 is converted to an A-D converter.
382 and detecting the magnitude of the current,
It also has a function to determine the control signal included in the current amount.
It is. Therefore, from the strobe device 384, charging is completed.
When the signal C8A indicating completion is input, the signal switching circuit
380 is the aperture value input as an analog value from terminal 54.
related data to the VSAi A-D converter 382.
Therefore, the data VSA regarding the aperture value is digital.
It will be converted into file data and then taken into the system.
. On the other hand, the current detector 386 detects the C8A signal.
Then, the charging completion signal C is sent to set the system to strobe photography mode.
At the same time as outputting GUP, depending on the changeover switch 146
Has a function to switch the amount of current of the charging completion signal into two stages.
The charge completion detection circuit 346 selects two levels of current.
According to the current amount of the C8A signal that is selectively given.
, the current detector 386 is fully automatic in this strobe photography mode.
Determine whether it is related to automatic or semi-automatic, and determine whether it is related to fully automatic.
outputs a fully automatic signal FAT. Therefore
, a charge completion signal C which is the output of the current detector 38-6.
The thread is adjusted according to the GUP input and the presence or absence of the fully automatic signal FAT.
This is a fully automatic or semi-automatic strobe shooting mode.
Ru. Note that the light emitting power of the strobe device 384 for strobe photography is
The rigger is a synchro switch installed on the mechanism part 358 side.
388, but the strobe device 384 is
The switch 388 is connected to the switch 388 through the contact 138.52.
connected to. Note that this synchro switch 388 is
As is well known, the two-act running focal play
In the case of a front shutter, it is detected that the front curtain has finished running.
It is turned on by member 390. This synchro switch 388 is the camera//
In order to configure the stem, the accessory shoe of the body 4 is
-50, as well as other strobe devices.
Synchronize with common strobe or flash devices
For this purpose, it is also connected to the X contact 64.
It is. The simple block diagram of the reflected light photometer 350 is shown in Figure 25.
As shown in the figure, this photometer 350 is connected to the camera device body 4.
When attached to the photometer 350, contacts 148 and 146
Each is provided on the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4.
contact with the data terminal 56 and control terminal 54, respectively.
. At this time, the contact 146 from the control terminal 54 to the photometer 350 side
Current can flow into. That is, the contact point from the photometer 350
146, an external photometer is attached through the control terminal 54.
The signal OLM indicating that the
The signal OLM is detected by the current detector 3 provided in the input control section 360.
86. Therefore, this current test
A control signal is applied from the output device 386 to the signal switching circuit 380.
Analyzes from 'l' T I, photometric means, 378
Input analog value from data terminal 56 instead of log signal
The data OB regarding the measured photometric amount is input to the A-D converter 382, and the data OB
is converted into digital data and then introduced into the system.
This will result in In addition, this photometric amount data 0'Bl;j shooting
It is not obtained by photometry through a lens device.
Therefore, various corrections are unnecessary, and the obtained signal is
This corresponds to the subject brightness BV as it is. -Mansai
A current detector 386 determines the OLM signal from its current amount.
Separately, the control signal OL is used to put the system into external photometry mode.
Output M. Depending on the input of the control signal OL81,
The system then performs various operations based on external photometric data. The simple block diagram of the incident light photometer 354 is shown in Figure 26.
As shown in the figure, the coupler 156 of this photometer 350 (the
7) is attached to the camera device body 4, the coupler 1
Each of the 56 contacts 168, 166, 170
Data terminal 5 provided on the accessory unit 50 of the unit 4
6. Connect to each of the control terminal 54 and the AEo terminal 58.
touch At this time, the connection from the control terminal 54 to the photometer 354 side is
Current is allowed to flow into point 166. That is, from the photometer 354 through the contact 166 and the control terminal 54.
When the signal OLM indicating that an external photometer is attached becomes a negative voltage.
This signal OLM is input in the form of a current signal, and this signal OLM is input to the input control section 3.
It is detected by the current detector 386 provided at 60.
Become. Therefore, from this current detector 386, the signal switching
A control signal is given to the circuit 380, and the TTL photometry means 3'
The analog signal from data terminal 56 is replaced by the analog signal from 78.
Data OB regarding the photometric amount input as analog value is A-
It becomes possible to input to the D converter 382. Note that this incident light type photometer 354 has a normally closed AE lock.
It is equipped with a switch 392 and a coupler 156 on the body.
4 accessories - When attached to the shoe 50, the coupler
Contact point 170 of 156, A of accessory shoe 50
The Ag lock switch 3 is connected through the E lock terminal 58.
92 is included in this mechanism part 358.
In order to short-circuit the lock switch 5AELK, this camera
The position is considered to be the AE Rono-ri state. This AE lock sui
The switch 392 is a photometer for making the photometer 354 perform photometry.
It is linked to button 174, and when you operate that button
Due to the opening, photometry is started on the photometer 354 side.
Then, the AE lock state of the camera device is released. At this time, the contact 168 is sent from the photometer 354 to indicate the amount of photometry.
The data OB to be output is output as an analog value. This data OB is sent from the data terminal 56 to the signal switching circuit.
input to an A-D converter 382 through a path 380;
It is converted into digital data and then taken into the system.
Become. Note that this photometry amount data OB depends on photometry using the reflected light method.
The subject brightness information BV is not the same as the one obtained by
The data regarding the different illuminances are 1. apex
The handling in the calculation formula is exactly the same as the subject brightness information BV.
In some cases, the output analog value of the photometer 354 must be adjusted accordingly.
By doing so, the obtained photometric amount data OB can be directly applied.
It can be made to correspond to the subject brightness f3V. On the other hand,
A current detector 386 determines the OLM signal from its current amount.
control signal OLM to place the system in external photometry mode.
Output. The system is controlled by the input of the control signal OLM.
Based on external photometry data.
This is exactly the same as when using an optical photometer. In other words, this camera system uses reflected light metering.
Either a meter or incident light photometer can be used as an external photometer adapter.
Even when using the
Otherwise, the system performs exactly the same operation. As is clear from the above explanation (the output of the A-D converter 382
The force digital signal is the output signal from current detector 386.
Determine the meaning by CGUP, FAT, OLM
The system also depends on the output of the current detector 386.
Change its behavior to the desired mode of behavior. In addition, from now on
In the explanation, the output digital signal of the A-D converter 382 is
The numbers will be collectively referred to as DD. Note that this input control section 360 is connected to the mechanism section 358.
Detects and imports various set conditions and operating conditions
and has the same switch configuration as shown in Figure 21.
5AELK, winding completion detection switch 5WNUP
, through the AE charge detection switch 5AECG, the AE
AELK signal for locking, winding completion detection switch
WNUP, AE lever 94 is in AE charge state
The A'ECG signal, etc. indicating the situation is being taken in. By the way, the AE lock switch 5AELK is the body
4 The switch is attached to the selector lever 22 provided on the top surface.
5WNUP is operated by the winding lever 14.
In this mechanism, the switch CG is connected to the AE lever 94.
It is operated in conjunction with each moving mechanism. As described above, the data input to the input control unit 360 is
Data and condition setting signals are time aligned accordingly.
central control unit 362 through input bus line 370 on
will be forwarded to. The central control section 362 controls various settings from the mechanism section 358.
Data and setting conditions are imported. This central control unit
362 to FIG. 13 through timing line 394.
It outputs a 7-bit timing pulse as shown, and this timing pulse
The film sensitivity Sv is adjusted in synchronization with the timing pulse and
data sv', the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device A V
Data related to o AVo (gray code, shooting record)
Indicates that the aperture of the lens device is set on the lens device side.
signal MNAL, the photographic lens device is narrowed down.
A signal indicating 5PDW, the set aperture value AV or
Data regarding the data speed TV, this data is used as the aperture value AV.
It is related to Signal indicating ASLC, photographing lens
A signal AMAX indicating what the minimum aperture value of the device is
etc. are incorporated. Regarding the various data, setting conditions, etc. signals mentioned above,
, will be imported through the configurations in Figures 12 to 19.
, the details of which have already been described. In this central control section 362, calculation control of seeds is carried out.
control of each exposure control mechanism of the camera mechanism section 358.
Outputs data signals for control and display.
is provided to the output control section 364 through the bus line 374.
. This output control unit 364 starts operation 1 of the camera device.
shutter release control, lens device Fj! ll value
Aperture control that controls the aperture to a set or calculated aperture,
Shutter tile that controls the shutter speed to a set or calculated speed
Each control function includes display control and display control to display the necessary information.
358, and a cut-out
shutter release means 396, aperture control means 398,
data speed control means 400, digital moxibustion indicating means 402, point
It outputs a control signal to the display means 404. −
10, this output control section 364 is connected to various parts of the mechanical section 358.
Detects the setting conditions and operating status of the
The same switch as shown in Figure 2-1 is included.
Self-timer set switch 5S with switch configuration
ELF, shutter release switch SW2, 22nd
Front curtain running start with switch configuration similar to that shown in the figure
Self-timer is set through switch 5CTST.
5ELF signal indicating that the shutter release is
Shutter release that initiates subsequent camera operations
SR signal, 2 curtain running type, focal plane shutter
A CTST signal indicating that the leading curtain of the motor has moved is applied.
. Furthermore, the output control section 364 has the configuration shown in FIG.
Then, the AE lever 94 moved from the AE charge position.
Capturing FPC signals obtained by converting distance into pulses is also possible.
Is going. Note that the switch 5SBLP is provided on the top surface of the body 4.
The shutter release switch is placed on the selector lever 22.
Switch SW2 is shutter release potano 18, front
The switch 5CTST is connected to the front curtain running start detection member 406.
Each is linked. The mechanism part 358 of this camera device is a mechanical
Electric control mechanism using control mechanism and electromagnetic solenoid
applied in conjunction with the shutter release means.
396, i-control means 398, shutter speed control child stage
400 is a part related to electrical control. The shutter release means 396 is a mechanical part of the camera device.
Trigger to start running sequence
It uses an extremely small electromagnetic solenoid to
perform the required operation. In addition, this shutter release hand
The operation of stage 396 is based on the input input to input control section 360.
Yatsuta release signal SEL, self timer cent
Signal 5ELF and input to this output control section 364
It is closely related to the winding completion signal WNUP, etc.
Ru. Traveling depends on the operation of the shutter release means 396.
Among the mechanical sequences initiated are the AE lever 94
This also includes the operation of moving the vehicle from the charging position. This A
As mentioned before, the E lever 94 moves from the char 2 position.
While traveling toward the discharge position, keep the vehicle at a moderately low
The aperture value of the lens device 2 is preset by being ramped.
This clamp has the function of
What determines the AE charge position of the AE lever 94?
This is the distance traveled by these people. That is, from the AE charge position of this AE lever 94,
As is clear from the explanation in Figure 2, the distance traveled is determined by the lens device.
This corresponds to the preset value of the number of control aperture stages in No. 2.
Therefore, while detecting the traveling distance of the AH lever 940,
When the output amount reaches a value corresponding to the number of control aperture stages, the AE
Clamp the lever 94 to maintain the travel amount at that time.
It is possible to preset the aperture on the lens device 2.
Ru. During this operation, corresponding to the travel distance of the AE lever 94,
The EPC signal is input to the output control section. child
The FPC signal corresponds to the traveling distance of the AE1/bar 94.
Therefore, this FPC signal can be countered.
By counting using a counter, etc., the lever 9 can be easily
You can know the distance traveled by 4. The aperture control means 398 controls the AE...-94 AE
The odometer from the charging position is transmitted from the central control unit 362.
When the amount corresponds to 7' to the given number of aperture control stages,
Operate the mechanism for clamping the A-E lever 94.
This also uses a small electromagnetic solenoid to
perform the following actions. Note 1. Depends on the operation of the shutter release means 396.
The mechanical sequence in which the vehicle starts running is as follows:
In addition to running the -94 from the charging position, the mirror
- is raised, and the preset aperture of the photographic lens device 2 is adjusted.
Narrowing down, 2-act running type/focal plane/Nyatsu
This also includes operations such as starting the leading curtain of the motor. Generally used for two-act running type, focal plane, and Nyatsuta.
The shutter speed is controlled from the time when the front curtain starts traveling.
It is held based on the time system until the curtain starts running.
However, this camera device is no exception. That is, the shutter
After the leading curtain starts running, while regulating the running of the trailing curtain.
The time is measured and the time given from the central control unit 362 is
Runs the second curtain after a time corresponding to the shutter speed
Attempt to obtain the required shutter speed by starting
It is something that Of course, with this camera device, time
Timing relies on electrical means. When the front curtain of the shutter starts running, the mechanism part 35
8 outputs a signal CTST indicating this fact. this
The output control unit 364 that receives the CTST signal
Based on the shutter speed data given from the control section 362
, the time is measured and the time corresponding to the shutter speed elapses.
After passing the /Yasota rear curtain, it is provided to start running.
The shutter speed control means 400 is
This also uses a small electromagnetic solenoid to perform the required operation.
It is structured in many ways. As mentioned above, the shutter release means 396
, the throttle control means 398.7 and the speed control means 400.
In this camera system, the electrical control system is exposed.
It is a part directly involved in control and has an extremely important position.
It occupies the Note that even during the operation of such electrical control means, the camera device
Its mechanical sequence continues to operate.
, the rear shutter curtain has finished running (quick retrieval of the rear mirror).
To release the aperture drive of the lens and lens device, etc.
A mechanical control mechanism is involved. Other functions of this output control section 346 include
There is a display function that shows the information necessary for shooting. 1st
The camera device shown in the figure contains data necessary for photographing in the finder 13.
As mentioned earlier, it is equipped with a display to display data.
As a matter of fact, this data display is the mechanical part 35 of the system.
8 and is indicated by 402. This de
The data display 402 receives all the information from the output control section 364.
information about the data, i.e. the decoded signal for display.
At the same time, the central control section 362 sends a timing signal.
Timing for dynamic display drive through i/394
Uke is picking up the nog signal. This dynamic display drive
is a well-known display method.
Common display information that changes over time for all display units
In addition to giving the information, the display is
By selecting and driving the unit, the desired display unit can be selected.
It is a display method that displays desired data on a circuit.
Features include simplified configuration and reduced power consumption.
It is widely used because it has certain characteristics. This dynamic table
Display drives are particularly space-constrained, such as camera equipment.
This is especially advantageous when a large-capacity power source cannot be incorporated.
This LED is equipped with a
Noh is also important. That is, one is for battery check.
There is sufficient battery power remaining.
The other function is to use a self-timer.
The self-timer may be activated by flashing when taking pictures.
This is a function that indicates that it is in operation. This I, BD clan
The above output for step 2? 1ill rji part: 36
A control signal is given from +. As mentioned above, the mechanism portion 358 is the input control section 3.
60, central control section 362, output control section 364 and photometry data
data, external input data, setting data, setting conditions, judgment status
input conditions such as shutter release, aperture, shutter speed, etc.
Control and display of temperature, etc. are closely linked. Next, the motor drive device whose details are shown in Fig. 8.
However, this motor drive device is shown at 40 in Figure 28.
It is represented by 5. This motor drive device 405
from the contact 210 of the body 4 through the contact 216 of the body 4.
It is connected to S~'NUP. Said switch 5WN
UP is when the film has finished winding in the camera device.
After that, the shutter release is performed, and after
As mentioned above, the curtain remains on until the curtain finishes running.
As mentioned above, therefore, the front
(during the period mentioned above) it is possible to obtain the WNUJ signal at level 1.
I can do it. The motor drive device is connected to the inverter.
receive the WNUP signal before passing through the
This WNUP signal is controlled by the camera operating cycle.
During a period other than the above-mentioned period, that is, when the rear shutter curtain is
From the end of running until the film winding is completed
It is a high level, and the motor/drive device
j05 is for film winding based on this WNUP signal.
0 that is driving the motor of
Depending on the device, after the shutter release, the shutter rear curtain
Immediately after finishing running, the film starts winding operation.
, when the film winding is completed, the film winding operation starts.
There is no risk of malfunction, and it can be quickly
Film winding operation is possible. This motor drive device 405 is also shown in FIG.
However, the shutter and release of the camera device cannot be performed remotely.
It is equipped with a shutter release device 220 that can
, this shutter release device 220 is particularly suitable for motor drives.
It has an electric circuit connection with the live device 405.
There isn't. This shutter release device B220 is equipped with
operation button 22 sid mechanism, t13 s s system
Shutter release switch sW2 and contacts 212.21
switch R8W2 which is connected in parallel in circuit via 8 and
It is linked and is functionally installed on the top of Hageddy 4.
, 7 is exactly the same as the release button 18. Now, the input control section 36o1 central control section 362, output
The control unit 364/'i shares various functions as described above.
However, its operation is dependent on bus line 366.
It forms a rational system together with the functional part 358.
has been completed. The main operation of this system is set by the photographer.
External conditions (photometric data, etc.)
) based on the control data necessary for exposure control.
and display the necessary ones from the control data.
based on the control data.
This camera device controls exposure.
An overview of operation in various modes is provided. Now, the digital signal is input to the A-D converter 382 of the input control section 360.
The data DD converted and output is measured using open photometry.
Light data BVo Photometric data Bv based on 1 aperture photometry
s, aperture 9 control data VIA from the strobe device 384,
External photometry data from external photometry adapter 3501.354
This corresponds to one of the three OBs, but these
is the charge completion signal CG which is the output of the current detector 386.
UP, external light metering mode control signal OLM, aperture control
The aperture is the output of the switch 286 that is linked to the bar 64.
It is classified according to signals such as 5 PDW and corresponds to each other.
The following processing will be performed. Now, on the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device body 4.
Strobe device 384 and external photometry adapter 350.354
If you think about it when 9 is not installed, at this time
, the camera device has five shooting modes (pulp shooting
) can be taken. These five modes are the modes provided on the top surface of the body 4.
A diaphragm provided on the front side of the de selector 38 and the body 4
The state of the closing lever '64, as well as the aperture setting of the lens device 2.
Depending on the condition of the fixed ring, aperture priority AE shooting mode,
Shutter priority AE shooting mode, open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting
Shadow mode, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, aperture
Selecting each mode of the integrated metering aperture priority AE shooting mode
Regarding the things that can be done (in Section 8, as shown in Figure 11)
However, when performing data arithmetic processing, manual open metering is
Exposure adjustment shooting mode: Aperture priority or shutter priority
Since it is the same as the E shooting mode, the calculation routine required is
Chi/ is roughly divided into four types. Now, set the aperture level on the mode selector 38 or on the aperture focus side.
When the bar 64 is on the open side, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2
are set at the positions where mark 12 is selected.
At this time, the / stem is in aperture priority AE shooting mode. At this time
, a photometric amount BV related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry. As mentioned before, is the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2. It includes AVo and bending error AVc, and is based on the actual brightness of the subject.
For the degree data BV, BVo=BV-Avo-AVc
As shown in the previous equation (3), there is a relationship such as
. On the other hand, on the mechanism part 358 side,
Data SV, data regarding the open aperture value of lens device 2
AVo, the photographer's desired aperture value AV, etc. are set.
Also, the data AVc regarding the bending error AVc is
It is derived from the open aperture value data AVo. The derivation of this bending error AVc will be explained in detail later, but especially the
Regardless of calculation, multiple bending error data set in advance can be used.
From among the data, the maximum aperture value AV of the photographic lens device 2 used.
It depends on the structure that selects and derives the corresponding one.
Ru. Before starting calculations for exposure control, this camera
- In the system, the aperture value set by dial 34
AV is greater than or equal to the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used
and the maximum aperture value is less than or equal to AMAX.
. If the result of such comparison operation is set using dial 34,
The aperture value AV obtained was smaller than the open aperture value AVo.
In this case, the set aperture value AV and the open aperture value A V o are set by 1.
Replaced, conversely, the aperture value AV set with the dial 34 is
, if the maximum aperture value is larger than AMAX, the set aperture value
The operation to replace the maximum aperture value AMAX as the value AV is performed.
As mentioned before, this changes the aperture value A V setting.
The setting is done on the dial 34 side, not on the zoom device 2 side.
The value can sometimes be controlled by the photographing device 2 used.
This is because there may be cases where the range is exceeded, and the
In this case, the upper or lower limit aperture value of the photographic lens device 2
o or AMAX can be used as aperture value AV for control
It is for this purpose. Note that the TTL photometry means 3 provided in the mechanism portion 358
78 to the input control section 36 through the A-D converter 382.
The photometric data BVO captured in 0 is further sent to the central control unit 3.
62 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing. First, the photometric data BVo imported as described above
Film sensitivity data Sv is added to . That is, BVo+5V=BY+sV −AVo −AVc −−
-'(8) is performed, but this formula
From the above equation (2), BVo +SV = EV -AVo -AVc ・
--(This corresponds to 9J. Next, the above calculation result
In addition, the open aperture value data AVo and the bending error of the zoom device 2
Add difference data AVc. That is, BVo 1SV + AVo + AVc = EV
...-QO) is performed in one operation,
Through the above calculations, the film to be used is determined based on the photometric data.
An appropriate exposure amount Ev will be calculated. Note that this operation is a digital operation as mentioned above.
(8) 1. j9) , (10
), the calculation register automatically changes depending on the calculation of the expression.
, the result of this operation will be
result. Next, from the exposure amount EV obtained as described above, the diamond
Performs subtraction of the aperture value data AV set according to rule 34.
However, as is clear from equation (I), the result is EV - AV = TV - (+1)', and proper exposure is obtained for the set aperture value AV.
It is possible to find the required shutter speed TV. Note that the Nyatsuta speed TV obtained in this way is
[+CII exposure amount EV] for the specified aperture value AV
Although this is control data to satisfy
The result is the shutter speed given to A4 by the camera device.
In such cases, where there is a risk of exceeding the limits of
It is necessary to inform the photographer of this fact to prevent erroneous operation.
. Therefore, in this camera system, calculation results are
The shutter speed TV set is assembled into the body 4 of the camera device.
The maximum speed of the built-in shutter mechanism is TMAX or higher.
below and the minimum speed [TMIN or higher]
Perform a comparison operation. If such a comparison operation results in a waterlogged image,
Shutter speed TV is set to maximum shutter speed '1'' MAX or
If the minimum speed TMIN is exceeded, the
If the limit value TMAX or TMIN is calculated,
Shutter speed TV for control instead of shutter speed TV
However, at the same time, there is an action to notify the photographer of this fact.
Of course it will be done. Next, from the aperture value data AV for control,
The open aperture value data AVo of position 2 is subtracted, and AV-AVo2AVs...
・・・・・・・-(12) Aperture stage for aperture control
The number AVs is calculated. Please note that this camera system
The number of aperture stages A V s is controlled for aperture control.
The control mechanism of the photographing lens device 2 shown in FIG.
This is because a control mechanism is adopted. Through the calculation operations described above, the set aperture value A
Shutter speed TV and control aperture stage number AVs based on V are derived.
It will be done. The result of the above calculation can be viewed in the viewfinder 13 by the photographer.
The display at this time is shown in Figure 1O (a
Aperture set with dial 34 as shown in (It) of )
Displays the value and the shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation.
Adopt the following format. By the way, the format of this display has already been explained.
As explained in . Based on the above calculation result, the camera device
The lens device 2 performs exposure control after
Since the aperture setting ring 8 has selected mark 22, the button
Preset control of the number of aperture stages AVs is performed from the D4 side.
be called. Note that the aperture setting/g 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
is not selected, the lens device 2 from the body 4 side.
It is impossible to preset the number of aperture stages AVs.
, during actual exposure control, the lens device 2 uses the aperture setting link.
The aperture is narrowed down to the preset aperture position by
This will result in Therefore, this camera system model
For various situations, you can use the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
The aperture value displayed in the finder 13, that is, the body
The aperture value set by the dial 34 on the 4th side (based on
, the aperture value is determined by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.
By presetting, the calculated shutter speed and
Exposure can be controlled using a preset aperture value. Na
Oh, in such a wide open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
10 (a) - (Jl) in the finder 13
As shown in the figure, the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the calculation
In addition to the shutter speed set, an M” character is displayed and the shooting lens
It is necessary to manually set the aperture value of lens device 2 according to the display.
I have mentioned before that the photographer is made aware of the fact that
As explained. Note that this manual exposure adjustment shooting mode
First, the aperture value is set using the dial 34.
Therefore, it can be said that it has an aperture-first character.
Good morning. Particularly interesting is this manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
mode, and set the preset or aperture using lens device 2.
Set according to the edge value set and dial 34.
It is important to be careful to always keep the aperture value at the same value.
, this camera device performs aperture-priority AE shooting operation.
Ru. The mode selector 38 is now set to the speed priority side.
When the lever 64 is set to the open side, the aperture setting of the zoom device 2 is set.
8 is set at the position where mark 12 is selected.
When the system is set to the glossy speed-priority AE shooting mode.
It becomes C. At this time, the photometric amount related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry
As mentioned before, BVo is the maximum aperture value A of the lens device 2.
Since it includes Vo and bending error A V c, the actual brightness of the subject
For the degree data BV, BVo=BV-AVo-AVc
1d, as mentioned before. - In the mechanism section 358, data regarding film sensitivity is provided.
Data A regarding the open aperture value of the data Sv and lens device 2
V.O. The shutter speed TV etc. desired by the photographer are set.
In addition, the data AVc regarding the bending error AVc is also
Open aperture 91 [For points derived from data AVo]
is the same as for aperture priority. Now, the TTL photometry means 37 provided in the mechanism part 358
8 to the input control unit 360 through the A, -D converter 382
The photometric data BVo taken in is further sent to the central control unit 36.
2 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing. First, the photometric data BVo imported as described above is
Add film sensitivity data 5Vli. That is, BTo-1-8V2BV+5V-AVo-AVcna
This formula is the same as the above (2).
From the formula, BvO + 5v = Ev - AvO - AVC equivalent
Regarding the mode, one thing is the same as in the case of aperture priority.
. Next, the maximum aperture value of lens device 2 is added to the queen calculation result.
data AVo and bending error data AVck are added. j2
p Chi BVo -) - SV +AVo 1AVc=EV
The following calculations are performed, but through the above calculations,
Appropriate exposure amount E for the film used based on photometric data
The calculation of v will be performed. Note that this operation is a digital operation as mentioned earlier.
However, depending on the above series of operations, the operation register is
If the star overflows, this arithmetic register
The maximum capacity is the result of the calculation. Next, from the exposure amount EV obtained as described above, the diamond
Decrease of shutter speed data TV set by rule 34.
As is clear from equation (1), the result is EV-TV=A■ --... (13)
Proper exposure for the set shutter speed TV
You can find the aperture value and AV required to obtain the desired output. Note that the aperture value A~・' obtained in this way is
Exposure 1EV calculated for shutter speed TV
t- control data to satisfy, but sometimes this performance
The limit of the aperture value that can be controlled by Cal/Z device 2A.
There is a risk that the world will be crossed, and in such cases,
It is necessary to notify the photographer to prevent erroneous operation. For that reason
In this camera system, the calculated result is
The aperture values A and V are the maximum aperture values that can be controlled by the lens device 2.
Is it below AMAX and above the minimum aperture value AVo?
Comparison operation is performed to determine whether or not. If the result of such a comparison operation is
The aperture value AV obtained as a result of the calculation is the maximum aperture value AMAX.
or if it exceeds the limit of the minimum aperture value AVo, that limit
Aperture value A obtained as a result of value AMAX or AVoi calculation
Instead of V, the aperture value AV is used for control, but at the same time
Of course, actions are taken to notify the shadow person of this fact.
It is. Next, from the aperture value data AV for control,
Subtraction of open aperture value data AVo of position 2 AV - AV o
= AY s is performed and the aperture stage is used for aperture control.
The number AVs is calculated. Please note that this camera system
The number of aperture stages AVs control is performed for aperture control.
The control mechanism of the photographing/zipping device 2 shown in Fig. 2 controls the number of stages.
I mentioned earlier that this is because the mechanism is adopted.
It is a common knowledge. Through the calculation operations described above, the set shutter
Based on the data speed TV, the number of control aperture stages AVs is derived.
). In addition, the photographer can view the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13.
You can confirm this, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (al.
The shutter set with the dial 34 as shown in (1) of
This function also displays the aperture value obtained as a result of calculation with speed.
The format is as follows. The form of this display has already been explained.
As I explained. Based on the above calculation result, the camera device
The lens device 2 performs exposure control after
Since the aperture setting ring has selected mark 22, the button
Preset control of the number of aperture stages AVs is performed from the D4 side.
be called. Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
Since this is selected, the number of aperture stages AVs from the body 4 side
Preset control is performed. Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
is not selected, preset the number of aperture steps AVs of the lens device 2 from the turtle on the body 4 side.
When actually controlling exposure, it is impossible to
2 is the aperture pre-centered by the aperture setting ring 8.
6 Therefore, this camera
In this case, the system uses open metering and manual exposure adjustment.
The camera is in shooting mode and is displayed in the viewfinder 13.
Based on the aperture value, that is, the aperture value derived as a result of calculation, the record is
The aperture value is preset by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.
The set shutter speed and rate can be adjusted by performing
Exposure can be controlled using the aperture value preset in lens device 2.
It is Noh. In addition, in this 4-aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode,
10(a)-(1) in the finder 13.
As shown in the figure, the "M" character is displayed, and the photographing lens device 2
It is necessary to manually set the aperture value according to the display.
I explained earlier that the photographer is made aware of the
That's right. Note that this manual exposure adjustment shooting mode is
The shutter speed is set by the dial 34.
From a certain point, it has the characteristic of prioritizing shutter speed.
I can say that. Next, the mode selector 38 sets the aperture priority side.
The lever 64 is on the aperture side; the aperture setting link of the lens device 2
8 to preset a specific aperture value.
When this is set, / stem is aperture priority AH
The camera enters shooting mode. At this time, the subject obtained as a result of photometry
As mentioned before, the photometric quantity BVs related to brightness is determined by the lens
The aperture value AV of device 2 and the bending error AVc' are used as elements.
However, in this system, the previous
Since there is no means to capture the aperture value AV, bending errors may occur.
It is impossible to obtain the bending error AVc'.
Therefore, the photometric amount BVs is ignored. Therefore, the photometric amount BVs is
BVs = BV - AV for the subject brightness data BV
As shown in the previous equation (5), there is a relationship such as
〇On the other hand, on the mechanism part 358 side,
Data Sv is set. TTL photometry means 378 provided in the mechanism portion 358
from the input controller 3'60 through the A-D converter 382.
The captured aperture metering gate BVs is further centrally controlled.
It is introduced into the section 362 and subjected to the following arithmetic processing. First, the photometric data BVs imported as described above is
Add film sensitivity data SV. That is, BVs + SV = BV - AV + 8V ・
−・・−(14) is performed, but this
From the above +11, f2) formula, the formula is BVs + SV = EV - AV = TV -
−・−−−Q5), which is equivalent to
Determine the shutter speed TV necessary to obtain the appropriate exposure Ev.
I can put it out. Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is
151 formula for the aperture value AV of the lens device 2
This is the control data to satisfy the exposure amount EV, but when
The calculation result of and is given to the body 4 of the camera device.
There is a risk of exceeding the specified shutter speed limit.
In such cases, notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation.
It is necessary to Therefore, this camera system
The Nyanota speed TV calculated as a result of the calculation is displayed on the button of the camera device.
Maximum Nyanota speed of the Nyanota mechanism built into D4
TMAX or less, and minimum shutter speed TMIN or less
Perform a comparison operation to determine whether it is above. If such a comparison operation
As a result, the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of the calculation is the maximum shutter speed.
Limits of shutter speed TMAX and minimum shutter speed TMIN'
If the limit is exceeded, the limit value TMAX or TMIN
is controlled in place of the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of calculation.
The shutter speed of the TV is set for the purpose of
Of course, actions are taken to notify the event. By the way, in that shooting mode, dial 34
Therefore, the set aperture value is completely ignored. As mentioned above, through the calculation operations described above,
The shutter speed is determined based on the aperture value of the lens device 2.
It happens. In addition, the photographer can view the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13.
You can confirm this, but the display at this time is Figure 10 ta+
The format of this display shall be as shown in (IVI).
As already explained.゛Based on the above calculation results, ``the camera device is
The shutter is used to control the exposure after the camera is
The shutter speed is controlled by the TV on the 4 side, and the aperture of the lens device 2 is
The aperture position is set manually while the aperture is still in the aperture state.
It will be retained. Next, the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side.
When the aperture lever 64 is on the aperture side, the aperture of the lens device 2
The setting ring 8 presets a specific aperture value.
When set to each position, the 7 stems are narrowed down.
The camera enters photometry manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. At this time, - photometric
The photometric amount BVs related to the subject brightness obtained as a result is as described above.
As mentioned above, the aperture value AV and bending of lens device 2
In this system, the previous
Since it does not have a means to capture the recorded aperture value AV, bending errors can be avoided.
Ignoring it. The photometric amount BVs is based on the actual subject.
For brightness data BV, BVs = BV - AV.
As mentioned before, they are related. On the other hand, the mechanism
On the minute 358 side, data Sv regarding film sensitivity and shooting
The shutter speed TV and the like desired by the person in the shadow are set. T'l'L photometry means 37 provided in the front mechanism part 358
8 to the input control section 360 through the A-D converter 382.
The imported aperture photometry data BVs is further centrally controlled.
It is introduced into the section 362 and subjected to the following arithmetic processing. First, the photometric data BVs imported as described above is
Add film sensitivity data S ■ 0 immediately? ), BVs
+SV = BY -AV +SV fx
This formula is similar to what I mentioned before.
s + SV = EV - AV = TVK equivalent t Lumo
(D) Necessary to obtain proper exposure EV through such calculation.
It is possible to derive the shutter speed TV. Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is
Exposure amount for the aperture value AV of the lens device 2
This is the calculation data to satisfy Ev, but this calculation data
The data does not necessarily depend on the dial 34 of the camera device body 4.
Shutter speed for control set by - Same as TV'
There isn't. Therefore, if the photographer wants to achieve proper exposure Ev,
Operate the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 to set the calculated data.
Adjust the aperture so that the TV is equal to the setting data TV'.
Or change the data of Nyanota Speed TV' to set it.
Shut down to make it equal to the calculated data TV.
It is necessary to adjust the data speed. In this camera system, the result of the calculation is −y
1 for '-ta'rVK+, -(K2-Kl) (7) Allowed
7 set by the dial 34 by setting the error range.
Manual operation such that Yatsuta speed TV' falls within the above tolerance range.
Instruct the photographer to operate through the display in the viewfinder 13
It has a similar structure. The calculation operation will be explained below, but first the result of the calculation will be explained.
Add a constant of 1 to the obtained shutter speed data TV.
Calculate. The data TV0Kt obtained as a result of this addition is
If the capacity of the calculation register is overflowed, this
The maximum capacity of the calculation register of is the calculation result. Next, the data TV+ obtained as described above is downloaded from 1.
Shutter speed data set by dial 34
' is subtracted, and if a carry is obtained as a result of the subtraction, it is set.
The shutter speed data TV' is not within the tolerance range.
This indicates that this camera system provides
to reduce the amount of aperture reduction of the lens device 2, that is, the aperture
Adjust the shutter speed to the open side, or adjust the shutter speed data to the open side.
Operates to give instructions to reduce configuration data
. Also, if there is no carry as a result of this subtraction, the previous
The result of subtraction TV + K 1- TV' is further changed to a constant 2
Subtract TV+ to 1-TV'- to 2=TV-(K2
-Kl) -TV'・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
...obtains the result αe. This subtraction results in a carry of
If the shutter speed is calculated, the set shutter speed data W' is
Tolerance of 10Kl, -(K2-Kl) for printer speed TV
Assuming that it is within the error range, inform the photographer of this fact.
However, Badani, who did not get a carry, made a similar move.
The specified speed TV' is not within the tolerance range.
This camera system allows the photographer to
to increase the aperture of the lens device 2, that is, to increase the aperture.
Adjust to the small diameter side or 7 yasota speed data TV'
Operates to give instructions such as increasing configuration data
. Through the calculation operations described above, the shutter
Photographic lens device 2 narrowed down for speed TV'
If the aperture is not appropriate or if the aperture is too tight,
Shutter speed TV set for aperture setting 2
The suitability of ' will be determined. The photographer can confirm the above judgment result in the viewfinder 13.
The display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (a゛).
(takes the format shown in Vl. Regarding the format of this display)
As already explained, when taking pictures based on such display,
The person in the shadow must use the TV and lens with the optimal shutter speed to obtain the correct exposure.
It is possible to adjust the combination of the narrowing down amount of the zoom device 2.
It is something. Note that in this mode, the camera device does not release its shutter.
The shutter speed set by the photographer using the dial 34
'The aperture of the lens device 2 is controlled on the body 4 side based on
is manually set by the photographer with the aperture still in the aperture state.
It will be held at the aperture position. Note that the display and shooting related to manual exposure adjustment shooting with aperture
As for the manual operation of the shadow person, I mentioned earlier.
Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted here. Stopping, the aperture priority AB shooting mentioned above. Shutter priority AE shooting
, wide-open metering, manual exposure adjustment shooting, aperture-priority AE shooting with narrow aperture
Shadow, aperture metering, manual exposure adjustment, and shooting modes are all
Measurement by TTL photometry means 378 provided in the mechanism part 358
It operates based on the amount of light, and as mentioned earlier,
, this camera system applies external photometry
things are possible. Next, the accessory shoe 5 of the camera device body 4
Reflected light photometer 35o, incident light photometer 354, etc.
Consider the case where an external metering adapter is attached.
At this time, the camera device has three shooting modes.
(excluding bulb photography). These three modes are controlled by a mode provided on the top surface of the body 4.
Aperture setting ring of lens device 2 and lens device 2
Depending on the state of the aperture tightening lever 641, the aperture priority AE
Shooting mode, Nyanota priority AE shooting mode, external metering hand
You can select each mode of dynamic exposure adjustment shooting mode.
. Each of the above modes will be explained below, but in particular,
Although it is qualitatively different from the case where TTL photometry means 378 is applied.
It's not. However, special attention must be paid at this time.
The important point is that the amount of photometry that can be obtained using an external photometry adapter is
is the total amount of photometry obtained through the TTL photometry means 378.
Because they have different properties, other special operations are required.
This is the key point. That is, the photometry measured by the external photometer 350.354
Even if the light measurement method is based on the reflected light method,
Even if it depends on the incident light method, it is equivalent to the subject brightness BV.
is given as data. Therefore, the amount of photometry used
The open aperture value AVo and bending error AV of the photographic lens device 2 for
Since it does not include elements related to c, etc., the subject brightness BY
No need for calculation process 〇When shooting using this external metering adapter, the mode
・The selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, and the aperture lever 64 is set to the aperture priority side.
On the open side, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is at mark 1.
When set to the position to select 2, the system
The mode is an external metering aperture and priority AE shooting mode. At this time
, the photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry is the subject brightness B.
Since it corresponds to V, the maximum aperture value AVo and the music
There is no need to add the error AVc. Other than this point, the subsequent calculation operations are based on aperture priority as described earlier.
This is exactly the same as AB shooting mode. Also, the table of calculation results
Regarding the display, in this case, in aperture priority AE shooting mode.
is exactly the same as shown in Figure 10 (al-(1))
It's a street. Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
If you have not selected lens device 2 from the body 4 side.
It is impossible to preset the number of aperture stages AVs.
Yes, during actual exposure control, the aperture is set on the lens device 2 side.
It is controlled to a value set by the aperture setting ring 8. This is set on the dial 34 of the body 4.
Manually set the same aperture value on the lens device 2.
This means that it is necessary to In this case, the photometry amount is measured through an external photometry adapter.
Therefore, whether the lens device 2 is wide open or narrowed down,
The same operation can be applied regardless of the state. follow
In this camera system, the lens device 2
If the aperture setting ring 8 on the side does not select Yeak 12,
regardless of whether the lens device 2 is open or stopped.
External light metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, fine
The aperture value displayed in the dial 13, that is, the diamond on the body 4 side.
Based on the aperture value set by the lens device 34,
The aperture value can be preset by the aperture setting ring 8 on the second side.
In other words, by setting the filter, the calculated shadow
data speed and preset or aperture setting
Exposure can be controlled by value. In addition, this external metering manual
Exposure adjustment In shooting mode, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment
In the viewfinder 13, exactly the same as in shooting mode.
Depending on the dial 34 as shown in Figure 10 (al-(1))
The aperture value set by
M” table indicating that it is necessary to set lens device 2 manually.
A demonstration will be made. Also, when shooting using this external metering adapter,
Mode selector 38 is set to shutter speed priority side.
When the lever 64 is in the open side, the aperture setting link of the lens device 2 is
mark 8 is set to the position where mark 12 is selected.
The system uses external metering/Yatsuta speed priority AE shooting when
mode. At this time, the photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry is
Since it directly corresponds to the subject brightness BV, the opening
There is no need to add the maximum aperture value AVo and the bending error AVc.
stomach. Other than this point, the subsequent calculation operations are performed using the shutter described earlier.
This mode is exactly the same as the speed-priority AE shooting mode. Also played
Shutter speed priority AE shooting mode is also used for displaying calculation results.
Figure 10 fal-(1)
As shown. Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
is not selected, insert lens device 2 from the body 4 side.
It is possible to preset the number of aperture stages AVs.
Yes, and in the actual exposure control example, the aperture is the aperture on the lens device 2 side.
It is controlled to the value set by the setting ring 8. child
The first thing to do is to set the dial 34.
Lens the aperture υ value calculated based on shutter speed, photometric amount, etc.
This means that you need to manually set it on the zoom device 2 side.
. In this case, the photometric amount is measured through an external photometric adapter.
Therefore, whether the lens device 2 is wide open or stopped down.
The same operation can be applied regardless of the state. Therefore
, in this camera system, the lens device 2 side
If aperture setting ring 8 does not select mark 12
, regardless of whether the lens device 2 is open or closed.
External light metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, fine
The aperture value displayed in the screen 13, that is, the aperture value derived as a result of calculation.
Based on the aperture value, the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side
Preset or narrow down the aperture value depending on the
The set shutter speed and calculated aperture are
It is possible to control exposure using a fixed value. In addition, this external photometer
In dynamic exposure adjustment shooting mode, aperture metering and manual exposure adjustment are available.
The number is displayed in the viewfinder 13 in exactly the same way as in the section shooting mode.
As shown in Figure 1O (a)-(1), the value is set on dial 34.
The shutter speed set by
"M" table indicating that lens device 2 needs to be set in
A demonstration will be made. Note that this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode is also
・Selector 38 is set to aperture priority side
Depending on whether the data speed is set to the rear side, it has a tendency to give priority to the aperture.
Does the person with 7-yatsuta have a speed-first personality?
However, there are no essential differences. However,
However, mode selector 38 is set to aperture priority.
When using lens device 2, set the preset or aperture 9
The aperture that is set depending on the aperture value set and the dial 34.
As long as the value is always the same, this
The camera's device is to perform aperture-priority AE shooting operation. As mentioned above, you can use an external metering adapter to take pictures.
In fact, the calculation routine is T, except for one part.
This is the same as in the case of photographing using the TL photometry means. Each shooting mode using TTL metering and external metering as explained above.
Diagrams the relationships between the codes and their corresponding calculation routines.
FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram. The figure shows the mode select
condition of the lens unit 38 and the condition of the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2.
condition, the condition of the aperture lever 64, and the difference in photometry method, etc.
Regarding the shooting modes used by this camera system,
Four calculation routines are shown. Note that the lens device 2
With mark 12 selected with aperture setting ring 8, and
The aperture lever 64 controls the aperture position of the lens device 2.
When in the selected state, the handling warning log will be displayed as an incorrect operation.
The process of checking is already explained. On the other hand, this camera system is an auto-flash type strobe.
Regarding the point that it has the function of creating r in close cooperation with
As mentioned above, next is this strobe device 38.
Let's consider a case where 4 is applied to photography. this strike
The robot device 384 is an accessory for the camera device body 4.
When attached to the shoe 50, the electrical connection between the body 4 and the body 4 is established.
After that, the strobe device 384 is put into a state where it can emit light.
When charging for light emission is completed, this camera device
switches to flash photography mode. At this time, it is necessary to set each condition for the camera device and strobe device.
Regarding the fact that 16 shooting modes can be adopted depending on the situation.
As already explained, this strobe shooting mode
The calculations performed within the camera device are four routines.
It is broadly divided into These four calculation routines are based on the aperture of the strobe device 384.
Depending on the status of the setting dial 108 and selector switch 146.
It is selected as appropriate, especially when it is set on the camera device side.
Each control system has a mode that corresponds to the various factors that occur.
It determines and operates the system. In addition, the settings of each part of the strobe device 384 and camera device
What mode of operation will this system be in depending on the situation?
This was also shown in Part 114,
The above four calculation routines are fully automatic, automatic dimming, and automatic mode.
mode and semi-automatic / automatic dimming / automatic mode and fully automatic / full output mode
Light/manual mode and semi-automatic/full flash/manual mode
The operation of other modes also corresponds to each of the above four modes.
It is summarized in operations based on the calculation results by the calculation routine. Currently, in the case of fully automatic/automatic light control/automatic mode, strobe
Position 384 is the aperture setting dial 108 and film sensitivity setting
Aperture value and film set by dial 106
Depending on the sensitivity, n1 dimming is possible, but on the other hand,
, depending on the aperture setting dial 108 on the camera device side.
Analog signal data V corresponding to the aperture value set by
When SA is applied, charge completion signal C8A is also applied.
It will be done. This charging completion signal C8A is related to fully automatic/semi-automatic
It contains a control signal that depends on the amount of current used in the fully automatic model.
As mentioned earlier, this charging completion signal is the
Does C8A contain control signals for full and automatic modes?
The mote selector 38 on the camera device side is set to aperture priority.
This is the case. The aperture value data input to the camera device side is converted from A to D.
The controller 382 converts it into a digital value, and then sends it to the central controller 36.
2, but the data regarding this aperture value V
S A corresponds to the aperture value AV actually used for the secondary needle.
and is biased by a constant C3T2. this is
, import data VSA related to aperture value as an analog signal
Moreover, this analog value has many stages.
Therefore, there is a risk of incorrect input in the small voltage range.
It depends on giving an appropriate bias, and the digital
Conversion data DD is also actually used in □. Aperture value
The data is larger than the data AV by the amount corresponding to the bias.
This is because it is ta. Therefore, first VSA-C8T2=AV ・・・・・・・・・・・・
...Perform the calculation ul and input from the strobe side
Control data AV regarding the aperture that has been determined is derived. Like this
The aperture value AV obtained is the strobe device 384 side.
This corresponds to the aperture setting dial 108 of
This calculation result can be controlled by lens device 2.
The aperture limit may be exceeded, and in such cases
, it is necessary to inform the photographer of this fact to prevent erroneous operation.
Ru. For this reason, this camera system is equipped with a strobe.
The aperture value AV set on the lens device 384 side is controlled by the lens device 2.
The maximum aperture value that can be controlled is below AMAX, and the minimum aperture value is
A comparison operation is performed to determine whether the value is greater than or equal to the value AVo. If it's okay
As a result of the comparison calculation, the aperture value AV is equal to the maximum aperture value AMA.
If the limit of X or minimum aperture value AVo is exceeded, the limit
Set the limit value AMAX or AVo on the strobe device 384 side
Instead of the aperture value AV that has been set, use the aperture value AV for control.
However, at the same time, an action is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.
Of course, you will be exposed to it. Next, from the aperture value data AV for control, the photographic lens device
Subtraction AV - AV of the open aperture value AVo of 2. = AVs is performed and the number of aperture stages A for aperture control
Vs is calculated. Note that the above calculations apply in fully automatic, automatic dimming, and manual modes.
The process is done in exactly the same way. However, if this mode
In this case, the data regarding the control aperture stage number AVs is
Don't be used for your sake. The photographer confirms the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13.
However, the display at this time or Figure 10 (C1 ((
1) As shown in (1), strobe synchronization speed T
S￥N, for example, 1/60th of a second speed and strobe
The device '384 has been fully charged and is now in strobe photography mode.
"EF" is displayed to indicate that the
The aperture value AV is displayed. In addition, manual mode
In this case, the aperture value AV displayed in the finder 13 is
The photographer must manually set it on the lens/device 2 side.
, Therefore, "N1" indicating this is also displayed.
The fact is that this is also shown in (Ill) in Figure 10 (C).
・Camera device and strobe in automatic light control/manual mode
The operation of device 384 has been previously described.
0 Next, in the case of semi-automatic/auto dimming/auto mode, the strobe
The device 384 has an aperture setting dial 108 and a film sensitivity setting dial.
Aperture value and filter set by J106
The light is automatically adjusted according to the luminance sensitivity, but once
On the camera device side, there is a
Analog signal data V corresponding to the aperture value set by
SA is given and charge completion signal O8A is given.
It will be done. This charging completion signal C8A is related to fully automatic/semi-automatic
It contains a control signal that depends on the amount of current used in the semi-automatic
As explained earlier, this charge completion signal is the
No. O8A contains a semi-automatic mode control signal, and
The mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to the shutter speed.
This is a case where priority is given. In this case, first, the strobe tuning system of the camera device body 4 is
Set with shutter speed TSYN and dial 34 of body 4.
The comparison calculation of which is larger is the shutter speed TV or the shutter speed TV.
It is done. As a result of this comparison operation, whichever slower system
The shutter speed is used as shutter speed TV for control. Next, 5, import from the strobe device 384 to the camera device side.
Is the aperture value data VSA converted into digital data?
Constant C3T2 corresponding to bias VSA-C8
Executes T22AV and adjusts the aperture input from the strobe side.
Derivation of data AV. In addition, do it like this
The aperture value AV obtained is the aperture value on the strobe device 384 side.
This corresponds to the setting dial 108, but sometimes
The calculation result of the lever is the aperture that can be controlled by the lens device 2.
In such cases, the limit value may be exceeded.
It is necessary to inform the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. For this purpose, this camera system uses a strobe device 38.
The aperture value AV set on the 4th side can be controlled by the lens device 2.
the maximum aperture value AMAX or less, and the minimum aperture value AV
A comparison operation is performed to determine whether or not the value is greater than or equal to o. If such a comparison
As a result of the calculation, the aperture value AV is the maximum aperture value AMAX or
If the minimum aperture value AVo is exceeded, the limit value A
Set M A X or AVo on the strobe device 384 side
Instead of the aperture value AV that has been set, the aperture value AV for -control and
However, at the same time, an action is taken to notify the photographer of this fact.
Of course it will happen. Next, from the aperture value data AV for control, the photographic lens device
Subtraction AV - AV of the open aperture value AVo of 2. Two AVs are performed, the number of aperture stages AV for aperture control.
s is calculated. Note that the above 9 calculations apply in semi-automatic, automatic dimming, and manual modes.
The process is done in exactly the same way. However, in this mode
In this case, the data regarding the control aperture stage number AVs is
It cannot be used for God's sake. The photographer confirms the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13.
However, the display at this time is (V) in Figure 10 (C).
) , (As shown in Vll, the previous comparison operation
As a result, the shutter speed TV and shutter speed for the selected control
After charging of the robot device 384 is completed, the robot device 384 enters strobe photography mode.
"EF" is displayed to indicate that the
The aperture value AV is displayed. In addition, manual mode
In this case, the aperture value AV displayed in the finder 13 is
The photographer must manually set it on the lens device 2 side.
Therefore, "M" indicating this is also displayed.
This is also shown in (Vl) of FIG. 10(C). In addition, this semi-automatic, automatic dimming, automatic mode, and semi-automatic
・Camera device and strobe device in automatic light control/manual mode
The operation of the position 384 is as already explained above.
. Next, in the case of fully automatic/full flash/manual mode, the strobe
The device 384 specifically sets the aperture value using the aperture setting dial 108.
It becomes possible to fire at full capacity without any settings, but on the other hand,
On the camera device side is 1, the aperture setting dial, and the aperture setting dial is 108.
of the analog signal at a level indicating that no value has been set.
When data VSA is given, charge completion signal C8A is generated.
Given. This charging completion signal C8A is fully automatic/semi-automatic.
It includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to the
As mentioned before, automatic mode is activated when charging is complete.
The completion signal C8A includes a control signal for fully automatic mode.
Or the mode/7 selector 38 on the camera device side is set to
This is the case where the Note that the daily VSA imported into the camera device is
Indicates that no aperture value is set on the flash side.
Therefore, the result of A-D conversion in A-D converter 382 is over.
- The analog quantity is set so that it flows. follow
In the strobe photography mode, the A-D converter 382
When the flash is over-fired, set this to full-emission mode.
This signal is input to the camera device as a signal indicating the code.
When , the aperture of the lens device 2 is viewed from the body 4 side of the camera device.
Preset control is not performed. Therefore, in such a case, the aperture setting on the lens device 2 side
Manual presetting is required using ring 8. This kind of control routine is fully automatic, full emission, and minimum aperture.
In the case of mode, it is done in exactly the same way. However, in this mode, the aperture on the lens device 2 side
Since mark 12 is selected by setting ring 8,
Lens device 2 is preset to the minimum aperture position, etc.
Eventually, the aperture is controlled to the minimum aperture.
This will result in The state of the mode set by the above-mentioned discrimination operation is
The photographer can check the situation in the viewfinder 13.
However, the display at this time is (1), (1) in Figure 1O (d)
), and the strobe synchronization speed TSYN, e.g.
For example, a speed of 1/6'O second and a strobe device 3
The 84′ has been fully charged and is in strobe photography mode.
“EP” is displayed to indicate that the Note that manual mode
In the case of mode, the photographer manually presets the aperture value of lens device 2.
“M” will be displayed to indicate that it is necessary to set the
The details are also shown in the seal in Figure 10(d).
However, in the minimum aperture mode, the aperture of lens device 2 is not provided.
Since it is in a stable state, it also has the meaning of informing the photographer of this fact.
First, regarding the aperture as shown in Figure 10fd) ill.
No information is displayed. In addition, this fully automatic, full flash, manual mode, and fully automatic
, camera equipment and flash when in full flash, minimum aperture mode.
The operation of the robot device 384 is explained in 1 above.
Since this is the case, further detailed explanation will not be given. Next, in semi-automatic, full-flash, and manual modes, the strobe
The device 384 specifically sets the aperture value using the aperture setting dial 108.
There is no setting required, that is, manual mode display 110
By setting , it becomes possible to fully emit light, but L
On the other hand, the aperture setting dial 108 is located on the camera device side.
An analog signal with a level indicating that no value has been set.
When data VSA is given, charging completion signal O8A is issued.
Given. This charging completion signal C8A is fully automatic or semi-automatic.
Contains a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to the
As explained earlier, automatic mode is activated during this charging process.
The completion signal 08A includes the control signal for semi-automatic motor 1.
mode selector 38 on the camera device side is
This is a case where priority is given to data speed. In this case, first, the strobe tuning system of the camera device body 4 is
Set with shutter speed TSYN and dial 34 of body 4.
The comparison calculation to determine which of the shutter speeds TV is larger is
It is done. As a result of this comparison operation, whichever slower system
0th order where shutter speed is used as shutter speed TV for control
is taken from the flash device 384 to the camera device.
The data VSA stored in the flash allows you to set any aperture value on the strobe side.
In order to show that it is not determined, the
Analog that overflows as a result of A-D conversion
amount is set. Therefore, if you are in strobe shooting mode,
So, when the A-D converter 382 overflows
, this is used as a signal to indicate full flash mode for cameras and devices.
At this time, the body 4 side of the camera device
Aperture preset control of lens device 2 is not performed from
. Therefore, in such a case, the aperture setting on the lens device 2 side should be changed.
0, which needs to be manually preset depending on the fixed ring 8.
In addition, such control routines can be used for semi-automatic, full-power, and minimum
In the case of aperture mode, it is done in exactly the same way. However, this
In this mode, the aperture setting ring on the lens device 2 side
Since mark 12 is selected by 8, the lens device
2 is equivalent to being preset to the minimum aperture position.
In the end, the aperture is limited to the minimum aperture. The mode set based on the above-mentioned discrimination operation is explained above.
The photographer can check the condition in the viewfinder 1 and 3.
However, the display at this time is as shown in Figure 10 (dl -M (Vl)
As shown in
Shutter speed TV for control and strobe device 384
Indicates that charging is complete and the camera is in flash photography mode.
"EF" will be displayed.In addition, in manual mode,
The photographer manually presets the aperture value of lens device 2.
Regarding the display of "M" indicating that it is necessary, please refer to Section 3.
Figure 10 (as shown in dl (Ill), the minimum opening
In the case of diameter mode, the aperture of lens device 2 is not set.
Including the meaning of informing the photographer of this in order to
As shown in (1) of Figure 10 (dl), the information regarding the choking is
Don't display anything. In addition, this semi-automatic, full flash, manual mode and semi-automatic
・Camera device and flash when in full flash/minimum aperture mode
The operation of the robot device 384 is as already explained.
Therefore, a more detailed explanation will not be given. Note that in flash photography mode, the body of the camera device may
If Pulp is selected on the A4 side, each step described above
Regarding fully automatic or semi-automatic in flash photography mode
control, i.e. automatic speed determination control regarding Nyanota speed.
Priority will be given to pulp photography. Therefore, when it comes to strobe shooting mode with pulp, there are
No calculations are performed for this purpose, and the aperture control of the photographic lens device is used.
For your reference only, the same as each strobe shooting mode mentioned above.
calculation control will be performed. Therefore, in this camera system, the photometry results
Four routines for exposure control calculations based on strobe
There are four routines and a combination of calculations for exposure control depending on shooting.
It includes a total of eight general calculation control routines, and various
The shooting mode is based on these eight general calculation control routines.
It is achieved by applying it irregularly. This camera system, including the calculation routines described above,
The stem captures configuration input data, configuration conditions, and operating status.
Then, calculations and control of each mechanism are performed based on comprehensive judgment.
The control systems applied to such systems are
It will be necessary to arrange it efficiently based on rational thinking. That is, using the eight arithmetic routes mentioned above as the center of the system,
, to meet the demands of various shooting modes desired by photographers,
Automatically determines the data input from the department and imports it into the system.
Errors associated with various mechanical limitations of the camera mechanism.
Detects incorrect settings or operations and notifies the photographer.
It also displays information necessary for various types of shooting, and
Effective control signals and controls for the mechanical operation of the camera mechanism.
Control system that allows you to set control sequences
Necessary power to realize the system; a certain 0 Power configured from such a point of view; the block in Figure 30
The power that is the control circuit as shown in the lock diagram;
Input control section 360, central I+ control section 362, output in the figure
The control section 364 is shown in more detail. This system basically relies on the clock no;rus OP.
However, for this purpose, it is provided in the central phloem 362.
' is the clock pulse generator 542.
Ru. This clock nocilne C゜P is distributed throughout the system.
'This clock pulse generator 542
Specifically, this can be realized through the configuration shown in Figure 31.
To be able to do 75; to be able to do it. This Clock Noculus CP's Clock
The lock cycle is extremely important for measuring real time, which will be explained later.
This is important and can be adjusted sufficiently with the variable resistor 542A shown in No. 31.
clause must be set. This clock pulse CP generates a system clock pulse.
This system pulse generator
The generator 544 generates the third clock signal based on the clock pulse CP.
A system pulse as shown in Figure 2 is generated. system
)C/res counter pulses CT1 to OT4 and
Consists of timing pulses TBO' to TB7, etc.
Various operations of the Cono Camera system are based on the previous S.
It is based on stem pulses. Note that this system
In the system, one word is passed between the timing pulses TBO and TB7.
It's one hour. The system pulse generator 544 is shown in FIG.
This shows the specific configuration of the counter pulse.
sc'rx, OT2. CD40 to generate CT4
29 (manufactured by RCA)
A timing pulse counter is used.
TB 0-TB 7 CD4028 to generate all
Using a decoder that uses integrated circuit elements (manufactured by ROA)
ing. The integrated circuit element 0D4029 is shown in detail in FIG.
Logic diagrams are shown and functional
is an up/down counter, but in this example
A binary up-converter that operates in synchronization with clock pulse CP.
It is used as a counter. In such a configuration, the
Outside /: /l/ S terminal OL K K Said clock
・By inputting pulse CP, its output terminal Q1
- Counter pulse cT1 as shown in FIG. 32 from Q3
−〇T4 can be obtained respectively. Further, the integrated circuit element cD4028 is shown in FIG.
It shows detailed logic diagrams and features
It essentially constitutes a binary value decoder. this system
Now, the counter pulse C is applied to the A to C terminals of this element.
The output depends on TI, CT2゜CT4 being done by one person.
Terminal Q. ~ Timing pulse TB as shown in FIG. 32 from Q7
0-TB 7 can be obtained. Timing pulses TB1 to T obtained as described above
B6 is given to the driver circuit 546, and this driver circuit
The timing pulses TB1-TB6 are output from the line 546.
Powered. This timing pulse TB・1~TB6U
, for dynamically driving the digital display means 402
through timing line 394 as a digit pulse of
is applied to the display means 402, and the film speed input
Force mechanism 518, open aperture value, MNAL and 8PDW signal
Number setting entry mechanism 522, AV/TV and ASLO settings
Mechanism 528 and maximum aperture setting mechanism 536 receive data.
The timing pulse is used as a timing pulse for
It is provided to each of the mechanisms through the input 394. Here, the film sensitivity input mechanism 518 is shown in FIG.
It has the configuration as shown, and the film sensitivity Sv' is
from the lower digit in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6.
They can be taken out sequentially. The details have already been described above. centre
Data regarding film sensitivity S-■ is set with 1/3 step accuracy.
The data that is input is approximated with 1/8 step precision.
It is. That is, from the initial film sensitivity input mechanism 518
For one weight, the bit with one weight is
For a 3-stage weight, the bit has a b-stage weight, and
By setting each to “1”, you can check the film sensitivity data.
Regarding the data Sv' being taken into the camera system.
I have already mentioned that. However, if this continues, the degree of stacking will be close to h.
Since the data are not similar, it is
The file is imported with “1” set in the corresponding bit.
The data Sv′ regarding the degree of weight is unconditionally given one level of weight.
By setting "l" in the corresponding bit,
Input into camera system as approximated data
I have already mentioned that it is necessary to child
This is exactly the approximation of formulas +61 and +71.
Well, I just executed it. Here, data SV' regarding film sensitivity SV is one stage.
Set "1" to the bit with the weight of
The role of converting the film sensitivity data to S■ is
This is the cent circuit 520. This set circuit 520 has 7
Lower digits in synchronization with timing pulses TBI to TB6?
Data SV' regarding film sensitivity inputted sequentially from
- is input in synchronization with the bit with a weight of -, that is, TBz.
bit or bit with weight b, i.e. TB2.
If “1” is detected in the synchronously input bit, the next
Set 11” at the TBO timing of the word time,
Film sensitivity data of h stage stacking synchronized with TBO~TB6
It is possible to obtain psv. The detailed circuit diagram of the cent circuit 520 is shown in the following.
This is shown in Figure 36, and as is clear from the figure.
Timing pulse shoulder - synchronized with TB6, lower
Data SV regarding film sensitivity input sequentially from digit
The lower two digits of ', i.e., the one-stage weight synchronized with TBI
or a bit with a higher weight synchronized to TB2.
Check that “1” is set on the
timing pulse TB1 or TB2 that is input as
Therefore, it is detected through the AND gate AND1, and the
(de Gou) output of ANDI to 2 rip-flops F1
By setting the input signal to the J input terminal of ', the input data
“1” is placed on a bit with a weight of 1 or 7 steps of Sv′
Detects and remembers that you are standing. At this time, the flip
The Q output of the flop F1 becomes 1", and this "1" output
The force is the first timing of the next word time'・pulse TB
Synchronized with O, read through AND2
Served. The output of this AND gate AND2 is OR
・Through gate OR, 2, film sensitivity data SV
l/, the timing pulse T as the heavy-mi bit of the stage
Since it is output in synchronization with BO, in the end, the filter
Timing pulse sensitivity Sv is the same as timing pulse TBo to TB6.
This will be taken out as data on the expected h-stage stacking degree. In the following explanation, the output of OFt2 (or goo)
The power (2) is referred to as film sensitivity setting data DTSV. In addition, the aperture value/MNAL, 5PDW setting mechanism 5
22 has a configuration as shown in FIG.
The MNAL signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TBI.
The 5PDW signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB2.
of the lens device 2 in synchronization with the switching pulses TB3 to TB6.
Data regarding the open aperture value AVo (Gray Co.)
(code) can be extracted sequentially from the most significant digits.
. The details are as described above. The open aperture data AVo is the gray code equivalent.
Data AVo (gray code) is the open aperture value/MN
AL, 8PDW setting mechanism 522, timing parameter
Synchronized with Luss TB3 to TB6, manual input is performed sequentially from the upper digits.
As already mentioned, the setting machine
The information input from the structure 522 includes the MNAL signal and the
Since the PDW signal is also included, open aperture value A is selected from this.
Data related to Vo Only AVo (gray code)
It is necessary to separate them. Signal classification is the key to this purpose.
This is the circuit 524. This signal separation circuit 524
Open aperture input in synchronization with pulses TB3 to T86
Data regarding value AVo (gray code)
This signal is separated based on the timing pulse.
The data AVo (
Gray code) is the following Gray code binary -
The open aperture value data AV is transmitted through the code converter 526. is converted to Check the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used.
The points that need to be set in the Ray code have been explained previously.
As already mentioned, this gray code binary code
The code converter 526 is based on the same principle as shown in FIG.
timing pulses TB3 to TB6.
Regarding the open aperture value AVo, which was input sequentially from the high-order digits,
The data AVo (gray code) is binary.
code and timing pulses TB2 to TB
It is possible to obtain data AVo of b-stage stacking degree synchronized with 5.
It is something. Note that the signal separation circuit 524 and the gray code bar
The initial code converter 526 has a detailed circuit diagram.
This is shown in Figure 37, and as is clear from the figure.
In synchronization with timing pulses TB3 to TB6, the upper
Data regarding the maximum aperture value AVo input sequentially from the digits
AVo (gray code) is the timing pulse T
B1. Output of NOR gate N0R1 inputted by TB2
~I depending on the at-gate AND3 receiving
It is separated from the NAL signal, SPT:)W signal, etc., and is a 4-bit signal.
FT parallel input parallel output/FT register CD
4035 (made by RCA) directly to the J terminal and to the K terminal.
It is provided through the converter INV1. This integrated circuit element OD4035 is shown in detail in FIG.
This shows the logic circuit configuration diagram, and the transformer/missi
Figure 39 shows the logic and theoretical structure of the gate.
be. This CD4o35, when "0" is input to its P/s terminal
, operates as a serial shift register, and outputs “1” to the S terminal.
”When input, it operates as a parallel shift register.
This S terminal has a timing
・Receive pulse TB2 at J input terminal, timing pulse
Clip that receives TB6 at the input end, 70 tube, F2
The Q output of is input. That is, this flip-flop
Step F2 is the next clock after timing pulse TB2 rises.
On the rising edge of lock pulse CP, immediately on the rising edge of Ta2.
The next clock after Ta6 rises is set synchronously.
In synchronization with the rising edge of pulse CP, that is, the falling edge of Ta6,
This item is reset, and the data related to the maximum aperture value AVo.
TB where data A'Vo (f-ray code) is input
Between 3 and 86, input “0” to one terminal of CD4035.
Give, C,, D 4035 a serial type /ft register.
′. Now, the integrated circuit element CD4035 is a serial type shifter.
While operating as a resistor, its J, terminals should be connected to each other.
Gray code serial data reversed to
If the following is input, this is basically J,
This corresponds to inputting the same serial data to the child, but the group
A serial code is a serial code.A serial code is a serial code.
It is converted into data and stored. This operation is performed with open aperture.
Data regarding value AVo (gray code)
The timing pulse generation of TB3 to TB6 is inputted.
It is done while one is alive. After the above operations, the timing of timing pulse TB7
flip-flop F2 resets and
Since the Q output of is “1”, this Q output is received at the 5 terminal.
0Dj035 is a parallel shift register.
However, this CD4035 is Q3.
Output to D2 human power, Q2 output to DI large input, Q1 output to
This CD4035 is
, while "1" input is given to one terminal, that is, TB
It operates as a register in series between 7 and TB2.
Ru. At this time, from the QO terminal, this register is sent sequentially from the high-order digit.
Open aperture value data that has been converted into binary data and stored in the
The timing pulse TB is sequentially input from the lower digit.
It will be output in synchronization with 7 to TB2. this data
AVo is reset during timing pulse TB7 to Ta2.
The Q output of the flip 70 tube F2 in the set state is -
is retrieved through the AND gate AND4
However, this data AVo is based on the weight of each pit and
The correspondence with timing pulses is different from other data. Therefore, the 3-pitch signal is transmitted through flip-flops F3 to F5.
Flip-flop F
It will be taken out from the Q output terminal of 5 along with the timer.
. In this way, the open aperture value AVo is determined by the timing pulse.
B stage stacking data synchronized with Tl32 and 'I'B6
It will be taken out. ' In the following explanation, the flip-flop F5
The Q output ■ is called the open aperture value data DTAO.
Ru. Opening of the photographing lens device 2 obtained as described above.
The maximum aperture value AVo is closely related to the bending error AVc when metering at maximum aperture.
It has a relationship and is a calculation for exposure control based on open metering.
When performing this, it is necessary to consider this bending error AVc.
. This bending error AVc is the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2 used.
It can be calculated based on the value A”v−.
In the stem, the maximum aperture value AVo that is considered to be input is
For each of the above, the corresponding bending error data AV
Prepare c and correspond to manually set maximum aperture value AVo.
A configuration that selects and imports the bending error data AVc
is stored in 528, and the input aperture is
The timing parameter is selected appropriately according to the threshold value AVo.
As the h-stage stacking data synchronized from TBO to TB3,
The data is output sequentially from the lowest digit. The detailed configuration for capturing the bending error as described above is
is shown in FIG. 37, and the register CD4035
The data from each terminal of QO to Q3 is sent to the decoder CD40.
28. The output of this decoder is Q
Set any one of Q2 to Q9 to 1" output. The decoder
The output of the da is stored in advance with a plurality of bending errors AVc.
Ft OM and corresponds to the decoder output, power
4-bit song bx difference data AVc written at address
Output. The output of this ROM is a timing buffer
Each DI, 'D2, D3, D4 input of CD'4042
4 pins are attached to the terminal. This timing buffer 0D40
) 42 is an integrated circuit element manufactured by RCA, and is shown in FIG.
This figure shows the block configuration diagram. This time
The buffer for
Therefore, the ROM is output at the timing of TB7.
Capture power and output memory at timing other than TB7
This has the effect of register CD.
4035 is obtained by binary converting the open aperture value kVo.
The loading process is completed at timing 9 of TB7's startup.
At this point, register CD 4035 QO, Ql,
Q2. The parallel output starts from the Q3 terminal when the
Since it is the open aperture value AVo that has been converted into the
The output of the ROM corresponds to the input aperture value λVO.
The bending error AVc occurs at the timing of TB7.
, Therefore, the output at this time is adjusted to include salt 9 at the timing of TB7.
This is to obtain the necessary bending error AVc by As mentioned above, the timing buffer OD 40
The bending error data AVc stored in 42 are QO, Ql,
Q2. Output from Q3 terminal and then converted to serial data
Integrated circuit element NIC14539 (manufactured by Motorola) for
They are input to the XO, XI, X2° and X3 terminals, respectively. child
The block diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14539 is shown in FIG.
Figure 42 shows the truth table, and Figure 43 shows the concrete log.
It shows a Zick diagram, where XO, Xi
,X2. The bending error data input in parallel through the X3 terminal
The data AVc is input to each terminal of A, B, and ST.
counter pulse CTI↓O, T2. Based on CT4
and synchronized with timing pulses TB 0-TB 3.
It is output from the Z terminal as serial data. like this
, the bending error AVc is the timing pulse TBO-TB3
integrated circuit element MC1 as h-stage stacking data synchronized with
It will be taken out from the Z terminal of 4539. In the following description, the integrated circuit element MC!
14539's Z terminal output ■ is the bending error data DT.
It is called AO. t7'c, the TV-AV-ASLC setting device 11j
528 has a configuration as shown in FIG.
The A8LC signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB1.
Dial 3 in synchronization with timing pulses TB2 to TB6
7 Yanota speed TV or aperture value AV set according to 4
You can take out each. For more details on this
As already stated. /Yatsuta speed TV, aperture set by dial 34
AV/TV/ASLC setting mechanism
528 to the timing pulses TB2 to TB6.
As mentioned before, it will be incorporated in due course.
However, the data from the setting mechanism 528 is
Is it compatible with TV or compatible with aperture value AV?
There is no distinction between However, this data
Is it imported as a data speed TV or as an aperture value?
Whether it is captured or not depends on the timing pulse of TBl.
The determination is made based on the aperture setting signal AsLC that is taken in synchronously.
Separated. Note that the data is the aperture setting signal As.
LC (!: KM Record A V-TV-A 8
It is taken in from the LC setting mechanism 528, but the setting machine
The timing pulse TB is selected from among the output signals of the structure 528.
Separate the data that is imported in synchronization with 2 to TB6.
This is the signal separation circuit 532. Said signal separation circuit
The data separated by 532 is directly used as the aperture value.
This data can be used as AV related data.
To use the data as data regarding shutter speed TV
needs to be multiplied by 2, as mentioned earlier. this
is the minimum unit for setting the aperture value AV using the dial 34, which is 1 or 7 steps, whereas it can be set using the common dial 34.
Because the minimum unit of shutter speed TV to be set is 1 step.
Then, the shutter speed TV is multiplied by 1, and the aperture value AV and data are
Set the minimum unit of , and later use this data as
Adopt a configuration that doubles the shutter speed when used as a shutter speed.
ing. To achieve this purpose, the
A doubling circuit 530 transmits data through the doubling circuit 530.
Q output as data TV regarding shutter speed
Note that this doubling circuit 5300 action is based on the timing pulse
・Tie the data input in synchronization with TB2 to TB6.
Synchronized with Ming Pa/l/, x, TB3~TB7
The timing and
The point is that it provides a delay of one pulse. As mentioned above, regarding the set shutter speed
The data TV that is
It will be input as 1-stage stack data synchronously,
Also, the data AV regarding the set aperture value is
In synchronization with pulses TB2 to TB6, the data of the b-stage stacking
It will be entered as a data. The signal separation circuits 532 and 2@circuit 530 described above
The specific circuit configuration diagram is shown in Figure 44.
, AV, the output of the ASLO setting mechanism 528 is
Timing pulse TBI is input through INV2.
With the AND gate AND4, the timing pulse
TV and AVK related signals synchronized with TB2 to TB6
only separated. In this way, the separated data is narrowed down.
If the information is about the value, you can leave it as is, but
In order to obtain data regarding the speed of the flip-flop
Step F6 delays the timing by l clock time.
One-stage stacking data synchronized with Bano CS TB3 to TB7
and then take it out. In addition, in the following explanation, the above-mentioned AND game) AN
The output of D4 is called aperture setting data DTAV.
The Q output of flip-flop F6 is the shutter speed.
It is called degree setting data DTTV. Further, the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 is shown in FIG.
The timing pulse TBI has a configuration like this.
Maximum aperture value A of the photographing lens device 2 used in synchronization with TB6
It is possible to extract data A M A X' related to MAX.
You can, but I've already mentioned this. This maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 sets the maximum aperture value by itself.
It is a device that generates value data hyiix, and it is fixed data.
Among the numerous fixed data stored in the data ROM534,
Select and output the required maximum aperture value data AMAX from
It is something that That is, the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536,
Input in synchronization with timing pulse TB 1-TB 6
Data AMAX'i1 As shown in Figure 20, the actual
The maximum aperture value A M A X each F number F11.
F16. F22. F32. Timing every F45°F64
The following pulses TBI to TB6 correspond to each other.
From the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536, the serial human power
Data is introduced into the column output register 538 and stored in the direct storage 11.
After that, which bit of the register 538 outputs “L”?
However, if you look at whether it is done, you can see that the photographic lens device 2 used
The maximum aperture value AMAX is Fil, F16°F22. F3
2. F45. It becomes clear which one is F64. follow
The parallel outputs of the register 538 are stored in a fixed data ROM.
534, and the fixed data ROM 534 is
Maximum aperture value A M from instruction ROM504
When the signal specifying AX is input, the register 5
Output the maximum aperture value AMAX specified by 38.
It is something that gives strength. Please note that the maximum aperture value AMAX is fixed data ROM534.
The specific configuration for deriving the equation will be described in detail later. On the other hand, the aperture value/MNAL, 5PDW setting mechanism
522 to timing pulse TBI. MNAL signal and 5PDW input in synchronization with TB2
The signal is introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548 and the timing
Both signals are separated based on the pulses and then stored. As a result, the condition signal storage circuit 548 outputs MNAL.
or MNAL signal and 5PDW or 5PDW signal
It is something that can be obtained. The detailed structure of the condition signal storage circuit 548 is shown in FIG.
MNAL/5PDW setting machine
timing pulse TBI from structure 522, that of TB2.
MNAL signal and 8PD, W signal input in synchronization with each
Of the signals, the MNAL signal clocks timing pulse TB2.
Detected by flip-flop FIO as lock input.
The 5PDW signal will be output and stored, and the 5PDW signal will be
・Flip fortune telling using pulse TB3 as clock input
It is detected and stored depending on the file. As a result, the Q output terminal of the flip-flop FIO
The MNAL signal is sent from the terminal, and the MNAL signal is sent from the output terminal.
However, the Q output terminal of the flip-flop 7'F11
8PDW signal is sent from the terminal, and 5PDW signal is sent from the retraction blade terminal.
will be output respectively. The above TV-AV-A S LC setting machine @'5
28 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI.
The ASLO signal is introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548.
are separated and stored based on timing pulses. As a result, the condition signal storage circuit 548 outputs A8LO.
signal or As LC signal can be obtained. The details are also shown in the monothea shown in Figure 45.
Therefore, the timer is sent from the TV-AV-ASLO setting mechanism 528.
ASLC signal input synchronously with switching pulse TB1
is 7 with timing pulse TB2 as the clock input.
It is detected and memorized by the trip flop F9.
Therefore, the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F9
The output terminal outputs the A8LO signal, and the output terminal outputs the ASLC signal.
It will be output. On the other hand, the condition signal storage circuit 548
Timing pulses TB2 to TB6 are synchronized at line 532.
However, this is not a digital process.
When valve mode is selected by dial 34,
This is to determine the following. In other words, this system
All bits of data set by dial 34 are O″6.
The timing is in valve mode, so the timing pattern is
II Q II scratch signal between Lus T82 and TB6
If only one input is entered, it depends on detecting that.
9-valve mode is determined. That is, the condition signal storage circuit 548 stores timing pulses.
The output of the signal separation circuit 532 between steps T82 and TB6
If there is no “1” output from the end, it is detected.
It has a memorizing effect. This memory signal indicates that the shutter speed is in bulb mode.
The above-mentioned BLB signal or reverse top 1 signal indicating the
The signal is output from the signal storage circuit 548. In addition, even if this details is shown in Fig. 45,
Therefore, there is a tie from the TV/AV, ASLC setting mechanism 528.
The data input in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI-TB6
The timing pulse is input through inverter INV3.
Depends on the AND gate AND5 to which STBI is input.
ASLC signal synchronized with timing pulse TBI
After removing , connect the J input of flip-flop F7 to J-.
input to the terminal. Flip flop F7 to this J-
Input clock pulse CP as the clock input of
The timing pulse is applied to the input terminal.
TBI has been input. This flip flop F7
The Q output of is further flipped to another J-, to the flop F8.
The Q output is given to the input terminal and the J input terminal. Na
Oh, input the clock of Flip Flora 7”F8 to J- above.
The clock pulse TBO is input as the clock pulse.
At the moment it is input to the input terminal of the flop F7,
Flip in synchronization with the rising edge of the next clock pulse CP
- Flop F7 is temporarily placed in a reset state. this
time, timing pulse T from AND gate AND5
If there is even one “1” output between BI and TB6
, this flip-flop F7 is in the set state, and its
The Q output becomes 1”. This “1” output is a flip-flop.
This clip is used as a terminal input for F8 and F8.
Even if TBO is input as the clock input of loop F8,
Since flip-flop F8 is in the reset state, its
Q output is held at "O". On the contrary, and game) A
Between ND5 and timing pulses TBI-TB6,
If there is no 11" output, this flipper
- Flotub F7 maintains the reset state and its Q output is also 1.
This “l” output is the flip-flop
This flip-flop is used as the J terminal input of F8.
When TB and 0 are input as the clock input of F8, tooling is activated.
The switching flop F8 is in the set state, and its Q output is
It is held at "1". This state is an AND gate AN
At least one "1" from D5 to TB2 to TB6 timing
``If the output is done, it will be resolved at the time of the next TBO.''
. As described above, the flip-flop F8
The BLB signal is output from the Q output terminal, and the BL signal is output from the Q output terminal.
The B signal will be output. Through the configuration described above, the condition signal storage circuit 5
From 48 onwards, the setting status of various conditions in the mechanism part 358 is shown.
Depending on the MNAL signal. MNAL signal, BLB signal, BLB signal, 5PDW signal
, 8PDW signal, sLc signal, and ASLC signal are output.
This will result in On the other hand, from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360,
Various data, condition setting signals, status determination signals, etc. are input.
It is. Analog output from TTL photometry means 378 or terminal 58
The analog signal input from
selectively A through a signal switching circuit 380 controlled by
- input to the D converter, but the A-D converter with the reference
Level generation means 550, A-D conversion control circuit 552.
Integrator 554. Integrator control means 555. Comparator 556°
Counter 558. flip flop 560. . 562, buffer register 564
. This A-D converter is generally a dual lamp A-D converter.
A well-known A-D converter called a converter,
Multiplies the input analog data in the positive direction for a certain period of time.
to create an integration level proportional to the input analog data.
Then, from the integration level, a predetermined constant
is integrated in the negative direction based on the level signal of
Is this integration of analog data in the negative direction started?
The standard during the said time corresponds to the time from start to end.
By counting the pulse signals, the input analyzer
Configured to obtain digital conversion values of log data
It is something. In an A-D converter having such a configuration, the integrator
554 input analog data in the forward direction and reference level.
It is used to integrate the bell signal in the negative direction.
Therefore, the reference level generating means 550 also generates the reference level.
and said integrator control means 55 for generating the bell signal.
In order to clear the residual integral value of 5, the A-D conversion system described above is used.
The wholesale circuit 552 receives a signal input to the integrator 554,
i.e. switching between analog data and reference level signals and
For switching the ramp in the positive direction and negative direction of the integrator 554.
, the comparator 556 compares the output of the f* regulator 554 with the output of the f* regulator 554.
By comparing the reference level (ground level in this example),
In order to detect the completion of negative direction integration, the counter
558 integrates the input analog data in the positive direction for a certain period of time
At the same time, the reference level signal is reversed.
In order to measure the integration time when performing definite integration in the direction,
The phase register 564 is a reference level input by the integrator 554.
When the definite integration of the bell signal in the opposite direction is completed, the above-mentioned counter
In order to capture and store the contents of counter 558,
The flip-flop 560 is connected to the A-D conversion tl control.
is taken in through the control circuit 552 and applied to the integrator 554.
Switching of signals obtained and integration direction of the integrator 554
In order to generate signals for switching, that is, switching lamps,
The clip-flop 562 receives the result of A-D conversion,
To detect that counter 558 has overflowed
used to output the detection command signal of
It is. Note that the comparator 556 outputs "1" when there is an input integral value.
When the force and input integral value are below a certain level, the output is 0”.
0 In such a configuration, A
- When starting D conversion, initial A-D conversion control
The circuit 552 receives an analog signal input from its a input terminal.
The data is captured and provided to an integrator 554. At this time,
Rip-flop 560 is still in reset and slave
Therefore, the integrator 554 is set to integrate in the positive direction.
Since the input analog data is input to the integrator 5,
54 in the positive direction. At the same time counter 55
8 starts counting in synchronization with clock pulse CP. . The counter 558 is used for time control and A as described above.
-It is used for importing D conversion data.
Then, the input clock pulse CP is divided appropriately and the base
Create a quasi-time9 and adopt a configuration to count this standard time.
ing. After the counting operation as described above, the counter 558
When it overflows, i.e. at a certain time after the start of counting.
After the time has elapsed, the contents of the counter 558 become “0”.
and at the same time flip-flop 560 is set.
. In other words, if flip-flop 560 is set,
What happens is that the counter 558 starts counting for a certain period of time.
This indicates that a period of time has passed, and this is especially important.
The integration of the input analog data by the integrator 554 is
This means that it was carried out for a fixed period of time. Product at this time
The output of divider 554 is proportional to the input analog data.
There is no need to explain that it is a thing. The output of the flip-flop 56'0 is A-reconverted.
The input that is applied to the control circuit 552 and applied to the integrator 554 is
power is connected to the b terminal side of the A-D conversion control circuit 552.
is switched to the reference voltage signal from the reference level generating means 550.
At the same time, the integrator 554 is integrated in the negative direction.
By setting the integrator 554 as
Integrate the quasi-voltage signal in the opposite direction. Therefore, this b input
Based on the reference voltage from the terminal, the result of the previous data integration is
The data stored in the integrator 554 is inversely integrated.
Ru. On the other hand, it overflows first and its contents are all "
When the counter 558 reaches 0, it continues counting.
Note that at this time, the counted amount by the counter 558 and the integral
It is obvious that the amount of inverse integration by the device 554 is in a proportional relationship.
Ru. As a result of this inverse integration, the output of this integrator 554 is constant.
When the value of is reached, i.e., the analog
When the inverse integration corresponding to the amount of integration of the log data is completed, the ratio
Since the output of the comparator 556 changes from “1” to “0”,
is detected, but at this time, the comparator 556 immediately
Based on the output change of (sofa register 564 is
The count of the counter 558 is captured and stored. this
) (counter stored in sofa register 564
The counted quantity 558 is the inverse integral quantity by the integrator 554,
That is, the integrator 554 calculates the amount that has elapsed for a certain period of time.
This corresponds to analog data. This example
In the system, after such an operation, the buffer ′・
A self-stored counter 558 introduced into the register 564
The measured quantity is converted into a digital value corresponding to the input analog data.
This is converted data. Note that even after the above operation, the counter 558 continues counting.
As a result of this counting, the counter 558 is turned on again.
When the bar flows, the contents of the counter 558 are all "
0” and at the same time flip-flop 560 is reset.
The clip flop 562 is set as well.
Ru. By resetting the flip-flop 560,
, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 temporarily controls the integrator.
Clearing the integrator 554 through the control means 555
6. Analog data input from the a input terminal
is taken in and given to the integrator 554, and the analog data
The integration of ta will be performed again. As mentioned above,
The A-D converter then repeats the same operation.
The system in this example is constantly adding new analog
The data has to be repeatedly converted from A to D and imported.
The contents of buffer register 564 are always updated with new input data.
updated with digital data corresponding to the log data.
Ru. Note that the operating state of this A-D converter always depends on the system.
It is necessary to be detected as such, but it is provided for that purpose.
This is the logic circuit 566. This logic circuit 566 is
of the comparator 556 and Frithop flops 560 and 562.
The output signal is being acquired, and the input analog data is
an INT signal indicating that the divider 554 is integrating;
After the A-D conversion is completed, transfer and read the A=D conversion data.
ADCE signal indicating that 1 is possible, A-D conversion
As a result, the input analog data is too large and counter 5
Outputs ADOF signal indicating that 58 has overflowed.
do. As described above, from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section
Analog data introduced into the 360
It is stored in register 564 as digital conversion data DD.
However, this data DD is passed through the signal switching circuit 568.
Based on the command from the logic circuit 566, the timing
Digital signal synchronized with programming pulse TB 0-TB 7
Input bus line 370 as data, starting from the lower digit
and transferred to the central control unit 362. On the other hand, the INT signal output from the logic circuit 566 is
As a signal synchronized with timing pulse TB7, and
The ADOE signal is a signal synchronized with timing pulse TB6.
and bus line 366, respectively.
. Note that the details will be explained later. The terminal 54 of the mechanism part 358 receives a strobe charging completion signal.
Signal OLM indicating C8A and external photometry adapter mode
etc., but these signals are the same as mentioned earlier.
As shown in the figure, charging of the strobe is completed according to the current detector 386.
CGUP signal indicating whether or not
FAT signal indicating that the printer speed is fully automatic, external photometry
The OLM signal indicates that the adapter is applied.
It will be done. These signals are further converted into two signals OU, AO by an encoder 570.
These OU and AO flaw signals are also shown in the explanatory diagram of Fig. 47.
Similarly, when the OU double signal is “0”, the photometry data is sent to the system.
This means that exposure control is performed based on
When AO flaw signal is "0", TTL photometry shooting mode
If it is "l", it will be the external metering shooting mode.
This will lead to instructions on how to proceed. Also, when the CU double signal is “1”,
, which instructs the system to use flash photography mode.
If the AO double signal is 0, the shutter speed is semi-automatic.
If it is "1", the shutter speed will be controlled.
This instructs fully automatic control. these beliefs
Nos. OU and AO are the ends of the multiplexer 572, respectively.
given to children a and b. The multiplexer 572 includes input terminals a to f.
, the input signal from the input terminal is subjected to a timing pulse T
Convert to a serial signal that is output in synchronization with BI~TB6
The value configured to output is also ρ. This multiplayer
The c, d, and e terminals of the
clock signal AELK, AE charge signal AECG, winding
The completion signal WNUP is applied to the f terminal.
signal AD indicating AD conversion overflow from path 566.
OF is given. As a result, this multiplexer 5
From 72 onwards, the iminoge pulses TB1 to TB6 are
Synchronization signal, ADOF signal, AELK signal, A
HcG signal, WN U p signal, h'0 signal, O
The U signal is output 9, and this serial signal is
From the signal switching circuit 568, timing pulses TBI to T
B6, sequentially placed on input bus line 370.
This signal is then transferred to the central control unit 362.
The converter circuit 568 operates based on the command from the logic circuit 566.
A-D of input analog data
After the conversion is completed, the transfer power of A-D conversion data becomes possible.
At this point, the output of buffer register 564 is transferred to the input bus.
・Give it to line 370, and in conditions other than the above,
Connect the serial output signal of the multiplexer 572 to the input bus line.
370. The input control section 360 described above is shown in detail in FIG.
A detailed block diagram is shown. In the same figure, 5
57 divides the clock pulse CP by 32 to calculate the timekeeping storm.
A frequency division counter that generates a reference clock and that
The reference clock is generated from the Q4 terminal. This standard
The clock is sent to the counter 558 through the inverter IN■4.
is input to the clock terminal of the counter. Therefore, this counter
The counter 558 divides and counts the reference clock.
8-pit count data is output from the QO-Q7 terminal. Note that the most significant bit of the output data of the counter 558
Q7 is a flip-flop through inverter IN■5.
is applied to the clock terminal of step 560. This flip
- Flop 560 has its Q output as its D input.
, substantially an extension of the most significant bit of said counter 558.
This constitutes one pit. In addition, the inverter
The output of INVs is the Q of the flip 70 toggle 560.
NANDl which receives output at one input end
The output of this NAND gate NANDI is
applied to the clock terminal of clip flop 562
. This clip-flop 562 is also the same as the flip-flop 562.
Similar to chip 560, its Q output is used as its D input.
In effect, the counter 558 is a flip-flop.
This constitutes one pit that is a further extension of the tap 560. That is, as is clear from the above explanation, the frequency division counter
counter 577, counter '558, flip-flop 56
Overall, 0.562 is a 15-bit frequency division.
This constitutes a counter. In this example,
An integrated circuit was developed to realize a 15-pin frequency division counter.
Two elements MC14520 (manufactured by Motorola) were used. This integrated circuit element Me14520 is a block shown in FIG.
・Two 4-bit counters as shown in the diagram.
A dual up counter that includes one counter.
The counter is configured as shown in the logic diagram in Figure 50.
It has the following configuration. Therefore, the integrated circuit element Me14520 is
As shown in the figure, depending on the combination, the 15 bits mentioned above can be
It is possible to realize a counter of The active configuration is to connect four 4-bit counters in series.
This is achieved by
The completed counter has 5 pins from its lowest digit pit.
557 is used as the frequency dividing counter 557, and
6th bit to 13th bit. Up to the 8-bit bit
The counter, that is, the counter 55B, is
Flip-flop 560 for each 4°15th bit
562. 7. The configuration as described above
A counter with a signal input to the direct reset terminal
Reset immediately if power is available.゛ In Figure 48, the buffer register 564 is
Consists of parallel in-parallel out type registers.
Input in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock terminal C input.
Captures and writes the data input to terminal Do-D7.
The data is stored and output to the QO to Q7 terminals. this
The buffer register 564 is that of its Do-D7 terminal.
Each receives the QO to Q7 terminal output of the counter 558.
Each of the QO to Q7 terminal outputs is used as a signal.
It is applied to the Xo-X7 input terminal of the separation circuit β68. Ma
In addition, to the clock terminal C of this buffer register 564,
is the output of comparator 556 through inverter INV8
Therefore, this buffer register 5
64 indicates that the output of the comparator 556 goes from "1" to "0".
When falling, that is, the definite integral in the negative direction by the integrator 554 is
When it is finished, the count data of the counter 558 is taken in.
It will be. Note that the buffer register 564 is specifically
4-bit parallel-in-parallel shown in Figure 38
・Out-type shift register integrated circuit element CD40
35 (manufactured by ROA), placed two in parallel as shown in Figure 52.
This can be easily achieved by doing the following. The signal switching circuit 568 and multiplexer 572 are basically
A multiplexer with the same configuration as both
, integrated circuit element M O14512 (manufactured by Motorola) is applied.
It can be configured using This integrated circuit element MC14512 has the logic shown in FIG.
・The configuration shown in the diagram and the truth table in Figure 54
This integrated circuit element MC145 has the characteristics as shown in
12 is the DI8X8 terminal 0” signal from the XO to X7 terminals.
A with applied voltage. A counter pulse as shown in Fig. 32 is output from each terminal of B and C.
When the timing pulse TBO to TB7 is applied,
In synchronization, the input data of the XO to X7 terminals is
Each of the terminals XO to X7 of the switching circuit 568 sequentially starts from the terminal.
, input of each output signal of the buffer register QO-Q7.
The A, B, and C terminals each have their own voltages.
Counter pulse CTI, CT2. CT4 is input
ing. In addition, the X1 terminal of multiplexer 572
, AD conversion result 1, counter 558 is over
The ADOF signal indicating that the bar has flowed is sent to the X2 terminal.
is the AELK signal strength; the X3 terminal has the AECG signal;
4 terminal has WNUP signal, X5 terminal has AO double signal,
The OU multiplied signal is input to the X6 terminal, and the
A, B, and C terminals each have a counter pulse OTI.
, CT2°CT4 are input. In addition, the switching circuit
Output terminal Z of 568 and output terminal of full 5m plexer 572
The children Z are wired-or connected to each other and the input bus
- Connected to line 370. In such a configuration,
The DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 has an INV
9, the DIS end of the multiplexer 572
If the same signal as the switching control signal input to the
Since the input bus line 370 is
7, the signal switching circuit 568 depending on the state of the switching control signal.
The data input from XO to X7 or the multi
・Various inputs from XO to X7 of the plexer 572
Either one of the signals is the timing pulse TBO
~It will be output in synchronization with TB7. Also, the output of the flip-flop 560 is an inverter.
7 reset of clock pulse CP synchronization through the
It is input to the D terminal of the flop F14, and the above
'The Q output of flip-flop F14 is
D terminal of pulse TBO synchronized flip-flop F15
has been entered. Furthermore, this flip-flop F1
The Q output of 5 is a flip of timing pulse TBO synchronization.
・It is input to the D terminal of flop F16, and this
The Q output of flip-flop F16 is a timing pulse.
input to the D terminal of flip-flop F17 synchronized with STBO.
I feel empowered. In the configuration as described above, the flip-flop F
The timing chart in Figure 55 shows the operations of 14 to F17.
Explain according to the following. Now, the clip flop 560 is coming out.
When the force changes from °1" to 0", i.e. the inverter IN
When the output of V7 changes from “0°” to “1”, the above-mentioned flip
Up foot 7 F 14 Fi s direct dk black
The flip-flop is set in synchronization with the clock pulse CP.
The °1” signal is input to the D terminal of the loop F15.
Then, the clip 70 knob F15 is set to the next timing pattern.
Since it is set in synchronization with the rise of the pulse TBO, its
The output becomes "1". 1 This 7 lip flop F15
The Q output of is input to the flip-flop F16♀D terminal.
Therefore, flip-flop F16 is set to the next timing.
・Since it is set in synchronization with the rising edge of pulse TBO,
The Q output of is "1". In other words, through the above operations
, the Q output of flip-flop F15 and the 7 flip-flop
By adopting the AND condition of the 4 outputs of the flop F16,
Immediately after the output of the comparator 556 changes from 0'' to 1'',
You can get the next 1 word time. Obtained like this
The 1 word time that is displayed indicates that the A-D conversion has been completed.
This is the basis for obtaining the DCE signal. In addition, the above
“1” output from the Q output terminal of clip flop F16
The force is further input to the D terminal of Flip F17.
Flip Flora; 7'F17 is the next timing.
It is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the switching pulse TBO.
The Q output of is "l". In other words, through the above operations, the clip-flop F1
Q output of 6 and 4 outputs of 7' block flop F17.
By adopting the above-mentioned condition, the output of the comparator 556 becomes
The second 1-word time after changing from 0'' to 1'
You can get it. The l word time obtained in this way is
When the ADCE signal is output indicating completion of one word
A-D conversion data is transferred during the 1-word period immediately after the interval.
used for. In addition, the Q output and flip of the flip 70 tube F15
The 4 outputs of flop F16 are timing pulses T
B6 is given to the input AND gate AND9.
However, as a result, as shown in Figure 55, the clip flop
The Q output of Lop 560 changed from 1° to 0.
The above-mentioned unloading is performed at the timing of TB6 in the immediately following 1 word time.
A signal is output from gate AND9, but this signal
The number is the A-D conversion end signal A indicating that the A-D conversion has ended.
Bus line through OR gate OR4 as DCE
It will be put on 366. That is, the flip-flop 5
The Q output of 60 changed from "1" to "0".
, the integrator 554, which had been performing definite integration in the negative direction,
The lamp has been switched, that is, the A-D conversion has completed completely.
This is because it shows what has been done. This will be discussed later.
Details are given below. Also, the Q output and flip-flop of the flip-flop F16 are
The 4 outputs of the top 70 tube F17 are AND gate AN
D10, and as a result, as shown in Figure 55.
, high for the next 1 word after the ADCE signal is output.
A signal that becomes a level is output from the AND gate. The output signal of this ANDl 0 is the data
Through inverter INV9 as a control signal for transfer
It is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568, and
Directly applied to the DIS terminal of multiplexer 572
0 As a result, the next one after which the ADCE signal was output is
The data in buffer register 564, i.e.
, digital data obtained by A-D conversion. Timing pulse T from Z terminal of signal switching circuit 568
The input bus is read sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with BO to TB7.
0 that will be output to pin 370. During this time, the multi
・The above AND gate is connected to the DIS terminal of the plexer 572.
Since the “l.” signal is input from AND10, the output from those two terminals is restricted.
It will be done. That is, under normal conditions, the imp.
For bus 370, multiplexer 572
The same timing pulses TBI to TB6 are output from the two terminals of
-AELK. Signals such as AECG, WNUP, AO, CU, etc. are output.
However, after the A-D conversion is completed, the ADCE signal is output.
and the signal switching circuit 568 only during the next word time.
A stored in buffer register 564 through
-D converted digital data DD is output.
Ru. On the other hand, the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is
TAIMI/G PULSE TB7 through data INVIO
is input to the AND gate AND8 which receives the input of
ing. That is, the Q output of the flip-flop 560
While “0”, the data is output from the AND gate AND8.
A signal synchronized with timing pulse TB7 is output. The output signal of this AND gate AND8 is sent to the integrator 55.
4 is integrating the input analog data in the positive direction.
The buffer is output through the OR gate OR4 as the NT signal indicating
It is placed on the bus line 366. That is, the flip
・Flo, the Q output of Tubu 560 is “0”.
, the integrator 554 inputs the input analog data in the positive direction.
This is because it shows that it is integrated into . In addition,
This will be explained in detail later. On the other hand, the output of the comparator 556 is the clock pulse C
Input to the D terminal of the P-synchronized flip-flop F13.
ing. I admired it. Q output of this flip-flop F13
is also a 7-rip flow synchronized with clock pulse CP.
is input to the D terminal of the chip F12. The flip
The Q output of the flop F13 and the flip F13
12 outputs are given to AND gate AND7.
, this AND gate) The output of AND7 is the OR gate.
Through OR3, the frequency divider counter 557. Kara/ri558
, Flip Flora 7'560.562 each da
It is applied to the direct reset terminal R. This means that after the integrator 554 performs a definite integral in the negative direction,
If the amplifier is switched, forward integration is started.
−H A positive output is obtained from the reset comparator 556.
While there is some delay time (this
depends entirely on the characteristics of the integrator 554), the counter 558
Operation start time and time when positive output starts from comparator 556
Comparator 5 is provided so that there is no difference between
When positive output starts from 56, one clock immediately after that.
time, the frequency division counter 557. counter 558,
Direct reset to flip-flops 560 and 562
Multiply the count start time by color/re558'
This configuration is to match the output start time of the comparator 556. Also, the Q output of flip-flop 562 is connected to the D input terminal.
A flip-flop receiving the output signal of the comparator 556 as a child
It is input to the clock terminal of the loop F18, and the integrator
While the comparator 554 is performing definite integration in the negative direction, the comparator 556
Even though the output of is not inverted from “1” to “0”
In other words, even though the A-D conversion is not completed,
If the counter 558 overflows, the free
The top flop 562 is set and its Q terminal output
Q end of flip-flop F18 clocked by
The configuration is such that the child outputs 1°. This pretend
The Q output signal of flip-flop F18 is the result of A-D conversion.
, A indicating that the counter 558 has overflowed.
to the X1 terminal of multiplexer 572 as a DOF signal.
Given. The operation of the input control section 360 having the configuration as described above is as follows.
In the following, according to the operating characteristic diagrams in Figures 56 and 57,
This will be explained in more detail below. By the way, Figure 56 shows the case when A-D conversion is performed smoothly.
Figure 57 shows the results of AD conversion. Each indicates when an overflow occurs.
Ru. First, when the power is turned on, a power-up clip (not shown) is activated.
A clear signal PUC is output from the circuit, and the frequency division counter
557', counter 558° flip-flop 560
,562. F14°F15. F16. Clear F17
Reset. In this state, the 7 lip flop 560
The Q output is “0”, so the A-D conversion control circuit 55
2, the ramp of the integrator 554 is in the positive direction, and at the same time the input voltage is
Analog data is provided to an integrator 554. At this time, compare
The output of the counter 556 becomes °1", and almost at the same time the counter
558 is a count account of the output pulses of the minute counter 557.
Start a tup. While this integration is being performed, the
The “0” output of the flop 560 is the inverter INVI.
is given to the AND gate AND8 through O,
Therefore, from this AND gate AND8 to OR gate O
Bus line 366 through R4 includes a timing pad.
In synchronization with pulse TB7, integrator 554 outputs the input analog signal.
An INT signal is output indicating that the data is being integrated.
. As mentioned above, during the integration operation as described above, the counter 558 is turned off.
When the bar flows, the output of flip-flop 560
The force becomes °1” and at the same time the frequency division counter 557.
The contents of data 558 become “0” in all pits, and the contents are “0” again.
Start counting. Q of this clip flop 560
Depending on the 11” output from the terminal, the A-D conversion control circuit 5
52 makes the ramp of the integrator 554 negative, and at the same time the reference
The reference level signal from the level generating means 550 is applied to the integrator 5.
Give to 54. At the point when this negative integration starts,
, the integral value of the integrator 554 is
It is proportional to the data. This integration in the negative direction is performed.
While the clip flop 560 is
Since the power continues, AND8 outputs
Since this is regulated, of course the INT signal is not output. As described above, the result of integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554
, the output signal of the integrator 554 falls to a certain level.
In other words, when the integration is completed, the output of the comparator 556 becomes "l".
” to “0”. As a result, the comparator 55
The output signal of 6 is connected to the clock terminal through the inverter INV8.
The buffer register 564 receiving child C is then
At the point, the counter 558 counts s Q O”Q 7 end.
Capture and store the count data output from the child
. In this way, the data is loaded into the buffer register 564.
The calculated counting data is input to the input analog data as mentioned earlier.
is a digital value corresponding to the data. Note that even after the above operations, the counter 558 continues counting operations.
continues, and the counter 558 overflows.
, flip-flop 560 is reset and its Q output
When the force reaches 0°, the clip flop 562 is set.
The Q output becomes 1°. flip flop
The Q output of flip-flop F18 is the Q output of flip-flop F18.
This flip-flop F1
The output of the comparator 556 which is giving an output to the D terminal of 8 is already
Naturally, it is not set because it contains "0". On the other hand, the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is input
Clip 70 tube F14 D through converter INV7
In order to give “1” input to the terminal, the timing shown in Figure 55.
As is clear from the pulse, the flip-flop 560
The first timing pulse after the Q output of
During one word starting from STBO, AND gate AN
From D9, ADC synchronized to timing pulse TB6
The E signal is routed to bus line 3 through OR gate OR4.
66. That is, in this system, the integrator 5
54, count during and after definite integration in the negative direction.
When the continuing counter 558 overflows
This point marks the end of the A-D conversion, so the following
As mentioned above, the Q output of flip-flop 560 is “
The end of A-D conversion is the moment the change from “1” to “0” occurs.
This means that it is detecting the end of the process. Also, the 0th order word time when the ADCE signal is output
(As shown in FIG. 55, the AND gate ANDIO
``l'' is output for 1 word from , and this ``1° output is
is applied to the DIS terminal of multiplexer 572, and the
Regulates the signal output from the two terminals of the multiplexer 572.
, at the same time as a “0” signal through inverter INV9.
This °1 signal is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568.
“The timing is
In synchronization with pulses TBO to TB7, the buffer register
2 outputs of A-D conversion data DD stored in 564
sequentially from the lower digit to the input bus line 370 through the terminal.
I will send it out. On the other hand, the reset occurs due to the overflow of the counter 558.
The Q output of the turned-on flip-flop 560 is A-D.
*It is given to the conversion control circuit 552, but it receives the Q output.
The A-D conversion control circuit 552 once controls the integrator 554.
, clear, switch that lamp in the positive direction, and turn it on.
Force analog data is input to the integrator 554. negative
Direction 1. The integrator 55 whose ramp is switched in the positive direction from
4 does not start integration immediately, but due to the characteristics of the element.
, since the integration starts after a certain delay time, the product
When the output of divider 554 exceeds a certain level, comparator 5
It takes a certain amount of time until 56 starts outputting “L”.
. On the contrary, counter 558 is
After the bar flow, all bits are zero and the next
Since the counting operation has started, the integrator 554
There is a risk that the log data will not be accurately integrated.
Ru. Flip is provided to prevent this.
・Flotsub F12. F13. And gate AND7?
It is a direct reset mechanism with
At the minute, the comparator 556 starts outputting “1”.
, the frequency division counter 557 . counter
558. Once flip-flops 560 and 562 are closed,
Reset the rear and make a new calculation from the state of all pits 0".
It is intended to start a number. The operations described above are performed repeatedly, and one
ADC that indicates the end of A-D conversion every t-D conversion cycle
E signal and A-D converted digital data D
D is output. In addition, as mentioned earlier, the input bus
From line 370, the analog-to-digital converted digital data
Except for the word time when the data DD is output, the AELK signal
signal, AECG signal, WNUP signal, AO double signal CU signal
is repeated in synchronization with timing pulses TBr to TB6.
This is what is output. Note that the input value is determined by integration in the positive direction by the integrator 554.
After obtaining the integral value corresponding to the analog data, the said integral
When performing integration in the negative direction by the unit 554, the product
Before the output of the divider 554 falls below a certain level
, that is, while the output of the comparator 556 remains at °1", the output of the comparator 556 remains at
Counter 558 overflows and flips 70
When knob 562 is set, the output of comparator 556
The clip-flop F18, which uses power as the D input, is
The A-D conversion result is output from the Q output terminal.
The ADOF signal indicating that the bar has flowed is output, and the
is applied to the X1 terminal of multiplexer 572. on the other hand,
At the same time as the counter 558 overflows, the flip occurs.
Since the flop 560 is reset, its Q output is
The receiving A-D conversion control circuit 552 has an integrator 554.
At this point, the output of comparator 554 is 1” to clear
It falls to “0” from there. Therefore, the output of the comparator 554 is connected to the inverter INV8.
The buffer register provided to the clock pin through
The star 564 takes the contents of the counter 558 at that time.
However, at this time, the counter 558 overflows.
Since all pits are in the “0” state, the buffer register
The data taken into the star 564 is data of all pits 0".
It is. In addition, as described above, the result of A-D conversion is
Even if the flip-flop 560 is
Based on the output, the ADCE and INT signals are
In 366. By the way, when shooting with a flash, the A-D conversion results may be overflowing.
・-The flow is caused by manually setting the aperture on the camera device side.
As a signal indicating that it is necessary to
A-b converter as analog convex signal for aperture control
If the capacity is given so that 382 overflows
It is. Therefore, at this time, the buffer register 564
Of course, the data of all the Pids that have been imported will be shared with the system.
Then it will be ignored. As described above, from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 3
Analog data and various conditions or conditions captured in 60
The state determination signal is sent to the central control via the input bus line 370.
A signal that is applied to the section 362 and also indicates the state of A-D conversion.
The DC, E and INT signals are placed on bus line 366.
It will be done. . Here, we will return to the central control unit 362 again to continue the explanation. In the central control unit 362, the bus line 366 is
power bus selector 578. Said input bus
- Selector 578 provides timing to bus line 366.
・/ADCE signal input in synchronization with pulse TB6
The signal detected and coming on input bus line 370 is
Is it a condition signal? Is it A-D conversion data DD?
The input from the input bus line 370 is determined as follows.
It outputs a signal that instructs the processing of the force signal. On the other hand, the input line 370 is
62 condition register 574 and signal switching circuit 576.
Normally, the signal switching circuit 576 is an A-D converter.
Circulation circuit of D register 516 for storing conversion data
It is acting as. The condition register 574 is connected to the input bus selector 37.
When a signal commanding condition import is input from 8,
ADOF signal on the input bus line 370
, AELK signal, AECG signal, WNUP signal, AO signal
signal, CU signal according to timing pulses TBI to TB6.
It is something that is captured and memorized. Further, the signal switching circuit 576 normally includes the D register 5
16 contents DR are circulated, but the input bus
A signal is input from the receiver 578 to command data acquisition.
A on the input bus line 370 then
-D conversion data, DD as timing pulse TBO~T
Capture and store according to B7. Therefore, the condition register 574 and the D register 516
is constantly updated through the input bus RIE/370.
setting conditions or operating conditions and A-D conversion data DD.
It stores the input data, especially A-D conversion data.
The acquisition cycle is the same as the A-D conversion cycle of the A-D converter.
It's the same. Note that the signal switching circuit 576 operates under the conditions described above.
It receives the AELK signal input from the register 574,
When the AELK signal is input, even if the input bus
- A signal from the selector 578 instructing data acquisition
Even if input, the data DR of the D register 516 is not circulated.
Do not continue to import new A-D conversion data.
stomach. Through such a configuration, this camera system
I'm going to the pool. The above-mentioned condition signals from the input bus line/37o
and AD conversion data DD to the central control unit 362
The configuration will be explained in more detail below. Now, the input control unit 360 has completed the A-D conversion, and
The signal ADCE shown is synchronized with the timing pulse TB6.
If you are caught on bus line 366 by
input bus line 3 at the next word time the signal is output.
70 is synchronized with timing pulse TBO~TB7.
Then, the A-D conversion data DD is output sequentially from the lower digits and no error occurs.
As already mentioned, the central system
The control unit 362 side was also synchronized with timing pulse TB6.
At the next word time after detecting the ADCE signal,
input bus line in synchronization with the switching pulses TBO~TB7.
By loading the input signal 370 into the D register 516, the previous
Accumulate A-D conversion data DD in the D register 516
I can do things. Please note that there are no input controls for word times other than those listed above.
It is on the input bus line 370 from the control section 360'.
are various signals and therefore timing pulses.
Based on the condition register, the signal on the input bus line 370 is
All you have to do is import it into the star 574. Therefore, the input bus selector 578 is set to pass line 3.
66 signal is taken in and ADCE is performed at the timing of TB6.
Detects that a signal is input, and inputs the next 1 word time.
Capturing A-D conversion data from bus line 370
It is sufficient to adopt a configuration similar to that in which commands are given. From this point of view, in this embodiment, the input bus selector
578, a configuration as shown in FIG. 58 is applied. That is,
, as is clear from the figure, the bus line 366 is
7 lip-flops F18 synchronized with the switching pulse TB7.
Introduced to the D terminal, the Q of this flip 70 tube F1B
The output is a flip-flop with timing pulse TBO synchronization.
In the configuration where 0 is given to the D terminal of the loop F19,
In each of the 7 lip-flops F18. Ft9 is the 59th
The operation will be as shown in the figure. In other words, the timing
The flip-flop F18 synchronized with pulse TB7 is
When the D terminal input is at least TB6, °1"
i.e., the ADCE signal on bus line 366.
Not set unless . At this time, flip-flop
The Q output of step F18 is “0”, so this °0” output
Timing pulse TBO synchronization where power is received at D terminal
The 7 lip-flop F19 is in the reset state and its
4 output ■ is “1”. This ■signal is
condition register 574;
captures the contents of input bus line 370 for
It is something that can be done. The detailed configuration of the condition register 574 is shown in FIG.
As shown in the figure, the shift register is
Data is captured in synchronization with SRI and the falling edge of the clock.
It is composed of a latch L. . The shift register SRI connects its D terminal to the input bus line.
connected to the clock pulse CP.
synchronously inputs data on input bus line 370.
There is. In such a configuration, the input bus line 370
The 'signal placed on each clock pulse CP is
All are sequentially captured in this shift register SRI, and each clock is
In synchronization with each lock pulse CP, from output terminal QO to Q
5 is output sequentially. Therefore, in this state,
From the QO to Q5 output terminals of the shift register SRI
The output data of is all uncertain data, but the input
A-D conversion data DD is on the bus parallel line 370.
9 times when the ADCE signal is not present on bus line 336.
Timing during the time period excluding the next 1 word sent.
At the time of pulse TB7, the Q of shift register SRI is
CU times signal and AO times signal from O~Q5 output terminals respectively.
WNUP signal, AECG signal, AELK signal, ADOF
This means that a signal is being output. This is the CU times signal
Timing pulse TB6 has AO double signal timing.
The WNUP signal is the timing pulse TBS, and the WNUP signal is the timing pulse TBS.
B4, the AECG signal is applied to timing pulse TB3,
AECG signal goes to TB2', AELK signal goes to TBI,
The ADOF signal is synchronized with TBO and the input bus
This becomes obvious when you consider that it can be carried on In366. Therefore, the QO to Q5 outputs of the shift register SRI
The output from each terminal is received by the Do-D5 terminal.
A timing signal is applied to the latch L that synchronizes with the falling edge of the clock.
Gives a falling signal only while pulse TB7 is being output.
CU, AO, WNUP,
Capture and store AECG, AELK, and ADOF signals
I can do it. In this example, the input bus select
AND which receives the input of the output signal ■ from the vector 578
・Input timing pulse TB7 to gate AND11
By doing this, the next word after the ADCE signal is output.
Timing pulse TB7 whose output is regulated only by time
Obtain a signal synchronized with
It is applied to the AND gate AND12 which receives the input of CP.
A signal synchronized to the clock pulse CP by
, that is, multiple fall operations are performed during timing pulse TB7.
This signal is used as an input signal to the latch.
It is applied to the L clock terminal. As described above, the latch L is formed through the configuration as described above.
The parallel in 9, 2 parallel out registers have
, the next ADCE signal is carried on bus line 366.
A new setting is made every 1 word time, except for 1 word time.
A signal input regarding a condition or operating state is made and updated.
Note that the latch L is formed by:
Parallel in, parallel out register BRI Q
From the O terminal, there is a CU multiplied signal. From the 40 terminal, there is a signal at τ, '
From the Q1 terminal, the AO times signal % From the Q1 terminal, the T million signal
, the WNUP signal is sent from the Q2 terminal, and the WNU signal is sent from the mouth terminal.
The P signal is from the Q3 terminal, the AECG signal is from the 11 terminal.
are the AECG signal, and the AELK signal is from the Q4 terminal.
The ABLK signal is output from the Q4 terminal, and the ADO signal is output from the Q5 terminal.
F times signal % ADOF signal is output from Q5 terminal respectively.
It is something that will be done. Note that this condition register 4 574 is specifically the 61st
This can be realized by a circuit configuration as shown in the figure. same
As is clear from the figure, the 60th illustrated shift register S
RI is an integrated circuit element CD4015, and latch L is an integrated circuit element CD4015.
It is constructed using two product circuit elements CD4042. The integrated circuit element CD4015 (manufactured by RCA) is shown in FIG.
The logic diagram is shown in
It is a 4-pit static shift register.
Then, the Q31 output is given as the D2 terminal input,
It essentially constitutes an 8-bit shift register. this
In the embodiment, 6 pits of these are shift register SRI.
used as Moreover, the integrated circuit element CD4042 is
We have already made it clear in the logic diagram in Figure 40.
Similarly, it is a 4-bit latch whose clock input is
Parallel loading of data is performed in synchronization with the falling edge of the clock.
If the lock input has a configuration in which data is held for a period of 0°,
do. In addition, if two of these latch CD4042 are used in parallel,
It is possible to construct an 8-bit latch by
It is obvious that 6 bits of the
I use the Tsuto as a lunch L. On the other hand, the D terminal I terminal of the 58th illustrated flip-flop F18
1° to the timing of TB6 from bus line 366.
“If a signal is given, i.e. if there is an AECE signal,
In this case, the frisive flop F18 is set to the timing of TB7.
The Q output is set to “1”. Therefore,
Timing pulse T B O receiving the Q output
Synchronous flip-flop F19 is activated for the next word time.
Set in synchronization with the rising edge of the first timing pulse TBO.
0 which makes the Q output ``1''.
Rip-flop F18 is set and then the next tie
Ming no (maintains this state only until the rise of Lus TB7)
Therefore, the D input of flip-flop F19 is
The next timing when this flip-flop is set
・At the time of rise of pulse TBO, it becomes “0” immediately.
ing. Therefore, flip-flop F19 is TBO
It is one word time from the rising edge to the rising edge of the next TBO.
The set state is maintained, and the Q output is also this one word.
The signal becomes '1' only for the time. This ■ signal is given to the signal switching circuit 576.
, the signal switching circuit 576 receiving the above-mentioned ■ signal
cycling of the contents of the input bus 516 is stopped.
Data on line 370 from TBO to TB7
Only one word is introduced into the D register 516. In addition, this
The data introduced between one word of
Then, multiply the input line 370 only during this l word.
This is the A-D conversion data DD given. In addition, like this
The data loaded into the D register 516 is transferred to the next data.
Circulate through the signal switching circuit 576 until the data is input.
I will be forced to do so. Details of the signal switching circuit 576 and D register 516
The configuration is as shown in the circuit diagram in Figure 63.
Integration circuit of 8-bit shift register as shown in the diagram
A road element CD4021 (manufactured by RCA) is used. In the configuration shown in FIG. 63, the AND gate AND13
are the Q outputs of the 58th illustrated flip-flop F19 and
and the QO output AELK of switch L shown in Fig. 60 is applied.
Therefore, it is not in the AE lock state, that is, the AELK
A signal whose signal is “1” and which commands data capture.
) is “0”, the output of this AND gate AND13
is °0''. Therefore, at this time, the AND gate A
AND gate AN directly receiving the output of NDl 3
D14 has its output regulated, and
The output of l3 is input through INV9.
Since ANDl5 becomes conductive, D
The contents DR of the register 516 are input from the Q8 terminal to the AND signal.
Cycle through gate AND15, said OR gate OR5
I will be forced to do so. On the other hand, the Q output of the flip-flop F19, i.e.
Even when the signal commanding data acquisition is “L”, A
When in the E-lock state, the AE LK double signal becomes 0”, so
Therefore, the output of the AND gate AND13 becomes "O".
D register 516 is connected from input bus line 370 to
A/D conversion data is not imported, and the game is
AND15, its content D through OR gate OR5
R, that is, the previously captured A-D conversion data DD is kept in circulation.
It will be held. On the other hand, if it is not in the AE lock state, that is, the AELK
1” and the flip-flop F19
Q output■, that is, the signal that commands data acquisition is °1
”, then the output of this AND' gate AND13 is
1, so at this time the above AND game) AND
The AND gate AND14 receiving the output of
The output of the AND gate AND13 is inverted.
and game inputted through the computer NV9)A
The output of ND15 is regulated. Therefore, the input bus
Q of said clip-flop F19' on input 370
The A-D conversion data is carried only while 1 output ■ is “1”.
The data DD passes through the AND gate AND14.
Timing pulses TBO to TB7 are input to the D register 516.
The data will be imported sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with . As described above, through the configuration described above, ``the input control section 36
A-D conversion data DD obtained in 0 and various conditions or
The status signal is taken into the central control unit 362.
. Now, in Figure 30, 500 is the arithmetic circuit and the instruction
% 'A register according to the operation instruction from the application ROM 504.
Data AR of register 510 and data selector 502
perform the required operation with the specified data.
It is structured as follows. In addition, at this time, from the instruction ROM 504
The output operation instructions are the eight operation controls explained earlier.
It includes routines, and one for each shooting mode.
The arithmetic control routine will be selectively executed. The arithmetic circuit 500 has a B register in addition to the A register 510.
along with auxiliary registers such as a register 512 and a C register 514.
work Note that 506 is the data of the B register 512.
data A from the A register 510.
game for writing R), 508 is the C register mentioned above.
The data CR of the register 514 can be circulated,
A gate for writing data AR from 10.
be. The data selector 502 is a, b, c. Input from 9 terminals of d+ e+ ft gt ht 1
One of the input data is input to the instruction R.
The arithmetic circuit 5 selectively operates according to instructions from the OM504.
00. From terminal a of the data selector 502, there is a film feeling.
The degree data DTSV is sent from the b terminal to the open aperture value data DT.
AO is output from the C terminal, bending error data DTAC is output from the d terminal.
Shutter speed data DTTV is sent from the terminal, and shutter speed data DTTV is sent from the C terminal.
The aperture value data DTAV will be input, but these
data, DTSV, DTAO, D, TAC, DTTV
, it has already been described how DTAV is obtained.
That's right. Further, from the terminal f of the data selector 502, a fixed
Some fixed data stored in data ROM534
from the instruction ROM 504.
The specified data is imported. The data stored in the fixed data ROM 534 is
, C3TO other characteristics where all bits of data are “0°”
C3TC representing fixed data. All pits in C3TD and C3TE data are “l”.
C3TF, minimum shutter speed that can be controlled by body 4
Data representing degree TM I N, cannot be controlled with body 4
Stator TMAX, which indicates the maximum shutter speed
Displays shutter speeds that can be synchronized with strobes for flash photography.
Was TSYN. Constants C3TI, C3T2 . Photography lens used
The maximum aperture value AMAX etc. of position 2, but these data
is based on the command from the instruction ROM504.
selectively applied to terminal f of data selector 502
. Regarding the data AMAX regarding the maximum aperture value,
are stored in the fixed data ROM 534.
These aperture values are from the lens device 2 to the body 4 side.
Data regarding the maximum aperture value imported into AMAX'
It is selected and output as appropriate based on the above information. By the way, the fixed data is written in the ROM 534.
Fixed data includes constants for various calculations and lens device 2.
or mechanical constraints due to body 4, such as shutter speed.
Regarding the upper and lower limits, etc., the lens device 2 and the body
Performance of 4, calculation method or data setting and restriction method, etc.
It is set as appropriate depending on. Also, a terminal/child g of the data selector 502. D registers 516.h and i respectively. B register 5
12. The respective contents of C register 514, DD, BR
, CR will be selectively captured. Note that among the terminals a to i of the data selector 502,
, which terminal should be used to import data to the arithmetic circuit?
Everything depends on the commands from the instruction ROM504.
This is determined by the data selector 502.
All selected data is introduced into the arithmetic circuit 500.
. The arithmetic circuit 500 is connected to the instruction/y/o/ROM5.
04, the data is stored in the A register 510.
Importing data selected by data selector 502
and the data AR of the A register 5'ro.
Data selected by the data selector 502
Perform the necessary calculations between the
Accumulates to 0, carries or borrows as a result of the above operation.
When it comes out, set the carry clip 70 tube 540.
The contents of the A register 510 AR and the B register
512 contents BR or C register 514 contents CR
It performs calculation control operations such as exchanging with
. Now, an installer that provides arithmetic control instructions to the arithmetic circuit 500 will be described.
The traction ROM 504 will be explained. Instruction RO provided in the central control unit 362
As mentioned earlier, M504 has eight calculation control routines.
These eight routines contain condition signal storage circuits.
The S P DW signal output from the path 548, the ASLC signal
AO multiplication signal output from the signal and condition register 574
and CU multiplier signal status. Said 5PDW letter
according to the signal, ASLC signal, AO times signal, CU times signal status
, the arithmetic control routine of the instruction ROM 504
The program selector 580 determines the
Ru. The instruction ROM 504 stores the program.
The routine selected and set by the program selector 580
configured to execute and output control signals to the system
However, it is provided to execute each routine.
This is the program counter 582'. this pro
Gram counter 582 has a latch on its inhibit terminal.
However, this launch 584 is
After the first A-D conversion is completed, some A-D conversion data D
Unless D is obtained, the program counter 582
The program counter 582 is
It is provided to regulate the counting operation of the input bar.
The first ADCE signal is detected by the selector 578.
At the same time, the restriction is lifted and the program counter is
582 counting operation is started. The program counter 582 receives a timing pulse T.
A structure that counts up by one for each BO.
This system has virtually no timing
During one word from pulse TBO to TB7, the above-mentioned
One step calculation system based on traction ROM504
The work will be done. From then on, the program counter 582 is continuously repeated.
Repeat counting operation is performed, and the counting operation progresses to a certain step.
It outputs a signal indicating this every time it fails. This signal is
The instruction ROM 504 contains one routine.
This signal indicates that the calculation control has ended.
598. This signal is transmitted to the logic circuit 598.
Taking into account the time factor, one is that the operation has finished.
bus signal in synchronization with timing pulse TBS to indicate
As the CALE signal carried on line 366, one is
The next timing pulse T after the CALE signal is issued.
Output from BO and transfer data on output bus line 374.
It is output as an R8ND signal for loading data. As mentioned above, the program selector 580° program
Ram counter 582. Instruction ROM50
The configuration of the instruction ROM 504 will be described in detail below.
and logic circuit 598, latch circuit 584, program/
Block of selector 58o1 program counter 582
This figure shows a block configuration diagram. In the figure, a program selector 580 is an integrated circuit element C.
It is composed of D4019 (manufactured by RCA),
The logic of this integrated circuit element CD4019 is shown in FIG.
and or select as shown in diagram
・It is a gate. Additionally, the program counter 582 is integrated circuit element CD4.
024 (manufactured by RC'A).
The logic of the integrated circuit element CD4024 is shown in FIG.
・It is a ripple counter as shown in the diagram.
. The program selector 580 has the KA terminal connected to the program selector 580.
The CU times signal which is the output of the condition register 574, and also the KB
CU double signal is input to the terminal, and strobe shooting mode
If not, input signals from A1 and A2 terminals to DI and B2.
Outputs to each output terminal of
. Output each input signal of B2 terminal to each output terminal of DI and B2
It is configured as follows. The program selector 580
The output of AND16 is given to the A1 terminal of
However, this AND gate AND16 is 5PDW
The signal is obtained through the AO multiplied signal inverter INVIO
The AO multiplied signal is input. In addition, the selector 58
ADOF signal to B1 terminal, ASLC signal to A2 terminal
, the AO multiplied signal signal is applied to the B2 terminal through the OR gate OR6.
ASLC signal is input. In such a configuration, the program selector 580
is when the CU multiplier signal is 11", that is, in strobe shooting mode.
At the same time, the four arithmetic control programs are also
”, that is, when in strobe shooting mode, 4 calculation controls
Choosing each program is a wild thing, and the whole
specify the eight arithmetic control routines previously described as
It is something that can be done. The instruction ROM5Q'4 has eight input terminals.
28 (= 25) depending on the input combination of child AO-A7
6) The step command can be executed, but this execution
The example system has 8 routines of 32 steps.
The A5 to A7 terminals
The eight operations explained earlier depend on the combination of inputs from ′.
The calculation control routine is executed according to the input from the AO-A4 terminal.
Each routine of 32 steps is executed. this
The instruction ROM 504 has its A7 input terminal
A CU double signal is given to the child, and A6. Each piece of A5
Each of the program selectors 580 is connected to the power terminal respectively.
D1. Receives signal input from D2 output terminal. In addition, each input terminal of AO-A4 of the ROM 504 has
Receives each output of program counter 582 from Q1 to Q5.
It's on. Note that the program counter 582 is. Synchronized with each falling edge of timing pulse TBO,
It has a structure that seems to be counting up. child
depends on the count up of the program counter 582.
The instruction ROM 504 begins to advance at the first time.
As a result of A-D conversion, some A-D is stored in the D register 516.
D conversion data DD must be stored, and the power supply
After the switch is turned on, the A-D conversion is not completed, and the D register 5
No A-D conversion data DD is stored in 16.
The program counter 582 continues to count up.
Doing so may lead to malfunction. Therefore this system
In the system, input control is performed without AE lock.
After the A-D conversion is completed on the unit 360 side, the
program counter 582 starts counting up operation.
The structure is as shown in the beginning. That is, the central control unit 362
Flip flow of input path selector 578 provided
The Q output ■ of the top F19 (Fig. 58) and the system AE robot
An antenna receiving an AELK signal indicating that it is not in a locked state.
(Do game) AND21 output to J- type clip flow
By introducing the J terminal of the chip F20, the AE lock
when the first ADCE signal is on the path line 36.
I was put on board 6. If the flip-flop F20
is set, and its Q output is 1''. Therefore, the above
The Q terminal output of flip-flop F20 is connected to inverter I.
NVII, Direct Redirect via OR Gate QR7
Program counter input to set terminal R8T
The data 582 is the set of flip 70 tube F20.
At the same time, the direct reset terminal R8T input becomes “0”.
and synchronized with the falling edge of timing pulse TBt.
Start count up operation. The instruction ROM 504 has eight output terminals.
It is equipped with OPO to OP7, but it has 3 bits of OR7 to OP5.
The instruction code is composed of the output of the
The operand code is made up of bits. This implementation as such instructions/ROM 504
For example, an integrated circuit whose block diagram is shown in Figure 68.
Element 1702A (manufactured by Intel) is used. The output code of this instruction ROM 504 is
It has the meaning as shown in the code explanatory diagram in Figure 69. Now, the instruction code will be explained. In other words, OR7 indicates whether this instruction is related to operation.
, which determines whether it concerns data exchange;
When OR7 is “0”, it commands calculation, and when it is “1”, it commands data.
This is a command to exchange data. When OR7 is “0”, that is, when a calculation command is issued, OR6
is the one that commands the content of the calculation, and OR6 is “0”.
When the time is "l", addition is commanded, and when "l", subtraction is commanded. At this time, OR5 is still instructing the processing of the calculation result.
When OR5 is “0”, the operation result is stored in A register.
510, and when OR5 is “lo”, the operation result is A
A command is given to record in the register 510. Conversely, OR7 is 1", that is, data exchange command force;
At the time, OR6 commands the conditions for data exchange, and O
When R6 is “0°, carry flip-flop '5
It is invalid when 40 is in the reset state, and OR6 is
'', then the flip-flop 540 is reset.
Valid when set. At this time, OR5 also commands the conditions for data exchange.
When OR5 is °0'',
It is invalid when the drop 540 is in the set state, and OR5
When is 3 “l”, gear 1 no clip flop 5
It is valid when 40 is in the set state. Consider all of the above individually and

[In φ〈, OR7 is
When OR6 is “0” and OR5 is “0°”, when OR5 is “0°”
The contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code
Calculate the specified data and store the result in the A register.
Since it is not written to the star 510, in the end,
means not doing anything. In the following explanation, this
The command is called N0OP.0 When 0P7 is °0°, OR6 force; at 0°, OR5 force; °1
”, the content AR of the A register 510 and the operand
・The result after adding the data specified by the code
commands the so-called addition of writing into the A register 51o.
It is something that In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as ADD. When OF2 is “o,”, OF2 is “1” and OPs is
When the value is 0, the contents of the A register 510 are used as the operand.
subtracts the data specified by the code, but the result
This means that the A register 51゛o is not written.
, this operation is based on the result of the operation, the carry, rather than the result of the operation.
- Check whether flip-flop 540 is set or not.
After all, the contents of the A register 510 and the opera
The data specified by the command code is compared.
be. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as LT. When OF2 is “0”, OP6 is “1” and OPs is 1°.
When , the operand
After subtracting the data specified in the code, the result is
Instructs the so-called subtraction to be written to the A register 510.
It is something that In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SU.
It is called B. When OF2 is “l” (7), OF2 is “O” and OF2 is
When it is “0”, the contents of A register 5゛1o and the operand are
The exchange of data specified by the carry code is
Even if the flip 70 knob 540 is reset,
It also commands that it is invalid even if it is set.
In the end, the command is to do nothing. Later theory
In the Japanese language, this command is called N0OP2. When OF2 is “1”, OF2 is “o” and OF2 is °1
°, the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand command
The exchange of data specified by the code is a carry flip.
・It is invalid when the flop 540 is reset.
, indicates that it is valid if it is set.
In the end, it was a carry flip-flop 540.
command to exchange data only when is set.
It is something that exists. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWC.
It is called. When 0P7iE"l", OP 6 Ka"i", OF2
When is “0”, the contents AR and operan of A register 510
The exchange of data specified by the code
Valid when lip 70 knob 540 is reset.
is set, indicating that it is invalid.
After all, it is a carry flip-flop
Exchange data only when the 540 is reset.
It is something that is being commanded. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWN.0 When P7 is "l"< 0, OF2 is "l" and OF2 is
l'', the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand
The exchange of data commanded by the code is
Even if P.Frog 540 is reset, it is not set.
It is a command that is valid even if the key is used.
regardless of the state of carry flip-flop 540.
This is a command to perform data exchange. Later theory
In the Japanese language, this command is called SWU. In addition, in the case of the data exchange explained above, the A register 51
The operand of the partner with which data is exchanged with 0 is the B register.
A register '5 if the register 512 or C register 514
10 contents AR can be written to the operand,
If the operand is fixed data or setting data, the A register
It is not possible to write the contents AR of the star 510 to the operand.
do not have. Therefore, in this case, operands rather than data exchange
data is unilaterally written to the A register 510,
This is the so-called data reading operation, but the 5 example systems
In particular, let us distinguish between data exchange instructions and data read instructions.
First, this data exchange instruction is used when the operand is a register.
only acts as a data exchange instruction, and the operand is a register
Acts as a data read command in cases other than data.
It is. As mentioned above, this instruction ROM 504
, which has the eight instruction systems described above. Next, the operand code will be explained. OF2 indicates whether the operand is fixed data or variable data.
It distinguishes whether it is evening or not, and OF2 is “0”.
When the operand is fixed data, fixed data ROM
Fixed data specified by 534 to OP3 to OPO
This specifies the data. Also, when OF2 is o”,
The operand is variable data, and the data selector 5
Variable data input from each input terminal of a-i of 02
is specified. , when OF2 is '0', that is, fixed
Regarding the data, it is specified by OP3~OPO.
The data included are OPa, OF2. OPl, opo is 000
0", C3TQ data of all pits 0, "0010
”, C3TC data of “11100000”, “0
100・”, C3TD data of “11010000”
C3TB of “00011111” when “0110”
C3TF data of all pits “l” when data is 0111”
OPa, OF2. O.P.I. No control with camera device body 4 when OPO is 1000”
Minimum shutter speed TMIN, “1001”
When is the highest speed that can be achieved without control with camera device body 4?
When the creeping speed fTMA4 is "1010", it is controlled by lens device 2.
When the maximum aperture value that can be controlled is AMA4, "1011" the camera
Strobe synchronization shutter controlled by 'TJ1j in device body 4.
When the data speed TSYN is "11.00", the
1 constant C8T1, second for calculation when “1101”
This is each data of constant C3T2. When OF2 is '1'', that is, regarding variable data, O
The data specified by P3 to OPo are OPa, OF
2. When OPI and OPO are 1000″, D register 516
Contents DR, that is, AD conversion data
T D J"1001"O time D T 8 V, "1
010"+7) DTTV, 1011" DT
AV, DTAO when ``1100NO'', ``1101''
+7) Time DTAC, 1110'' Time B register contents B
DTBR% where R is “1111” C cash register
The content of the star is CB (7) DTCR. Address and instruction of the above instruction R,0M504
Figure 70(a)~
Shown in (h). What is shown in FIG. 70(a) is the instruction R
,0 When the A7 to A5 terminal inputs of 0M504 are all 0"
When the selected routine is not in flash or shooting mode,
Is the shutter speed a priority and the aperture is not narrowed down?
Or it is a routine applied when in external photometry mode. This corresponds to the third routine shown in Figure 29.
Ru. Also, what is shown in FIG. 70(b) is the instruction
A7 of version ROM504. A5 terminal when A6 terminal input is 0”
This is a routine that is selected when the child input is “l”.
When not in shooting mode, it is set to aperture priority and the aperture is stopped down.
Routing applied when not set or in external metering mode
It is. This is the first route shown in Figure 29.
/ corresponds to Also, what is shown in Fig. 70 (C) is the instruction
A7 of Option ROM504. When A5 terminal input is 0”, A
The routine selected when the 6-terminal input is 'l'
When not in Robo shooting mode, the aperture is prioritized and the aperture is narrowed down.
and the rules applied when not in external metering mode.
It's Chin. This is the second rule that follows from Figure 29.
Corresponds to chin. Also, what is shown in FIG. 70(d) is the instruction
The A7 terminal input of the ROM504 is 60”, and the A6.A5
This is a routine selected when the terminal input is “L”.
When not in Robo shooting mode, shutter priority is set and the aperture is set to aperture.
applied when not in external metering mode.
It's routine. This is the fourth point shown in Figure 29.
Corresponds to a routine. Also shown in FIG. 70(e) is the instruction
A7 terminal input of ROM504 is l', A6. A5 terminal
This routine is selected when the input is '0', and the strobe
When the flash is fully charged and enters flash photography mode, the flash
The aperture value of lens device 2 is set on the camera device side, and the aperture value of lens device 2 is set at the same time.
When the shutter speed on the camera device side is controlled semi-automatically
This is the routine that is applied. This route will be used in the following explanation.
This routine is called the fifth routine. Also, Figure 70 (0 is the instruction
A7 of ROM504. A5 terminal input is l” and A6 terminal input
This is a routine selected when the force is 0", and the strobe device
The aperture value of lens device 2 is set on the side, and at the same time the camera
Applies when the shutter speed on the shutter side is controlled fully automatically.
Ruru routine. In the following explanation, this routine will be referred to as the sixth
This is called the routine. Also, what is shown in Figure 70(g) is the instruction
A7. of R, OM504. A6 terminal input is 1″ and A5 end
This routine is selected when the child input is '0'.
The aperture value of device 2 is set on the camera device side, and the camera
Applicable when the shutter speed on the device side is semi-automatically controlled.
The routine to be performed is Ruru. In the following explanation, this routine will be
This routine is called the seventh routine. Also shown in Figure 70(h) is the instruction
A7 of ROM504. A6. When the A5 terminal input is l”
In the selected routine, the aperture value of lens device 2 is set to
Shutter speed set on the device side and at the same time on the camera device side
This is a routine that is applied when the system is controlled fully automatically. In the following explanation, this routine will be referred to as the eighth routine.
. By the way, when shooting using an external metering adapter,
The first or third route depends on the state of the ASLC signal.
However, in that case, unnecessary calculation steps are required.
is not executed. In other words, photometry using an external photometry adapter
In this case, the photographic lens device 2 during photometry for TTL photometry.
There is no need to consider the open aperture value AVo and the bending error AVc.
Therefore, when executing the first or third routine,
Perform supplementary calculations for the open aperture value AVo and the bending error AVc.
You can ignore the step. By the way, the first and third
This step in the routine is shown in Figure 70(a), Φ).
As is clear from the 8th step ADD-DTAO and the 8th step ADD-DTAO.
This is a 9-step ADD-DTAC. Also, especially when executing the 5th to 8th routines,
If the A-D converter overflows,
The signal ADOF indicates the lens device during strobe photography.
A message indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of 2.
However, by executing the 1st to 8th routines,
If the A-D converter 382 overflows when
If so, the signal ADOF indicating this is obtained as a result of photometry.
This indicates that the data is too large. Therefore, on the spot
It is necessary to issue some kind of warning if the
The contents of a register whose contents are unknown after
It is necessary to set the maximum capacity of the register, that is, all bits are “L”.
Ru. This operation adds film sensitivity Sv1 to the photometry result BVo.
When adding the open aperture value AVO1 bending error AVc etc.
Treated completely equivalent to overflow of A register 510
I can do things. Therefore, in this embodiment, strobe photography mode is used.
When not, the A-D converter 382 overflowed.
The field answer is a step to execute the first to fourth calculation routines.
During the process, the next step after the addition step mentioned above, i.e.
In step 8, carry flip-flop 5
Direct” set signal h5 is given to 40 and the carry
- Configured so that flip-flop 540 is set
It is something that will be done. Furthermore, when executing the first to fourth routines,
The resulting aperture value or shutter speed is the aperture of the lens device 2.
Controlled by maximum or minimum limit or body 4
If you exceed the shutter speed limit that is possible,
It is necessary to issue a warning indicating the This is the displayed aperture value or the displayed value on the digital display 402.
This can be easily achieved by blinking the shutter speed.
I can do it. Such an operation will result in an aperture value or a
After the shutter speed is derived, the calculation result is calculated as the aperture value or shutter speed.
In the step of determining whether or not the printer speed is within the limit value.
, set or reset carry clip flop 546.
Based on the setting status, the aperture value display blinking signal AVFL or
If you generate the flashing signal TVFL for shutter speed display,
This is a good reason for the eighth step of the first to fourth calculation routines.
and carry flip-flop 540 in the 8th step.
Just look at the output. As mentioned above (overflow caused by A-D conversion)
The result of adding various data to the low and photometric data is
bar flow, and the aperture value or aperture value obtained as a result of calculation.
is a digital signal when the shutter speed exceeds the control limit.
Turn on the aperture value display or shutter speed display on the screen display 402.
The logic circuit 586 generates a signal to erase the signal.
. The logic circuit 586 is connected to the carry flip-flop 5.
40 and the output of the program selector 580.
is being received and specified by the program selector 580.
The carry clip flow
The output of step 540 is determined and displayed on digital display 402.
Confirm that the displayed shutter speed or aperture value is blinking.
Do the issue. Blinking of the shutter speed output from the logic circuit 586
The signal TVFL is temporarily stored in the flip-flop 588.
is applied to multiplexer 594, and also
The flashing signals A to 'F are -H clip flop 590.
is stored in and given to the upper multiplexer 594.
. Note that the shutter speed displayed on the digital display 402
Or, the conditions for blinking the aperture value were mentioned earlier.
So, I will omit the explanation here, but in this system
The conditions under which such a flashing signal occurs will be explained in detail later.
Ru. Note that this logic circuit 586 is connected to R from the logic circuit 598.
8ND signal is received, and depending on the rtSND signal,
The flip-flops 588, 590 are reset.
Ru. As mentioned above, when using an external photometry adapter, the 8th.
Generate a signal to ignore the 9th step, or
Depends on the ADOF signal generated when not in robot shooting mode.
Carry flip-flop 540 direct set
data, AD conversion overflow, and various data.
overflow caused by addition of
When the aperture value or shutter speed exceeds the set limit value.
and give a blinking signal to the digital display 402.
All the logic for
have a close relationship. A circuit configuration diagram for realizing such logic is shown in Fig. 71.
However, what is indicated by 600 in the figure is an integrated circuit element MC14.
4-bit latch composed of 514 (manufactured by Motorola)
This shows a 16-line decoder. This integrated circuit
The device MC14514 is shown in the block diagram of Figure 72.
system and the structure shown in the logic diagram of Figure 73.
The 4 bits input from Dl-D4
Data is output to the output line of SO~S 15 or 16.
It is configured to output code. In the configuration shown in FIG. 71, program selector 580
Of the outputs Ql-Q5, Q'1-Q4 are output from the decoder 600.
It is input to the Dl-D and i terminals of. In the figure, and
Gate AND27 is the first or first gate in external metering mode.
Examine the 8th and 9th steps in routine 3.
This is for outputting a program execution control signal.
Then, the CU times signal AO times signal and gate AND30
of the signal indicating the external photometry mode obtained by giving
In addition to receiving input, the program selector 580
Inverted signal arrangement by inverter INV12 of Q5 output of
The output 88.89 of the decoder 600 is
It receives the signal input through the gate OR9,
A signal indicating that the system is in external metering mode and the program
The output of the system selector 580 is the eighth step or the ninth step.
Signal according to AND logic with the signal indicating that it is in the block■
It is configured to output . Also, the AND gate AND28 is used for strobe shooting mode.
When not in mode, the result of A-D conversion by A-D converter 382
If the fruit overflows, the first to fourth routes
Carry flip is detected by detecting the 10th step in the process.
Setup for direct setting of P.70 knob 540.
This is for outputting the CU double signal ADOF'.
By giving the signal to AND29,
A-D converter 38 when not in flash photography mode.
2 receives a signal indicating overflow i.
and the Q5 output input of the program selector 580.
an inverted signal by the inverter rNV12 and the decoder
600 output SIO input is being received and the system is running). ADOF signal and the above program when not in camera shooting mode
・Indicates that the output of selector 580 is in the 10th step.
According to the AND logic with the signal, output the signal ■.
It is structured in many ways. The AND gate AND25 is a digital display 40.
Outputs the signal AVFL to blink the displayed aperture value in step 2.
In order to provide input to the J terminal of flip-flop 590,
AND26 is a digital display
Signal TV for flashing the display shutter speed of the device 402
into the J terminal of flip-flop 588 that outputs FL.
It is meant to give power. AND24
inputs the AsLC signal and the C[J signal, and the stroke
When not in auto shooting mode, the aperture value is selected with priority.
This output is a signal indicating that the
directly to the gate AND26, and
and AND25 through inverter INV13, respectively.
It has been entered. This means that aperture priority mode is selected.
- When the shutter speed is calculated, the shutter speed is calculated.
Therefore, when the signal to command blinking comes, this signal is AV
J of flip-flop 590 for outputting FL signal
This is to prevent it from going to the terminal, and on the contrary, it is set in aperture priority mode.
When not, i.e. when shutter priority mode is selected
The aperture value is calculated and is therefore blinking.
When the signal to command the TVFL signal comes, this signal will change the TVFL signal.
Go to the J terminal of flip-flop 588 for output.
This is to make sure there is no such thing. The signal that commands the blinking is sent from the OR gate 0R11.
gate AND25. given to both AND26
However, this OR gate output is the signal that commands the blinking.
This includes two conditions for outputting . One is the first output through the AND gate AND22.
1 condition, which is a carry flip-flop
540 is set, and the corresponding AND
・Game 1-) A N l) 22 is the carry file
It receives the input of the cent signal CA from the lip flop 540.
It's on. The other one is output through the AND gate AND23.
Under the second condition, this is a carry flip.
The condition is that the 70 knob 540 has been reset.
, the AND game) AND23 is the carry free
Receives input of reset signal σ■ from flip-flop 540.
It's on. Said and game) AND22 is or y-to oR10
The 811 and 814 outputs of the decoder 600 are input through
and the Q of the program selector 580 is
5 output is input through Inno (-) INV12.
Therefore, from the carry flip-flop 540
receiving the CA double signal input and the program select
The program step based on the data processor 580 is the B-th step.
It is configured to output "1" at the step E step.
. The AND gate AND23 is the decoder 6.
00 SO ratio output and the program selector 580.
Q5 output is input, so carry flip
・Receives the Vτ multiplied signal input from the flop 540, and
The program counter 580
Te, when the knob is at the G step, output ``'1''.
It is composed of many parts. Note that the key from the carry flip-flop 540 is
The conditions under which the carry signal CA is issued will be described in detail later. Note that the flip-flops 588 and 590 are
Also clock pulse through OR gate, 0R12
CP and timing pulse TB7 inverter INV,
14 receives the input of the inverted signal. That is, these 2
Flip Flon 7”588w590 timing
・Pulse T First clock pulse CP of time H7
Notate, 1: It is synchronized with ri. Furthermore, the flip-flops 588 and 590 are
The terminal receives the human power of the RS N I) signal.
. This R, SND signal is sent to the program counter 580.
Each route is advanced depending on the program progression ability of
As is clear from Fig. 70, the process ends at eight points.
Since the Vth step j6 is common to the routine, the above
The output of program selector 580 is
CALE signal indicating that the calculation has ended when the rain has fallen.
The signal is output, and then each data obtained as a result of the calculation is
A signal is placed to command the transfer, but this signal
This is the R8ND signal. The CALE signal and R8ND signal are as shown in FIG.
is obtained through the logic configuration of logic circuit 598. The CALE signal is connected to the program as shown in FIG.
, Kara/ri582 Q5. AND receiving Q4 output
- Output of gate AND20 and the program counter
Inversion of the Q3 output of the converter 582 by the inverter INV23
The output is output from the AND gate AND68 which receives the output.
It will be done. As is clear from Figure 70, this CALE signal is
From the Xth step to the Vth step of the gram step
The signal is at high level for all 4 words. Further, the 1'tSND signal is as shown in FIG.
Q2 of program counter 582. OR the Q3 output.
is input through the gate o it s, and the a
output of AND20, that is, the program
Step X to V step, that is, the final step
Input a high level signal between 8 words in the top
It is output from the AND gate AND9. subordinate
As is clear from Figure 70, this R8ND signal is
Program step Q step to V step
, that is, it remains at a high level for 6 words until the final step.
It will be output as a signal set to match. However, as shown in FIG.
The direct reset terminal R8T of 582 has an OR signal.
Game) 01 (and game through 7) AND18 output
Q3. of the program counter 582. QO ratio
AND condition with the output of the AND gate AND20
signal is given. At this time, the AND gate A
As is clear from Fig. 70, the output of ND l 8 is as follows:
Only for one word of the T step of the program step
It is set so that it is at the lowest level. But this Anne
The output of gate AND18 becomes high level.
, the program counter 582 is immediately reset.
Therefore, the AND18 output is
The moment it hits, it goes down to low level. Similarly, the R, 8ND signal also has a program and a step.
Falling to low level the moment you enter the T-step
Therefore, the FL8ND signal is substantially the Q-th step.
At the level of 3 steps from to step V.
This will be output as a signal. In addition, the above CALE letter
and gate A forming part of logic circuit 578
It is input to ND6'2. this and game) AND
62 receives the human power of timing pulse TB5 (Q
Therefore, while the CALE signal is at
This outputs the l''' signal in synchronization with the radio TBS.
. This timing is synchronized with pulse TB5.
The CALE signal is 4W through ORG)01 (22).
Kusu line 366Q is carried. On the other hand this
Logic circuit 598 connects bus line from OR22.
Place the unconditional line/re-pulse TB4 on the engine 366.
tail. Therefore, bus line 366 has a timing Noculus T.
The 4-bit II O” signal synchronized with BO to TB3 is
The timing pulse TB4 has a synchronized signal "l".
Synchronized with timing pulse TB5 1, cA, LE double signal
, the ADCB signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB5.
, the INT signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB7.
Each of them will be listed. Next, the 30th illustrated data selector 502 and fixed data
Maximum aperture of TaR, OM534 and photographic lens device 2 used
More detailed circuit configuration for taking in the value AMAX
will be explained according to the circuit configuration diagram in FIG. 75. The fixed data I-LOM 534 is CS 'I' 0
. C3TC, C3TD, C3TB, C3TI”, TMIN
, TMAX, AMAX, TSYN, C8Tl, C3T2
11 pieces of data are stored in series, and the
It consists of six pieces of data arranged in parallel. However, the messenger
Data regarding the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 for
Only X is d differently for each of the six juxtaposed data.
1F number, Fll, F16. F22゜'F32
．． F45. Contains data regarding the value of P64. This fixed data ROM 534 is basically as shown in FIG.
It can be constructed with the integrated circuit element 1702A shown.
It is something that In such a data arrangement, the fixed data ROM 53
4 is the instruction R to that person's 3~A6 input terminal.
It receives the outputs of OM504 outputs OP3 to OPo,
Specific data of the serial data is specified. follow
Then, counter pulse CTl is applied to the AO to A2 terminals respectively.
~By inputting CT4, the output of 1 (0M534)
From the power terminals QO to Q5, everything is the same except for A MAX
The same six pieces of data are the timing pulses TBO-TB7.
The data will be output sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with the . The outputs of QO to Q5 are
It is input to D31-AND36, but this AND
Gate AND3 t-ANT) 36 is the photographic lens used.
It becomes selectively conductive depending on the maximum aperture value of device 2.
be. This AND gate AND31-AND36.
The outputs are summarized in OR gate 0R12, and this
From OR Gate O, R12, Inston 1 cushion
・Fixed data specified by l'tOM504 is output.
You will be forced to do so. On the other hand, regarding the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used,
The data to be set is centrally controlled from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536.
362 and is input to the 6-bit shift register 53.
8. This shift register 538 is shown in FIG.
The diagram shows an integrated circuit device CD4015
-11 can be constructed using 6 bits. This
The outputs of Ql to Q6 of the shift register 538 are always
applied to the input terminal DI-D6 of the register 602.
This buffer register 60゛2 has a clock and
The timing of the TBO given by
In synchronization with the end, the contents of the shift register 538 are
It is captured and stored in buffer register 602. That is,
, data A taken into the shift register 538
MAX is synchronized to TRI-TB6 and therefore TB
At timing 7, AMAX shifts to the shift register.
538 (Shift register because it is completely captured)
The contents of data 538 are stored in the buffer register at the rising edge of TBO.
602 and stored therein. The Ql-Q6 output of the buffer register 602 is
given to AND gates AND31-AND36
and according to the stored A MAX
Selectively select one of the gates AND31 to AND36
It is for conduction. By the way, the above fixed data) 10M534 is the τ end
Receive the OP ratio output of the instruction ROM504 to the child.
The operand code shown in Figure 69 is 21.
As is clear from the term OF2, this OF2 is 0°1
Only when specified in the instruction ROM 504
The data is output through the Qo-Q5 terminal.
. Note that the buffer register 602 is an integrated circuit element C.
Can be configured by combining three D4013 (made by RCA)
It is possible. By the way, the integrated circuit element CD4
013 is shown in the block diagram of FIG.
It is a dual-type D-type flip-flop. As described above, through the configuration described above, the instruction R
The fixed data R in OM504 is stored in OM2B5.
When fixed data is specified as an operand
, said or gate. Wired or gate 0 receiving the output of R12
Fixed data specified for signal line io from R13
is lower in synchronization with timing pulse TBO~'rB7.
It is output sequentially starting from the digit. On the other hand, the wired or gate 0R13 has a
The output of data selector 502 is provided. This de
The data selector 502 is shown on its logic die in FIG.
Integrated circuit element MC145 as shown in the diagram
8 channel data consisting of 12 (manufactured by Motorola)
It is a selector and is input from its Xo-X7 terminal.
Data is input according to the input signals from A, B, and C terminals.
It is configured to selectively output from the Z terminal.
. Each of the A, B, and C terminals has an instruction/
ROM504 or t) OP 0. OPI, OP2 outputs
is input, and as is clear from Figure 69, OP
Depending on the combination of O, OPI, and OP2 outputs, DJ D
TSV, DTTv, DTAV, DTAO, DTAC, B
R. Each variable data of CR is selectively output to the Z terminal. Na
Oh, this data selector 502 is input to the DIS terminal.
Receives OP4 signal input through inverter INV14
and connect the inverter INV15 to the INII terminal.
is receiving the OP3 signal input, as shown in Figure 69.
OP4 of the operand code. It is clear from the section of OP3.
Like, this OP4. Only when OP3 is 'l', this
The data selector 502 receives input from the XQ to X7 terminals.
Input the variable data from the Z terminal and connect the wired OR.
・Output to signal line IO through gate ORI 3
It is. As described above, through the configuration described above, the instruction R
Selected by the data selector 502 in OM504
If the variable data specified as an operand is
, receives the Z terminal output of the data selector 502.
(wired or game) oRl 3 signal line 10
The variable data specified in the timing pulse TBO
~It is output sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with TB7.
Ru. The logic circuit 592 also includes the condition signal storage circuit 548.
From MNAL signal, MNAL signal. BLB signal, SPDw signal, sPDw signal. The ASLC signal is being input, and at the same time the condition register is being input.
AECG signal, WNUP signal, CU double signal from star 574
V-ru after receiving the code input. This logic circuit 592 is
The output control unit distinguishes various signals according to a certain logic.
Display control signal of digital display 402 for 364
and generates a control signal for the output control section 364. From this logic circuit 592, winding of the film is completed.
WNUP signal, warning signal ``EEEEEE''
E" display command signal EDSP, pulp display "bulb
''' display command signal BD8P, strobe shooting mode
At the time, the "EF'" display indicates that the strobe is fully charged.
Indication command signal B F D S, the aperture of the lens device 2
1 page display command to indicate that manual setting is required.
A signal MDSP is output. There was an operational error in the camera device for the EDSP signal.
As mentioned earlier, this can sometimes occur.
, the mark 12 is selected on the lens device 2.
Then, the lens device 2 is narrowed down by the aperture lever 64.
is in progress and the film has finished winding.
mark 12 is selected on lens device 2.
, and the aperture of the lens device 2 by the aperture lever 64.
When the AE on the body 4 side is not being
Lever 94 is in the AE Discharge state.
The output is based on the two states of the case. That is, this ED
SP signal is EDS'P=SPDW-MNAL+SPDW-MNAL
・WNUP-AECG・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ The logical formula 081 is satisfied.
This is what is output in the added state. Also, when the valve signal BLB is l”, the BDSP signal is
This is the signal that is output. Also, the EFD8 signal is output when the CU double signal "l II"
It is a signal that is applied. Further, the MD8P signal is the aperture setting reset of the lens device 2.
With the aperture value set in ring 8, press the aperture lever.
- The lens device 2 is not narrowed down by 64.
The narrowing down by squid or narrowing down lever 64 is
In the two states that are performed when in data priority mode,
This is what is output. That is, the MD8P signal is MDSP-8MW-MNAL+SMW-MNAL-AS
LC, -...-Q (output with the logical formula l satisfied)
It is something that is strengthened. The logic circuit 592 is shown in its logic diagram in FIG.
・It is indicated in grams. In the same figure, Andonigame
AND37. AND3g. AND39 and or goo) OFt14 is the above α mallet type.
It is a logical configuration to satisfy the OR gate OR
An EDSP signal is obtained from I4. Also, AND gate AND40. ANI) 41 and
OR gate ORI 5 is for satisfying the 0th equation above.
Logical configuration, or goo), 01 (MD from 15
An SP signal is obtained. The output of the logic circuit 592 and the flip-flop
The output TV AVF of the 588 and 590 is then
provided to lexer 594 to generate timing pulse TBO
- Converted to a signal synchronized with TB7. FIG. 78 shows the lock of the multiplexer 594.
This multiplexer is shown in detail in Figure 53.
A collection point/route where a logic diagram/gram is shown
The element MC14512 can be applied. This multi
・The plexer has input terminals X0-X7, but the XO terminal
The terminal is grounded, and the WNUP signal is connected to its Xl terminal.
issue. AVFL signal to X2 terminal, TvFL signal to X3' terminal.
No., EDSP signal to X4 terminal, BD8 to X5 terminal
P signal, EFDS signal to X6 terminal, MD to X7 terminal
Receives input of SP signal. These input signals are A
The counter pulse CTl input to each terminal of ,B,C
, CT2, CT4, the timing pulse 'rB
As a signal synchronized with O~TB7, the signal line 0 is sent from the Z terminal.
is output in series. As mentioned above, wNup No. 7 is a timing pad.
The AVFV signal is the timing pulse TB1.
2, the ' T V F L signal is the timing pulse T
B3, the EDSP signal is applied to timing pulse TB4,
BD8P signal is timing fist pulse TB5, EFDS
The signal is applied to the timing pulse TB6, and the MDSP signal is applied to the timing pulse TB6.
Signal line ◎ in synchronization with timing pulse TB7.
By the way, this multiplexer 594 is connected to its INH end.
The R8ND signal is input to the child, and the R8ND signal is
Regulates the signal output from the Z terminal while it is being output.
It is something that will be done. FIG. 79 shows the logic die of the arithmetic circuit 500 shown in FIG.
Although it is a Yagram, AND45 is
Circulation gate of A register 51O, AND gate AN
D47 is the circulation gate of the B register 512, and the AND gate.
The gate ANb49 controls the circulation gate of the C register 514.
These are shown below. A register 510. B register
512. In the normal state, the C register 514 is
Each of the above AND gates AND45. AND47. A
Through ND49, each content AR, BR, OR
It is being circulated. This arithmetic circuit 500 includes the instruction ROM
Operation control instruction opo from 504. 0, Pl, , OR2, OR3, OR4, OR5, OR6
, O'P7. The above instructions
The output of the input R,0M504 is as shown in FIG.
Code OP7. OP6. OP5 and operand code O
P4. OP3. OP2゜Divided into OPI and OPO
, this arithmetic circuit 500 converts each code into a gate group.
It is used to decode and perform necessary calculations and control operations.
be. Further, this arithmetic circuit 500 includes a data selector 502
Import various fixed data and variable data through
However, these data are the output signals of the circuit shown in Figure 75.
It is taken from the line [phase] to the AND gate AND60.
Ru. Note that this AND gate AND60 is an inverter.
Through INV21, the output signal line ■ of the 71st illustrated circuit is connected.
The signal is being acquired, but it is in external metering mode.
At the time, the specified operand is
restrict the ingestion of data from
This is to prevent calculations from being performed. This Ann
The output of the AND gate AND60 is the AND gate AND4
3 and exclusive or goo) BX□2 and Anne
DO GATE AND57. Although it is given to AND59
, the above AND) AND43 is the A register 510
Also used when directly importing operand data into
This is similar to the Exclusive or Gate EX2.
AND57. AND59 is A Regis
Operand data Af't of data 510 and operand data
It is used when In Figure 79, exclusive or gate EX1, B
I3. BI3 and AND gate AND57°AND5
8. AND59. AND61. Or Goo) OR2
1. Flip-flop F21 constitutes the calculation part.
I can read it. The configuration of this calculation part is the well-known addition and subtraction circuit.
Exclusive or goo) EXI input
When the power 0P6 is "0", OR6 is used as an adder circuit.
When is “l”, each operates as a subtraction circuit.
be. As shown in item 0P60 of Figure 69, this
When in calculation mode, if OR6 is □II, add, l”
The case is structured according to the command system called subtraction. In addition,
Flip-flop F21 starts from OR gate 0R21
Carry flip flow that remembers the carry that occurs
This is a key for carry in normal arithmetic operations.
It's probably for memorizing the digits, but it's emitted by the calculation of the last digit.
A fresh carry, that is, an or-goo at the timing of TB7.
) The carry output from OR21 is the timing pulse.
A signal obtained by inverting the signal TB7 through the inverter INV15.
Depending on the AND gate AND61 receiving the input of
Regulated. Output from this OR gate 0R21
Carry is carried through the AND gate AND56.
– is applied to the J terminal of flip-flop 540.
, this carry flip-flop 540 is
As a clock input, the inverter of timing pulse TB7
The inverted signal and clock pulse CP by the input terminal INV16.
(or goo) OR condition signal from OR23 is input
Therefore, according to the terminal input to J or
The drop 540 sets or resets the TB7 tab.
Synchronized with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP of timing
It is. That is, this carry flip front,
540 is the carry generated by timing pulse TB7.
-, that is, depending on the carry that occurred at the last stage of the operation.
It is set. Furthermore, when not in calculation mode, it is clear from Figure 69 that
, the instruction code OR7 becomes l'', so the inverter
AND receiving input from OR7 through INV17
The gate AND56 has its output regulated.
. As mentioned above, the carry generated as a result of the operation is
Detection memory via carry flip-flop 540
The UA signal is output from the Q output to the CA multiplied signal output terminal.
output as a number. In addition, the calculation results obtained by the addition/subtraction circuit described above
is output through exclusive or gate EXβ
(and) is given to AND44. This a
The output of AND44 is OR gate 0R17
Since it is given to the A register 510 through
(and goo) If AND44 is conductive, the above performance will work.
The calculation result will be introduced and stored in the A register 510. In this way, the calculation result is taken into the A register 510.
As is clear from Figure 69, this is the calculation mode.
This is when the command signals for A registers O and H are issued.
. That is, when OF2 is 0" and OF2 is l I+, the A register
AND gate AND45 for data circulation in the star is non-conducting.
(and) AN to import the calculation result
It would be good if D44 became conductive, so it was provided for that purpose.
But the AND gate AND51. i: y bar IIN
V21. /7-game) NOR2. Said and1 game
-) AND51 connects OF2 and inverter INV21
It receives the input of the inverted OF2 signal obtained through the
When OF2 is 0'' and OF2 is l'', that is, the instruction
yo:/, R, 0 The output command from 504 is ADD or 5
It is configured to output l I+ ratio at the time of tJB.
. The l” output of this AND gate AN width 51 is AND.
G) is applied to AND44 and the gate ANI) is applied to AND44.
(Noa Gu) was transferred through NOR2.
above) is given to AND45, and the gate A
ND45 is prohibited. Through this configuration, the A register 510 stores the operation result.
This means that it will be introduced. AND goo) AND43 is AND goo) AND6
Fixed or variable data input through 0 is stored in the A register.
A gate provided for inputting data into the data processor 510.
Other input terminals include (or goo) via ORI 6.
, and goo) receives the output of AND52 and AND53.
It's on. Said AND1 Gut AND52 and AND5
3 is clear from Figure 69 that at least OF2 is "l", m
Like Kana, there is no conduction unless it is in data exchange mode.
. The AND gate AND52 is also connected to the carry gate AND52.
Q output C'A of flip-flop 540 and input of OF2
As is clear from Figure 69, OF2
is '1' and carry CA is 'L', outputs '1'.
It is something to do. Also, the above AND game) AND53
In addition, the Q of the carry flip-flop 540 is
It receives input from output CA and OF2, and from Figure 69,
As is clear, OF2 is N'llll and carries C and A are
0”, outputs “i”.Such a configuration
(through and goo) AND52 output is H'LTT
This occurs when the SWC command or SWU command is passed.
The reason why the AND gate AND53 output becomes “L” is
This is when the SWN command or SWU command is passed. Through the above configuration, when in data exchange mode,
The output state of Lee flip-flop 540 is
Matches the conditions output from traction ROM5/04
Then, l” is output from OR gate 0R16,
In order to make the AND gate AND43 conductive, the AND gate AND43 is turned on.
of the operands introduced through the gate AND60.
Variable or fixed data is captured and stored in A register 510
It will be done. In addition, at this time, the above-mentioned OR gate OR
The “1” output of I6 is passed through NOR2 (Noah Gu)
, given to the AND gate AND45 as a “0” signal.
Therefore, the A register 510 is controlled by the gate AND45.
Circulation is prohibited. On the other hand, the output of the A register 510 is the AND gate AN
D46 and AND4B, but this is
When in data exchange mode, the operand data is in the B register.
If BR or C register CI't, A register 5
At the same time as fetching the operand data into 10,
Operate the data stored in the A register 510 with
This is to move it to B register 512 or C register 51 as an operand
If 4 is selected, as is clear from Figure 69, the option
OF2,0-P3 of the Pelland code. OF2. O
All PIs become l”.This means AND
50. Detected in On the other hand, at this time, OPO is 0゛.
If so, set the B register 512, and if OPO is l”
C register 514 is selected. Therefore, OPO directly
and goo) At the same time as given to A'N D 55
AND gate AND through inverter lNV2O to
54. This AND gate AND54 includes the AND gate AND54.
) 50 outputs and the OR gate 01 (16 outputs are given).
is specified, so it can be used as an operand in data exchange mode.
The B register 512 is specified and the conditions for data exchange are
Only when is satisfied, the above AND54 is
Outputs ``'l°'', and this 1'' output is ``or goo'')O
R, 20 through the above and goo) given to AND46
It will be done. Therefore, the AND gate AND46 is conductive.
Therefore, the data in the A register 510 is
Do Goo) AND46, through OR Gate 0R18
6 This will be taken into the B register 512.
When the output of the OR gate 0R20 is
Give to AND gate AND47 through data Nv18
The data BR in the B register 512 is circulated because
The AND gate AND47 is prohibited. Also, a
In addition to the OPO signal, the above-mentioned
The output of AND gate 50 and the above ORG) OR16
Since the output of
The C register 514 is designated as the land, and the data
Only when the conditions for exchange are met, the above
ND55 outputs l'' and connects the AND gate AND4.
Give to 8. Therefore, the above AND46 is
Therefore, the data in the A register 510 becomes conductive.
AND also gate AND48. Through OR Gate 0R19
The data will then be taken into the C register 514. In addition,
At this time, the 1" output of AND55 is the input
(and goo) to AND49 through Barter INV19
The data CR in the C register 514 is cycled to
The AND gate AND49 is prohibited. Note that the carry flip-flop 540 is
However, because the OF2 input is being received on the terminal, the data exchange mode is
time of the first timing pulse TB7.
Reset in synchronization with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP.
It is said to be in a dead state, but it entered the timing of this TB7.
At this point, the commanded data exchange has finished. Through the configuration described above, this arithmetic circuit 500
, instruction l (following instructions from 0M504)
The seventh function is to perform necessary calculations or data exchange.
This arithmetic circuit 500 is operated according to each routine shown in the figure.
Eventually, the A register 510 will contain the performance data.
Whether calculated as a result of calculation or initially set,
Control aperture value or
, data regarding the aperture value is obtained and stored in the B register 512.
is the result of an operation or is initially set.
, control data regarding shutter speed for display and control
is obtained, and the C register 514 contains the aperture of the lens device 2.
Control data for controlling the number of stages can be obtained.
. When the calculation by this calculation circuit 500 is completed, the program
・The logic circuit 598 receiving the output of the counter 582
As mentioned earlier, the R8ND signal is output from
As you can see, this REND signal
This is a signal at the A level. This R8ND signal is the AND signal of the 79th illustrated arithmetic circuit 500.
・Gate AND42. Noah Gate N0R2, Or
・Goo) given to OR20, therefore, and Goo)
AND42. AND46 becomes conductive and the AND gate
AND45. AND47 is prohibited. For that reason, Regis
The output of the data is AND42. or gate
directly connected to the A register 510 through 0R17;
The output of register 510 is connected to AND gate AND46,
Directly connected to B register 512 through A gate ORt 8
Therefore, the signal line @Gara is R, 8ND signal is '1''
Between the three words A, B, and C,
Star's day'p A R. BR and CR are also the contents Br of the B register 512. The contents of the A register 510, the contents of the AJC register 514,
They will be output sequentially in the order of CR. Fig. 78 Signal line ■output of multiplexer 594
And the output line @output of the 79th illustrated arithmetic circuit 500 is the output
Logic circuit 596 is provided. This output logic circuit 596 is based on the logic diagram of FIG.
It has the structure shown in the diagram, but this output
Power logic circuit 596 temporally connects output bus line/374.
It is responsible for carrying controlled data and signals.
Ru. This output logic circuit 596 is connected to output bus line 374.
Equipped with OR24 (or goo) at the output end, this OR
・The gate has the output of signal line 0, AND
64. Each output of AND63 is given. signal 1j
The output of l+'Hi is output from multiplexer 594 to
WNLJP signal synchronized with timing pulses TBL-TB7
No., A'VFL signal, TVFL signal: EDSP signal,
BDSP signal, EFDS signal, MDSP signal.
(Mama or Goo) Dekabus Rai through OFL24
It will be placed on the page 374. This multiplexer
As mentioned before, the output of 594 is the R8ND signal.
・Output is regulated between 3 words at the A level.
On the other hand, when the R8ND signal goes to the A level, this
The high level signal of is connected to the signal line from the arithmetic circuit 500.
@AND65 receiving the output is conductive
do. This AND gate AND65 output is
Goo) is given to AND64, but this AND gate
AND64 selects the pulp model from the setting condition storage circuit 548.
code. The strobe light is output from the signal BLB indicating the condition and the condition register 574.
Receives the output of NAND3 (Nand Goo), which receives the signal CTl indicating that it is not in shooting mode.
Therefore, if you are not in flash photography mode and the shutter is
If Pulp is not set as the data speed,
The AND64 becomes conductive. Therefore
, through the AND gate AND64, the R8ND signal
The arithmetic circuit 5000B level is connected between 3 words whose number is ``1''.
Jista 512. A register 510. C register 514
Each content BR, AR, CR is synchronized with timing pulse
OR gate 01 (sequential output bus line starting from 24)
It will be placed on 374. On the other hand, if you are not in flash photography mode and the shutter speed is
If the pulp is set, the Nando
・Goo) The output of NAND3 is 0”, so the output of
Do, ge, -to AND64 is prohibited. Therefore, the calculation times
The data output from the line 500 to the signal line @ is output (
It cannot be placed on the line 374. Shikashi, when in such pulp shooting mode, 1, as mentioned above.
As shown above, the aperture value is controlled by a fixed number and the lens is
Open aperture value AV of lens device 2. is displayed on the digital display 402. Therefore, all bits of data for controlling the number of aperture stages are “0”.
” is fine, but in order to display the open aperture value AVo, what should I do?
Outputs the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used even if
It is necessary to transfer it to the control unit 360. For that purpose, control
The aperture value, that is, the data AI of the A register 510 (is
At the same time as it is placed on the line 374,
Set the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used to the bass line.
All you have to do is put it on the page 374. For that reason, and gate A
ND62. AND63 is provided. Said and
Goo) A N D 6.2 is program counter 5
Input Q5 output of 82 and all output of decoder 600
Therefore, this AND62 is
, data from the arithmetic circuit 500 to the A register 510, l(
is output to the output line ◎, “l” is output for the same l word
becomes. AND Goo) AND63 is the Nando game
Input the output of NAND3 through inverter INV22.
At the same time, the output of the AND gate AND62
and the ■signal from the circuit shown in FIG. 37, that is, DTAO.
Therefore, when not in flash shooting mode,
, if pulp is selected, the A register is sent from the arithmetic circuit 500.
data A) of the star 510 is output from the same type
Open aperture value data A of the photographic lens device 2 used
VO connects the output bus line through OR gate 0R24.
374. Figure 81 shows bus line 366 and human-powered bus line 3.
70. Signals and data placed on output bus line 374
FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram summarizing what was previously explained regarding the data. In other words, bus line 366 has a timing pulse T.
The 'O' signal is placed between the timings of BO and TB3t.
CALE is synchronized with timing bus TB5.
The signal is ADCE in synchronization with timing pulse TB6.
The signal is INT signal synchronized with timing pulse TB7.
The signal on this bus line 366 is
Input control section 360. Central control unit 362. Output control section 36
In order to determine the timing for data transfer in each part of 4.
It has an important role to play. Further, the input cover line 370 is connected to the input control unit 360.
various signals and data to the central control unit 362.
is transferred based on timing pulses TBO to TB7.
It plays an important role in the transmission of various signals.
The ADOF signal and timing pulse are synchronized with the timing pulse TBI.
AELK signal, timing synchronized with timing pulse TB2
ABCG signal, timing in synchronization with pulse TB3
WNUP signal, timing synchronized with programming pulse TB4
・AO double signal timing pulse in synchronization with pulse TBS
Each CU double signal is loaded in synchronization with STB6.
, 1 and data (in this case, A-D conversion data
DD), the timing pulse TBO ~
In synchronization with TB7, % stacking degree data is sequentially displayed starting from the lower digit.
It will be posted. Additionally, the output bus line 374 is connected to the central control unit 362.
various signals and data to the output control unit 364.
To transfer based on timing pulses TBO to TB7
It plays an important role in the transmission of various signals.
WNUP signal, timing synchronized with timing pulse TBl
TvFL signal, timing in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2
A V F L signal, tie synchronized with the programming pulse TB3
EDSP signal, timing in synchronization with timing pulse TB4
B, D 8 P signals in synchronization with the switching pulse TBS,
In synchronization with timing pulse TB6, the EFD8 signal and
The MDSP signal synchronizes with timing pulse TB7.
There are various things that can be posted, and data, such as shutter
data speed TV, aperture value AV, open aperture value AVO, control aperture control
In the case of your number AVs, etc., please use Timing Noku Bus TBO~
In synchronization with TB7, % stacking degree data is sequentially displayed starting from the lower digit.
It is something that can be posted. Next, the output control section 364 will be explained. The output control section 364 has two main functions.
It is. One is the display control function and the other is the exposure control function.
It's a meeting. This output control section 364 has an output from the central control section 362.
Various condition signals and various data are transmitted through bus line 374.
data has been entered. These signals and data
The output bus line
What kind of signal or data is input to the 374?
To know if the signal or data is on the output bus line
I need to know the time it will be posted on 374. Bus lines are provided to save time.
synchronous circuit 660 receiving signal input from pin 366.
Ru. The detailed circuit configuration of this synchronous circuit 660 is shown in FIG.
700 in the figure indicates a ring cowl.
It is a ta. This ring counter 700 is shown in FIG.
Integrated circuit device shown with logic diagram
It can be configured depending on the CD4035. Hass line 366 is identical to timing pulse TB6.
To the D terminal of flip-flop F22, which operates according to
In this flip-flop F22, the
Bus 2-in 366 in synchronization with Iming Fist Pulse TBS
The CALE signal carried on the is detected. This pretend
The Q output of the twin flop F22 is a timing pulse.
7 lip-flop F23 operating in synchronization with TBO
It is applied to the D input terminal. This flip flop F2
Q output of 3 is inputted with timing pulse xTB□.
(and goo) and the ring cow through AND66.
will be input to the clock terminal CLK of the printer 700.
. This ring counter 700 outputs its QO and Q3.
Return to the J and 2 terminals via the AND gate AND67.
are doing. Note that the QO ratio of the ring counter 700
Clock pulse CP is output to output signal line 0.
(or goo receiving input) signal through OR27
output on line 0 and input to the Ql ratio output clock pulse CP.
Or goo receiving power) Signal line [
phase], and the Q3 output is the clock pulse CP input.
The signal line [
Yes] is output. Note that the Q output of the flip-flop F23 is
input to the S terminal of the flip-flop F24, and its Q output
is output to signal line O. The R terminal of this flip-flop F24 has a power
An up clear signal PUC is provided. Also, direct reset of flip-flop F23
Direct connection from the signal line [phase] described later to the output terminal R.
A set signal is input. In such a configuration, its operation is as shown in FIG.
I will explain. Now, to the timing pulse TBS on bus line 366
When a synchronized CALE signal is applied, the timing pattern
Flip-flop F2 operating in synchronization with pulse TB6
2 is set and its Q output becomes "l". Said CA
Since the LE signal is output for 4 words, this flip
Flop F22 will continue to hold "l" for 4 words.
Ru. The Q output of the flip-flop F22 is
・Clip Flora 7'F23 synchronized with pulse TBo
The next timing pulse TB is input to the D terminal of
Synchronized with the rising edge of O, this flip-flop F2
3 is set and its Q output becomes "1". This frill
The flip-flop F23 is the flip-flop F22.
is in the set state for 4 words, similarly 4 words are set.
It will remain in the set state for a while. The Q output of the flip 70 tube F23 is determined by the timing
・AND gate AND6 that receives pulse TBO
6, so from this AND gate AND66
, the flip-flop F23 is in the set state.
After that, there was no signal output synchronized with TBO for 4 words.
It will be. The output of this AND66 is the ring color
This is given to the clock terminal CLK of the /700.
The ring counter 700 is a timing jig pulse TBO.
QO, Ql, Q21, Q3 output in synchronization with each rising edge of
It is assumed that an output as shown in Fig. 83 is made from the terminal. In addition,
The outputs of QO, Ql, and Q2 of this ring fist counter 700
is input to ANI>67, and this
The output of the AND gate AND67 goes into the J and terminals.
The input is from the QO terminal at the start of counting.
, in order to output a count output. Furthermore, this ring
・The output polarity of the counter 700 is normally "L" and the count is
0" at the time of output is when the T/C terminal is grounded.
This is because the output characteristics obtained are as follows. Therefore, the CALE signal is first detected on the signal line @.
In addition, the signal output becomes -0 level for the next 1 word time.
will be done. Also, from OR Gate 0R25, 0R26, 0R27
is the timing pulse TBO- as shown in FIG.
A pulse with falling characteristics at each rise time of TB7
The outputs are output from the signal lines Q, d, (!φ) respectively. The falling output of the signal line 0 is output from the output bus line 36.
6 corresponds to the word time in which various signals are placed,
The falling output of the signal line [phase] is the output bus line 366.
The word time and the shutter speed data TV are loaded on the
The falling output of the signal line [phase] is output from the output bus.
Control aperture stage number data AVs is placed on line 366.
The fact that it corresponds to the word time is based on the various messages mentioned earlier.
This is obvious from the relationship between the number and the data sending time. On the other hand, flip-flop F24 is a flip-flop
This flip is set by the Q output of F23.
・The output signal from the Q terminal of flop F24 to signal line O is
, the shutter of the camera mechanism remains until the first calculation is completed.
This function is used to prevent the operation after release.
I can stay. This flip-flop F24 is a power
Receives the top/clear signal PUC at its reset terminal R.
There is. Still, this bus line 366 has no timing parameters.
D end of flip-flop F25 synchronized with Lus TB and O
This flip-flop F25 is input to the terminal.
to bus line 366 at the time of timing pulse TB7.
The INT signal to be loaded, that is, the A- of the input side' control section 360
Indicates that the D converter is integrating input analog data.
It is used to detect signals, and its Q output is
It will be carried on one signal line. This flop F23 of the synchronous circuit 660
is from the signal line [phase] to its direct reset terminal R.
It receives the direct reset signal input, but this
Time and shutter before shutter release
・The self-timer operates after the release is performed.
At any time other than when the output control unit 364
Flip Flip to avoid importing data, etc.
This is to prohibit the setting operation of the drop F23. This is based on a certain calculation result.
is performed and each mechanism of the camera device starts operating.
After that, other data, especially when performing TTL photometry,
, data affected by filtering or mirroring is input.
In order to prevent normal exposure control operation from being hindered by
belongs to. Various signals and data on the output bus line 366
is the output from the synchronization circuit 660 and the timer as described above.
Time judgment is made by timing pulse TBO-TB7.
The corresponding output control section 364 is
It will be incorporated into the functional part. The various signals on the output bus line 366 are demultiplexed.
- Timing pulse TBO- by plexer 610
The signal is separated based on TB7 and stored in the output control register 622.
It is accumulated. Such a demultiplexer 610 and output control register 6
The detailed structure of the structure including 22 is shown in FIG.
The demultiplexer 610 includes:
The logic diagram is shown in Figure 62.
It uses an integrated circuit element CD4015, and also has output control.
As the control register 622, its logic register is shown in FIG.
Integrated circuit device CD403 where the diagram is shown
5 is applied twice. In such a configuration, the demultiplexer 610
Connect the signal line [phase] of the '82nd illustrated circuit 660 to the clock terminal C.
] Receives output input, and also output control register 6
22□ is AND6 to its clock terminal C.
Figure 82 Asynchronous with timing pulse TBl via 9
The AND condition signal of the signal line 0 output of the circuit 660 is input.
ing. That is, as mentioned before, the cross line 366
The CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBS is
At the next word time, the timing pulse
The output pattern is synchronized with T'Bl-TB7 as shown in Figure 81.
Sline 378 includes WNtJP, TVFL, AVFL,
EDSP, BDSP. Since EFDS and MASP signals are input, demultiplexing is required.
- The plexer 610 connects the signal line 0 output between these words.
Timing... Each signal is taken in series as a bus.
It's crowded. After such operation, at the next word time, the signal
Line 0 output power: Since it goes from low level to high level,
AND gate AND69 is timing pulse TBL
Since the signal output is synchronized with the
Plexer 610 Q, OL, Ql l, Q21.
Q31. QO2゜Ql2. Each output of Q22 is an output
From the Do-B6 terminal of the control register 622 to the register
captured and accumulated. As a result, the output control register
MDSP is output from each output terminal of QO to Q6 of the controller 622. EFDS, BD8P, ED8P, AVFL, TVFL. Each WNUP signal will be output. Meanwhile, the shutter on output bus line 374
Each data of speed TV, aperture value AV, control control step AVs
is for data and display for controlling each mechanism of the camera device.
The handling is different depending on the data. Now, to explain how to import data for display,
Data used for display on output bus line 374
There are two types of data: shutter speed data TV and aperture value data AV.
It is. These signals are transmitted through the display control circuit 652.
Rounded and suitable for display on digital display 402
However, data due to rapid data changes still remains
To prevent the digital display 402 from flickering, data acquisition is
The interval between loading has been adjusted to the extent that there is no flicker.
Above, each data is placed on the output bus line 374.
The displayed aperture value is based on the word time
In the register 648, the displayed shutter speed TVDS is the shutter speed.
Each of the data is captured and stored in the speed display register 650.
It will be done. Detailed logic of data acquisition circuit for such display is provided.
The block diagram is shown in FIG. In the figure, 998 is input from output bus line 374.
A rounding circuit is used to round off the data.
Product circuit element CI) 4o32 (manufactured by ttCA)
It is something. This integrated circuit element CD4032 is shown in FIG.
Its block diagram is shown in Figure 87.
The logic diagram of the three
The circuit shown in FIG. 85 is formed by a serial adder.
Here, only one of them is used. This rounding circuit 998 has an output bus label at its Al terminal.
Receives output data from input 374 and ties to B1 terminal.
It receives input of timing pulse TBI. Also,
The timing pass/VS TB70 input is connected to the relay terminal CA.
is recieving. According to such a configuration, the output bus line 374
When data is input to the terminal, the % stacking degree bit is T.
Although it is input at the timing of BI, it is the same timing.
timing pulse TBI is input to the Bl terminal.
be done. In other words, only 'l° is applied to bits with % stacking degree of data.
Is it possible to add ゛?If this % of the stacking degree
If 1.11 is set in the bit, it becomes the bit of % stacking degree.
A carry comes out and a digit-beard is performed, and a decedent occurs again.
If O” is set in the % stacking degree bit of the data, it is the % stacking degree.
The carrier IJ- does not reach this bit. Therefore, this rounding
The output data from the S terminal of the five-input circuit 998 is
As far as looking at the upper digits than the bits, this output data
is the data of the % stage density with the bits of the % stage density
It becomes ta. As mentioned above, in the rounding circuit 998, the table
It is converted to data of % stacking degree suitable for display, and its S end is
The data output from the child is sent to the aperture value display register 64.
8 and shutter speed display register 650.
given to the D terminal. In addition, at this stage, the above rounding
Data rounded to the nearest whole number by circuit 998 and converted to % stacking degree
However, what the data is about depends on temporal judgment.
There is a need □, therefore, each of the registers 648, 650
is the control pulse input to each clock terminal C.
Therefore, the corresponding data will be imported. Note that this rounding circuit 998 has its carry terminal C
By receiving timing pulse TB7 input to A,
will be reset. The aperture display register 648 is connected to its clock terminal C.
Flip flop F2 through or gate 0R31
Input the calculation power of step 7 and the OR condition of clock pulse CP.
and the shutter speed display register 65.
0 is connected to its clock terminal C through OR32.
The Q output of F26 and the clock pulse
It accepts the input of the OR condition of the SCCP. The Q output of the clip flop F'26 is
This is the D input of the flip flop F27, and the
The inverter INV is connected to the D input of the flip-flop F26.
25 (or goo) receives the output of OR29.
Ru. On the other hand, the Q output of the clip-flop F27 is
The voltage applied to the set terminal S of the lip flop F28 is
and its Q output is given to Of't28 (or goo).
ing. (or goo) OFt28 is one inverter
The signal line [
Input the 2H2 on/off signal from [Phase],
The output signal of OR28 is
)01-t29. This or goo) OR2
9, on the other hand, is the QO end of the 82nd illustrated ring counter 700.
It receives signal input from signal line 0, which is a child output. In addition, the 2Hz on/off signal from the signal wire is
or goo) flip flop F2 through OR30
It is also applied to the reset terminal R of No.8. this clip
・The reset terminal R of the flop F28 also has the above-mentioned OR.
・Power up clear signal through gate 0R30t
The number PLIC is input. On the other hand, the flip-flop
F26. To each direct reset terminal R of F27
Also, the power up clear signal PTJ'C is input.
This will result in With such a configuration, the operation is performed according to the timing shown in FIG.
・To explain according to the chart, now from the signal line [phase]
When the incoming 2H2 signal reaches level 7, the I
The output of INV24 becomes low level. child
In this state, the freeib flop F28 is in the reset state.
Since the Q output is '0'', the OR gate 0R
The output of 28 is 0" and therefore the OR gate 0R2
9 is the 82nd illustrated ring input from the signal line [phase].
QO ratio output of counter 00 per month, usually ``'1''
Then, the signal becomes "O" only for the next l word after the CALE signal.
can be output. This or goo) The output of OR29 is Inno Kuichita IN,
Through V25, the timing node (synchronized with Luz TBO)
Since it is applied to the D terminal of the flip-flop F26,
, this flip-flop F26 is connected to the inverter IN
Outputs “l” from V25 for one word, then outputs “l” for the next one word.
It remains set only for a while. This flip flop F2
6 is set on output bus line 374.
Corresponds to the time when the shutter speed data TV is displayed.
Therefore, the Q output of this clip flop F26 and the clip
OR gate 0 receiving input of lock pulse CP
Through R32, to the shutter speed display register 650.
On the other hand, the clock/curse for data acquisition is given.
When the rounding circuit 998 is
data speed TVDS is taken into the register 650.
It will be remembered. On the other hand, the clip-flop F
26 Q outputs were synchronized to the timing pulse TBO.
Input to D terminal of flip flop 7'F27
Therefore, this flip-flop F27 is
The next word between the l words set by flop F26
It is set only during the mode. Therefore, this flip
While the drop F27 is set, the output bus line
It corresponds to the time when the throttle value data AV is posted on the button 374.
Since it is true, the Q output of this flip-flop F27
And the or game that receives the human power of Clock Pulse CP
Through the 0R31, the aperture value display is displayed at 648.
On the other hand, the clock pulse for data acquisition is given
, the displayed aperture value A from the rounding circuit 998
VDS is captured and stored in the register 648.
It happens. Note that the Q output of the flip-flop F27 is a flip-flop.
Since it is given to the set terminal of the flop F28,
Along with the aforementioned 7 lip, 70 tube, and F27 set, this flip
Rip frog F28 is also set and its Q output is “l”
”. This Q output is given to OR2g (or goo) and its output is
In order to make "]", the output of OR gate 0R28 is "l"
” and is given to OR29. Therefore,
, signal from signal line ◎ passes through OR29-
No, flip 7o7'F26. F27 is also going to lyce.
Therefore, the shutter speed display indicator
For register 650 and aperture value display register 648
Corresponding data is not imported and updated. This flip-flop F28 is connected to the signal line [phase].
Turn on the inverted signal of the 2Hz signal by inverter INV24.
Since the input is through the gate oR3o, the above 2
It is reset when the ``2 signal becomes low level.
This will result in On the other hand, this low level 2Hz signal is
through the data INV24 to the OR28.
Since the ``'1'' signal is given and the output is ``L'', the reliability is
The signal from line 0 is kept in a state where it cannot be received. Next, the 2″2 signal from the signal line [phase] goes high level.
, the output of the flip-flop F28 becomes “0”.
'', it is possible to receive the signal from signal line 0.
, therefore, by a similar method as described earlier, the shutter
A new display shutter is installed for the speed display register 650.
The data speed TVD8 is also set to the aperture value display register 648.
For each new display aperture value AVDS is imported.
It will be remembered rarely. Through the configuration described above, shutter speed, aperture value
In both cases, data for display is captured every 2) fz.
Therefore, the details in the digital display 402
Prevents flickering and misreading due to changes in data.
As a digital display system,
A very effective way to capture or display data.
be. As described above, the aperture value display register 648 and
and rounded off in the shutter speed display register 650.
Above, data of % stacking degree is captured at 2Hz intervals.
The displayed aperture value AVD8 and the displayed shutter speed TVDS are
, the next display control circuit 624 and the display driver 65
6 will be displayed on the digital display 402.
Ru. The display control circuit 624 simply controls the aperture value and shutter speed.
It is not intended to display, but to indicate the operating mode and
Depending on the operating status, symbols etc. are displayed as shown in Figure 10.
It is also necessary to control the blinking of the display, etc.
Here, the output bus line is input to the output control register 622.
Various signals TVFL taken in and stored from 374
, AVFL, EDSP, BDSP, EFD8. MDSP
etc. are involved. The detailed block diagram of the display control circuit 624 is shown in FIG.
The same figure is shown below. The middle 702 is a decoder ROM for displaying the aperture value.
For the second display section 250 of the finder display in Fig. 9
aperture value, “oP” and “cL”. Display symbols such as '00'' and 'EE'.
704 is a decoder for displaying shutter speed.
A shutter ROM for the first display section 244.
This is to display the data speed, and also
6Fi "HERE" for the first display section 244
, buLb", 'bEF". Symbol display data for displaying symbols such as "EF"
The digital display 402, which indicates each coder ROM, is a timing display as described above.
Dynamically driven based on pulses TB+-TB6
The details are shown in the digital display shown in Figure 90.
The explanation will be given according to a plan view of the container 402. In the figure, the first display section 244 is a display element for displaying fractions.
708, four 7 segments for shutter speed and symbol display
ment display elements 710, 714° and decimal point display element 7
It consists of 12, 7 segment display elements.
child 718 is displayed at the timing of timing pulse TB3.
The 7-segment display element 716 is driven to display the timing.
・The display is driven at the timing of pulse TB4 and displays 7 segments.
count display element 714 and display element 708 for fraction display
The display is driven at the timing of timing pulse TB5.
7 segment display element 710 and decimal point display element
712 is a display drive at the timing of timing pulse TB6.
In the figure, the second display section 250 is a 7-segment display.
Consists of elements 720, 724 and decimal point display element 722
The third display section 252 is "M"
It is composed of a display element 726 for displaying images.
However, the 7-segment display element 724 and the “M” display
The display element 726 for performing the timing pulse TBI
The display is driven at the timing, and the 7-segment display element 7.
20 and decimal point display element 722 are timing pulses T
The display is driven at timing B2. Therefore, each of the seven segment display elements 71O1714,
716, 718, 720, 724 with 7 rices
Timing pulse TB in column. 〜J that provides a time-sharing display signal synchronized with TB7
, the display element 726 for displaying "M", and the decimal point display element 7
22,712 and the display element 708 for displaying fractions,
l line, timing pulses TBI, TB2 . T.B.
6. By giving synchronized display signals to each of TB5
Therefore, this digital display 4021d is dynamic.
It can be driven. Note that the display device 402 is R7A-122-9 (
(manufactured by BOW MAR) can be used. The aperture value display decoder R,0M702 is shown in FIG.
An integrated circuit having the configuration as shown in the block diagram
It is composed of a path element 1702A, and its input terminal AO
K receives input from timing node, SB2, and also receives input from TB2.
The input terminal AI-A6 has an aperture value display register 648.
The output control register is connected to the input terminal A7.
・Receives EDSP signal input from 622. Also, the vI terminal has a timing... (Russ TBI
, the output of the NOR gate NOR3 receiving the input of TB2.
power or goo) is input through OR40. Therefore, the aperture value display decoder ROM 702 has a small
At least other than the timing of TBI and T'B2,
Output is regulated. Therefore, at the timing of TBL
The AO terminal input is 0'', and the timing of TB2 is
Then, the input is ``1'' to the AO terminal. Therefore, the aperture value
Depending on the input data from the display register 648, the timer
output terminal at each timing of timing pulses TBl and TB2.
From the child Do-D7, the 7-segment display on the digital display 402
7-segment display element 720
8 line output for display driving of 1 decimal point display element 722
I do. Note that the 7 lines from DO to D6 of this decoder FtOM702
The input output is the 7 segment display element 720.724
The decoder ROM 70 is also used for segment selection.
The output of the l line of D7 of 2 is the decimal point display element 722.
They will be used for selection drive. The shutter speed display decoder ROM 704 has a sixth
It has a configuration as shown in the block diagram in Figure 8.
It is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A, and its input terminal
The child AO receives timing pulse TB4. TB6 input
(or goo) Receives the output of OR38, and also receives the input
The timing node TB5 is connected to the power terminal AI. TB6's
Receives the output of OR gate 0R39 which is receiving input
There is. In addition, the shutter speed is displayed on input terminals A2 to A7.
The output of the register 650 is received. Also, that C8
Timing fist pulses TBl and 'TB2 are input to the terminals.
The output of the Noah gate NOR3 receiving the
Ta I NV 34, OR Gate 0R42, OR Game
) is input through OR43@. Accordingly, the above scenario
The shutter speed display decoder ROM 704 has at least
The output is regulated at the timing of TBI and TB2.
There is. Therefore, the output of this decoder ROM7o4 is meaningful.
The one who has it is Taiminkyu from TB3 to TB6, but now
Timing pulse T B 4. T B 5. T
When both B and 6 are not input, that is, the timing of TB3
In this case, the inputs of the AO and AI terminals are both “0”.
The timing pulse TB4 is also input.
At that time, only the O terminal input of that person becomes “1” and the tie
When the timing pulse TBS is input, the AI
Only the terminal input becomes "L", and the timing pulse T
When B6 is input, its AO and AI terminal inputs are
Both will be N I 11. Therefore, for shutter speed display
Depending on the output from register 650, the timing pulse
Output terminals DO to D at each timing of steps TB3 to TB6.
7 and 7, respectively, the 7 segments of the digital display 402.
segment display element 718.7 segment display element 716.7
Segment display element 714 and fraction display element 708.
7 segment display element 710 and decimal point display element 71
Outputs 8 lines for driving the second display. Note that this decoder ROM 704 has 7 lines of Do-D6.
The output of the 7-segment display elements 710, 714,
716, 718 for segment selection, and the deco
The 1 line output of D7 of 0M7Q2 is as shown in the fractional table above.
Selective driving of the display element 708 and the decimal point display element 722
They will be used for different purposes. The symbol display decoder R・0M706 is the block shown in FIG.
An integrated circuit having the configuration as shown in the lock diagram
It consists of an element 1702A, and its input terminal AO
is the timing pulse through the OR gate 0R38.
STB4. ``TB617) is receiving input and is inputting again
A timer is connected to the terminal AI through the OR gate OR39.
It receives the input pulses TBS and TB6. Also
, "EF" is input to the input terminals A4 to A6, respectively. Specify “bEF”, “buLb”, “EEEE” display.
A command signal is being input. Also, the C8 terminal
, upon receiving the input of timing pulses Ti1l and TB2.
The output of the NOR gate NOR3 is I/2(-/INV
34, off game) OR41t' Street. is entered. Therefore, ~ for the shutter speed display
The decoder ROM 706 has at least TBI and TB2.
Its output is regulated by timing. Therefore, this
The output of the decoder ROM 706 has meaning in TB3.
~It is the timing of TB6, but now the timing pulse
TB4゜TB5. When both TBO and TBO are not input, i.e.
, at the timing of TB3, the input of the AO and AI terminals
Both become 0'', and timing pulse TB4 is input.
When the input is input to the AO terminal, only the AO terminal input becomes 'l'.
or when the timing pulse TBS is input.
, only the AI terminal input is “L”, and the timing
When pulse TB6 is input, its AO. Both AI terminal inputs are 11". Therefore, this decoder
The data ROM 706 responds to the input from its A4 to A7 terminals.
At each timing of timing pulses TB3 to TB6,
The power terminals DO to D6 each have a digital display 4.
02 7 segment display element 718.7 segment display
Element 716.7 segment display element 714.7 segment
Outputs 7 lines to drive the display of the hydrogen element 710 on the front panel.
cormorant. Note that 7 of DO to D6 of this decoder ROM 706
The line output is the 7 segment display elements 710, 71
Used for segment selection of 4,716,718
This will result in Nao, each of the above data:y-ta ROM702. 704°70
6 Do-D6 outputs are summarized respectively, and the total
Provided to the display drive circuit 656 as a 7-line signal
. In addition, each D7 output of the decoder ROM 702, 704
The power is condensed into one or goo) through OR37
The signal is applied to the display drive circuit 656. Furthermore, the display drive circuit
Two 75491 (manufactured by TI) are used as 656.
ing. On the other hand, □ N M 11 symbol display element 726 is displayed.
The signal for
Output P signal in synchronization with timing pulse TBI
Obtained depending on the situation. This and goo) AND74
The output is passed through the OR gate OR37 to the decoder.
The above display along with each D7 output of the reader ROM702 and 704
The signal is applied to a drive circuit 656. In addition, each of the decoder ROMs 702, 704 and 706 are
Its output is regulated by various factors. Especially deco
The outputs of FLOM704 and FLOM706 are both tied to
Because it is output in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6.
, it is necessary to select one of them and output it.
. Also, if you want the shutter speed display data to blink,
, it is necessary to regulate the output of the decoder ROM 704 at regular intervals.
If you want the aperture value display data to blink, set the
It is necessary to regulate the output of the coder ROM 702 at a constant cycle.
Yes, and the error warning display “EEEEEE” flashes.
When displaying, the output of decoder ROM702.706
It is necessary to regulate the input control unit 3 at regular intervals.
The input analog data at the A-D converter at 60
During integration, that is, while the INT signal is being input, the file
The light emission from the digital display 4゛02 in the scanner is TTL.
Do not remove all decoders as it may adversely affect the photometry system.
The output of data ROM702, 704, and 706 is regulated.
It is necessary to make the digital display 402 inoperable, and
When the camera device mechanism is operating for exposure,
The light emitted from the digital display 402 inside the inder has a negative effect on exposure.
If the self-timer is operating or for a long time,
Digital display when taking pictures with an exposure time of seconds
Prevents unnecessary battery consumption due to unnecessary operation of the device 402
All decoder ROMs 702, 704゜706
The output is suppressed and the digital display 402 is disabled.
It is necessary to do so. In Figure 89, Noah Goo) NOR5 has signal lines ■ and O.
There is a signal input from the signal line ■, but there is no signal input from the camera.
"l" before the exposure control mechanism of the equipment starts operating.
A signal is sent from the signal line O to the exposure control mechanism of the camera device.
The signals that become "l" after the end of the operation are respectively
It has been entered. Therefore, this Noah Get N0R5?
'1 when the exposure control mechanism of the camera device is in operation.
” will be output as a signal.This Noah game
The output of N0R5 is given to OR34.
Ru. On the other hand, this OR gate is connected to the signal line shown in Figure 82.
The INT signal indicating that integration is in progress from 0 is input, and the
The output of OFL34 is a digital table.
A blanking signal for erasing all displays on the indicator 402
It will work as follows. Output of said OR gate 0R34
Power is from OR gate 0R35 to inverter INV27.
A
Since it is given to ND74, the AND gate AND74 is
Its output is regulated and therefore the selection table for displaying “M”
Blanking will be applied to the display signal. On the other hand, the output of OR35 (or gate)
To the τ terminal of the decoder ROM702 through OR40,
Decoder RO through OR gates 0R42, 0R43
Or goo) OFL42,0R to the CS terminal of M704
43 to the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM706.
Therefore, each decoder ROM 702
Blanking is applied to each output of ゜704 and '706.
Because it becomes. ! The display on the digital display 402 is restricted.
It will be. Note that clock pulse C is applied to OR gate 0FL35.
P is given, and the output of OR134 (or goo)
When the power is NO, it is always synchronized with the clock pulse CP.
This clock pulse will be output.
A signal synchronized with the CP is sent to each of the decoder ROMs 702 and 7.
When the output contents of 04゜706 change, the digital table
Blank the display 402 so that data is not displayed unnecessarily.
It is used to place a king. Now, for the digital display section 402, the first
The shutter speed is displayed on the display section 244, and the shutter speed is displayed on the display section 244.
The aperture value or "CL"OP" is displayed on the display section 250 of 2.
00", etc., and if necessary, the number
If you want the display section 252 of No. 3 to display "M", press B.
Naturally, the DSP signal, BDSP signal, and EFD8 signal are “0”.
Therefore, it corresponds to the cs terminal of the decoder ROM 702.
Then, as mentioned earlier, at times other than TB1 and TB2,
A blanking signal is applied to the decoder ROM7.
For the C8 terminal of 04, as mentioned earlier, TBI and
A blanking signal is issued at the timing of TB2.
. On the other hand, for the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM706
is a BDSP signal, an E DSP' signal and an EFDS signal.
AND73 receiving signal input
The output signal is input, so the output is l II.
The output of the Noah gate N0R4 is
Because it is given as a blanking signal through R41.
The output of this decoder ROM 706 is regulated. Therefore, from the decoder j-rtoM7o2, 704
Based on the output, the digital display 402
The shutter speed is displayed on the display section 244 of
The aperture value or "cL", "OP",
Display a symbol such as “OO” and, if necessary, a third
``M'' is displayed on the display section 252 of . In this display state, the aperture calculated as a result of the calculation is now displayed.
If the value exceeds the limit that can be controlled by lens device 2,
The aperture value display should blink (s' as the AVFL signal).
I have already mentioned that i+ is output.
However, in this case, this AVFL signal is
Connect the inverter INV from the signal line [phase] on which the
2H2 on/off signal is given through 33
This NAND is given to the gate NAND3.
・Goo) 2Hz on/off signal from NA'ND3
It is output and input to NAND4. l
On the other hand, this Nando Goo) NAND4 is
It is receiving the input of NAND2, but the NAND game with
BD'SP signal is 0 among its inputs.
, its output is °′l″, and therefore the nand
・Goo LNAN II (4 is '2H2's on/off signal output
It will be a matter of force. This NAND gate NAND4 output
- decoder ROM7 through OR gate 0R40
It is input to the cs terminal of 02, and the output of the ROM is output at 2Hz.
Apply blanking. Therefore, this decoder ROM 702'
Aperture displayed on second display section 250 of screen display 402
The value display will blink at 2H2. Also, the shutter speed obtained as a result of the calculation is
Shutter speed exceeds controllable limit
As a T V F L signal to make the degree display blink.
I have already mentioned that '1'° is output.
However, in this case, this TVPL signal is the ON state of 2H2.
・From the signal line [phase] where the off signal is on to the inverter
A 2Hz on/off signal is given through INV33.
Since this is given to the AND gate AND72,
2H2 on/off from AND72
A signal will be output. This and ge-)AN
The output of D72 is decoded through OR gate 0R43.
input to the vI terminal of the data ROM704, and the output of the ROM
Blanking is applied at 2Hz. Therefore, this decoding
The data on the digital display 402 is determined by the data ROM 704
The shutter speed displayed on the display section 244 of No. 1 is 2H.
2 will cause it to blink. Next, the camera enters flash photography mode and receives a charging completion signal.
When applied to the force control unit 360, as an EFD8 signal
The IT multiplication signal is output from the central control unit 362.
As mentioned before, at this time, the first table
As shown in Figure 1O (c)' (d), 1. control
"EF" is not displayed to indicate the charging speed and charging completion.
be done. Note that the shutter speed to be controlled is determined by the fractional display element 708.
．． 7 segment display element 710°714 and decimal point display
It is displayed with element 712, and decoder R,0
M704 and timing pulse TBS, TB6 are involved.
In addition, the "BF" display indicating charging completion is
This is done using 7 segment display elements 716 and 718.
Decoder ROM 706 and timing pulse
TB3. T-B4 is involved. Now, “l” as an EFDS signal is shown in Figure 89.
When input to the A4 terminal of the decoder ROM706, this decoder
Timing pulse TB3. TB4
The signals output during this period are the 7 segments of the first display section.
The display elements 716 and 718 are designated as "I'EF". On the other hand, the decoder ROM 704 contains a memory for displaying the shutter speed.
A signal for shutter speed display is applied from the register 650.
be done. Note that the shutter speed at this time depends on the strobe synchronization system.
Since it is less than the shutter speed (for example, 1/60th of a second),
7-segment display elements 710 and 714 of the display section 1
It does not exceed the scope of the display. In this state, AND73 has EFD
S signal is input, but this AND gate AND73
is the timing pulse through the OR gate OR,44
TB3. Since TB4 (7) input is being received, this AND
・Goo) AND73 is TB3. At the timing of jB4'
This results in a 1" output. This 1" output is
Goo) is input to NOFL4 and its output is 0".
Therefore, the output of this NOR gate N0R4 is connected to the inverter IN.
After inverting through V32, it passes through OR gate 0R43.
The decoder ROM 704 input to the C8 terminal is
TB3. Blanking is applied only during the timing of TB4.
Also, if the output of NOR4 (Noah Goo) is
) Decoder that is manually connected to the C8 terminal through OR41
ROM706 is TB3. Timing other than TB4, i.e.
, TBS, and TB6 timings.
It will be done. Therefore, in flash photography mode, the digital display
The first display section 244 of the indicator 402 shows the shutter speed and "
EF" will be displayed. On the other hand, the digital
A strobe is displayed on the second display section 250 of the screen display 402.
Aperture value display register 648 unless in full flash mode
Aperture value data is output from , and according to the data,
The display aperture value signal is not output from the decoder ROM70'2.
The aperture value will be displayed. Also, digital
For the third display section 252 of the screen display 402,
If the SP signal is "1", 'M' is displayed.
. Also, if Valve is selected as the shutter speed,
About “l” signal being output as BDSP signal
As mentioned before, at this time, the first display section shows
As shown in Figure 10(b), 'buLb' is displayed.
It will be done. When 'l' is input as a BDSP signal,
This "1" signal is AND goo, )AND70, AND
71, but the AND gate AND70 is input to
The EFD8 signal is fed through the inverter INV30.
AND71FiBFDS
Since the signal is input directly, the EFDS signal is “θ”.
As long as
is input to the A6 terminal of the decoder ROM706.
Ru. As a result, the decoder ROM 706 becomes a digital
buLb" is displayed on the first display section 244 of the display 4o2.
A signal is output to cause this to occur. In such a state
, BDSP signal is input to NOR4 (Noah Gu)
Therefore, the output is set to '0', but for this reason, this Noah game
Invert the output of N0R4 through inverter INV32.
Then, connect it to the C8 terminal through Of'L43.
The input decoder ROM 704 is blanking.
is applied, and the output of the NOR gate N0R4 is ORed.
・Goo) CM (Input to C8 terminal through 41
The decoder ROM 706 has a signal for displaying “buLb”.
Output will be performed. Therefore, it is suitable for pulp shooting mode.
In the first display section 244 of the digital display 402,
will be displayed as 'b uLb'.On the other hand,
, on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402.
is the aperture display register unless the MDSP signal is “1”.
According to the output signal from the star 648, the photographic lens equipment to be used is
The open aperture value of position 2 is displayed, and the MDSP signal is
If so, the aperture value is not displayed and the third display section 25
2 is displayed as “M” (this is shown in Figure 10)
This is the circular shown in . Also, if you are in strobe shooting mode and the shutter is
If Pulp is selected as the speed, the BFDS signal and
The l” signal is output as the and BD8P signal, respectively.
As mentioned before, at this time, the first
As shown in Fig. 10 (C) and (d)K, the surface thread part is
EF” is displayed.EFDS signal and BDSP
When "l" is input as a signal, the area receiving the meat input is
The output of the gate AND71 becomes “L” and the decode
The data is input to the A5 terminal of the reader ROM 706. the result,
From the decoder ROM 706, the digital display 4
02's first display section 244 displays "buLb".
A signal is output in order to make this happen. In such a state B D
Since the S and P signals are input to NOR4 (Noah Gu),
Assume that the output of is 0'', so this Noah gate NO
・The output of R4 was inverted through the inverter INV32.
above) is input to the C8 terminal through OR43.
The decoder ROM 704 is blanked,
In addition, the output of NOR4 (Ia Goo) is
The decoder input to the C8 terminal through OFt41
da ROM7'06 outputs a signal for displaying "bEF"
It happens. Therefore, when using strobe photography mode and pulp photography,
In the shadow mode, -l on the digital display 402
“bEF” will be displayed on the display section 244.
. On the other hand, the second display section 2 of the digital display 402
50 has no aperture unless the strobe is in full flash mode.
No aperture value data is output from the value display register 648.
and display from decoder R, 0M702 according to the data.
The aperture value signal is output and the aperture value is displayed.
Become. Further, the third display section 2 of the digital display 402
For 52, if the MDSP signal is 1", M
” is displayed. Also, when the “l” signal is input as the ED8P signal, the previous
The first and second display sections 24 of the digital display 402
4. At 250, EEEE EE” flashes on the display.
. In this way, if a 1" signal is input as an EDSP signal,
In this case, for the decoder ROM 702, the “EE” display
BD to the 7 input terminal of the person in order to output the signal for
While inputting the SP signal, it is also input to the decoder FLOM7o6.
In response to this, a signal is output for displaying “EEEE”.
If possible, input the EDSP signal to the person 1 input terminal.
. On the other hand, this EDSP signal is a 2H2 on/off signal.
Connect inverter INV33 from the signal line [phase] on which
Nando is given a 2Hz on/off signal through the
・Goo) This NAND 7 game is given to NAND2.
The 2H2 on/off signal is output from the root NAND2.
input to NAND4. On the other hand, this
NAND gate NAND4 is NAND gate NAND
3 is being received, but this NAND gate NAND
3 is as long as the AVF・L signal among its inputs is “0”
, its output is 61”, so the Nando Goo)
NAND4 outputs the 2H2 on/off signal, and this
The signal is sent to decoder ROM7 through OR40 (or goo)
02's C and S terminals, and the corresponding ROM702 (D output
Blanking is applied with a force K 2 Hz. Therefore, this
Digital display 402 by decoder ROM 702
The "EE" display displayed on the second display section 250 of the
2 will cause it to blink. Also, the Nando Goo
) The 2Hz on/off signal that is the output of NAND2 is input.
The Nand bar is inverted through the INV28, and the
2H2 on/off signal which is the output of gate NAND4
After being phased with (or goo) through OR41
It is input to the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM70'6, and the corresponding RO
Apply blanking to the output of M706 with 2H2. Junior 2
This decoder ROM 706 allows digital display.
' BEE displayed on the first display section 244 of the device 402
R” display will be flashed at 2.Hz.On the other hand,
The HDSP signal is input to the NOR gate N0R4.
Therefore, this NOR gate N0R4 outputs “0”.
As a result, the “0” output of this NOR gate N0R4 is input.
After inverting through inverter INV32, OR gate
Decoder input to C8 terminal through OR43
The output of the ROM 704 is completely regulated. As mentioned above, <“1” signal input as EDSP signal
If so, the digital display 402 will display “REE”.
E EE″’ flashing display at 2Hz intervals
This is the reason. Next, data for control is transmitted from output bus line 374.
We will now explain in detail how the import is performed. The control data on the output bus line 374
Data TV for shutter speed control and aperture control
The data AVs for controlling the number of stages is the shutter speed.
As mentioned above, the degree control data TV is 9. CALE
The next word the signal is placed on bus line 366
1 synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB7 in between.
/8 step precision data is loaded onto the output bus line 374.
, and the aperture stage number control data AVs is as described above.
As shown, the CALE signal is placed on bus line 366.
Timing pulse for 1 word time of 3rd word after
As data of 178-dan Seika synchronized with TBO~TB7
is placed on output bus line 374. That is, the shaft
The cutter speed control data TV is provided by the asynchronous circuit 660 in FIG.
It is synchronized with the output of the output signal line [phase] and is not yet narrowed down.
The stage number control data AVs is synchronized with the output of the i line [phase].
0, that is, the shutter speed control data TV is output bus
- Taken from line 374 in synchronization with the signal line [phase] output.
However, this shutter speed control data
TV is the apex value, i.e. the reciprocal of the actual shirt time in seconds.
Because it supports column number compression values, the system equivalent to the apex value is
Corresponds to the actual shutter speed from the shutter speed data TV.
In order to obtain the data, some kind of arithmetic operation is required.
. In other words, this shutter speed data TV is used as the actual shutter speed data.
In order to make a signal with a size corresponding to seconds, it is necessary to
The shutter speed control is determined from the apex value of the shutter speed.
It is necessary to subtract the control data TV. The result of this subtraction is
The data obtained is equivalent to the apex value in seconds for the control shirt.
Based on the data obtained in this way,
By expanding exponentially based on the standard shutter speed,
It is possible to obtain real time. As mentioned above,
, to obtain the real time from the shutter speed equivalent to Apex.
is the shutter speed data T from the reference shutter speed
It is necessary to subtract V, but it is provided for that purpose.
The subtraction circuit 612 is the subtraction circuit 612. As described above, the result obtained through the subtraction circuit 612 is
The control shirt timer data TVs is the shirt starter time control record.
It is input to registers 614 and 626, but each register
The shutters 614 and 626 are connected to the shutter from the synchronous circuit 660.
based on the control signal that specifies the acquisition time of the data speed data.
and outputs the shirt time control data TV to the bus line.
It is separated from 374 and stored. By the way, the above
The shirt starter time control register 614 controls the shirt starter time data.
The integer part of the data TVs, the shutter control register 626
is set to store the decimal part of the shirt data TV.
It was kicked out. On the other hand, the refinement stage number control data AVs is
Angled from input 374 in synchronization with the signal line [phase] output.
It is a good translation, and the number of refinement stages control data AV
s is the synchronous circuit in the narrowing down stage number control register 628.
Importing the number of refinement stages control data AVs from 660
The number of stages of narrowing down is controlled based on a control signal that specifies the time.
control data AVs from output bus line 374.
Capture and memorize. The data for control as explained above, that is, the shirt
Time control data TV and number of refinement stages control data AV
The configuration for incorporating s is its detailed logic diagram.
gram is shown in FIG. As is clear from Fig. 91, one shutter second control register
Stars 614 and 626 are signal line [phase] outputs shown in Figure 82.
An integrated circuit element CD4015 whose clock terminal C input is
and the number of narrowing stages control register 62.
8 connects the signal line [phase] output shown in Figure 82 to the clock terminal C input.
It is composed of an integrated circuit element CD4015 that serves as a power source. The integrated circuit element CD4015 is shown in FIG.
A detailed logic diagram is shown. In the configuration shown in Figure 91, AND75,
AND76. AND77. AND78. O
A Gate 0R45, 0R46, Exclusive Or
・Gate EX4. EX5. earbar fi INV
35.7'lJ 7 Fu-70 Tube F29. noah own game
The configuration of N0R5 is a well-known subtraction circuit configuration.
and timing pulse for NOR gate N0R5.
Output from data input in synchronization with TBO-TB7
Timing pulse TBO-TB7 on bus line 374
Subtracts the input data in synchronization with and displays the result.
From EX5, Tataimi
output in synchronization with TBO to TB7. Chi
By the way, the ANDG is connected through the inverter INV35.
-) Input timing pulse TB7 to AND78
The purpose is to prevent carries that occur in the final stage of the operation,
The carry value for the operation in the next TBO to TB7.
This is to prevent interference. In addition, for NOR5 (Noah Goo), Nyatta seconds
A value equivalent to 7 points per second of shirt data, which serves as a reference for control.
will be input, but in this example, the maximum
1/2000th of a second is the standard shirt time.
Therefore, 2000 minutes for NOR5 (Noah Gu)
Binary code and data corresponding to 1 second of shirt time
will be input. This data will be shown later, but
“10101000” and therefore this data is
When synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB7, the timing
Mining Pulse TB7. TB5. ．． Said Noah at TB3°
- "1" input will be given to gate N0R5. In order to realize such a configuration, in this embodiment, the Noah
Timing number pulse TB3. for gate N0R5. T
B5. TB7's human power is being carried out. The above is an example of the subtraction circuit 612 having the configuration as described above.
Crusive or Goo) The output data from EX5° is
Input terminals of the shutter speed control registers 614 and 626
However, at this stage, the said data is actually
Whether the control shirt is compatible with the second time TV or not
It is unknown. Therefore, in this embodiment, the shirt timing control register 6
14+626 clock terminal C, output bus line 3
74 will have data TV about shutter speed.
At the same 2-word time, the output signal of the synchronization circuit 660
Apply the signal output from the line [phase]. As a result, the applicable
Registers 614+626 are the outputs of the subtraction circuit 612.
Separate and take out the shutter time control data TV from inside.
It is something that accumulates a lot. Through such operations, the system
QO to Q7 of the timer control registers 614 and 626
From each terminal, is the shutter speed control data TV in the upper digits?
are output in parallel towards the lower digits, and the QO-Q4
The output corresponds to the integer part, and Q5 to Q7 correspond to the decimal part.
On the other hand, the narrowing down stage number control register 628
Line 374 is received as an input terminal, but this register
The output bus line 374 is connected to the clock terminal C of the controller.
The same word where the input stage number control data AVs is loaded.
from the output signal line [phase] of the synchronous circuit 660 at
Since the signal to be output is input, the register 628
is from among the data on the output bus line 374. Separate the AVs and store them.
It is something that accumulates. Through this operation, the narrowing
From each output terminal of QO-Q7 of the stage number control register 628
In this case, the number of narrowing stages control data AVs is from the upper digit to the lower digit.
It will be output in parallel towards. As described above, the shutter speed control register 614
+626 accumulated shutter time control data TV and
Refinements accumulated in the refinement stage number control register 628
Based on the stage number control data AVs, this camera system has three stages.
Exposure control operations are performed in the mechanical portion 358 of the system.
By the way, let's talk about this camera mechanism part 358 and its operation.
Explain the sequence. This camera system is installed in the mechanism section 358.
Shutter release means 396. Throttle control means 398. S
Three electromagnetic mechanical converters called shutter speed control means 400
As mentioned earlier, the movement is controlled through the steps.
As stated above, the operation of each of the control means described above will now be explained.
explain. Most of the mechanical mechanisms of this camera system are traditional
It is no different from a normal camera mechanism. The shutter release means 396 is energized for a certain period of time.
The mechanical /-can of the camera mechanism is run by
An electromagnetic solenoid that is linked to a trigger mechanism that
By energizing this electromagnetic solenoid in a pulsed manner, the body
AE lever 94 for presetting the aperture value from the A-4 side
Start of travel, lens device 20 aperture is driven, mirror is
Raising the front curtain of the focal plane shutter
Mechanical sequence mechanisms such as starting running operate.
. Further, the aperture control means 398 depends on the energization.
Move the clamp mechanism of the AE lever 94 to the clamp release side.
An electromagnetic solenoid that energizes
The AE lever 94 is released from the clamp by applying electricity to the
It is possible to run in this state, and clamps when the power is turned off.
be done. In such a configuration, the mechanical
Before starting the running sequence, the throttle control means 398
The clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 is activated by energizing it.
Hold the clamp 2 on the release side and release the camera mechanism.
AE that starts running when the mechanical sequence starts running
Leave the lever 94 in a position where it can move. Next, turn the machine on.
The AE lever 94 started running according to the sequence
If the distance traveled is detected, the distance traveled becomes a predetermined value.
At this point, the energization to the aperture control means 398 is stopped.
By doing so, the clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 can be clamped.
return to the pump position and clamp the AE lever 94.
Ru. As mentioned above, the aperture value of the lens device 2 is preset.
However, regarding this matter,
As mentioned before. Further, the shutter speed control means 400 is as follows. The focal plane changes depending on the power supply.
This is an electromagnetic solenoid that restricts the trailing curtain from starting to run.
Therefore, depending on the energization of this electromagnetic solenoid, the above-mentioned shutter is activated.
The rear curtain of the motor vehicle is in a travel restricted state, and the front curtain is
Driving restrictions on the rear curtain of Nyatta have been lifted, and after the Nyatta
The curtain begins to move. In such a configuration, the camera
Simultaneously with the start of the mechanical sequence of the la mechanism. The speed control means 400 is energized and
The movement of the rear shutter curtain is regulated, and after the front curtain of the shutter runs,
, starts timing, and when the measured time reaches a predetermined value.
By the way, the power supply to the speed control means 400 is stopped.
1/C depend on the above-mentioned operation of the shutter rear curtain.
By coating the shutter and starting the movement of the shutter rear curtain.
Exposure time can be controlled. In addition, when the trailing curtain of the roller finishes running, a mechanical system is activated.
The mechanism is used for mirrors, aperture drive levers 98, etc.
Performs return operation. Note that the shutter release means 396. aperture control hand
Step 398. ) The speed control means 400 is
timing and operation time must be precisely controlled,
For this purpose, accurate sequences obtained under various conditions are required.
faith for speed control. For this reason: (Output control section-36
4 is a control signal generation circuit 646. This control signal generation circuit 646 outputs a signal to the shutter lever.
Leeds Means 396. Aperture control means 398. shutter speed
The control means 400 performs an appropriate exposure control operation.
drive control signal for an appropriate amount of time at a timing such that
are given, but these control timings or times are
is the self-timer operating time and the number of refinement stages control register.
The aperture stage accumulated in the star 628 is removed by pressing the AE lever.
At the timing when 94 is running, the shutter front curtain starts running.
After that, the shutter time is stored in the shutter speed control registers 614 and 626.
The real time that corresponds to the shattered second time data elapses.
Timing, Mechanical Sequence Mechanical Delay
It is not made based on the time to be compensated, etc. The output data of the shutter speed control register 626 and
The output data of the narrowing down stage number control register 628 is
One person inputs the data selector 632 and outputs the control signal.
Selectively down/down based on commands from raw circuit 646
La/ri 642 is given. On the other hand, the output data of the shutter speed control register 614
The data is a constant data corresponding to time for various temporal controls.
The output of the constant generation circuit 616 provided to generate the data
It is input to the select gate 618 along with the force data, and
selectively based on commands from the control signal generation circuit 646.
The signal is applied to frequency divider circuit 620. Note that the down counter 642 has its clock terminal
AE lever 940 via select gate 640
(pulse signal FPC and the above)
The output of the frequency divider circuit 620 is inputted with a pulse signal,
The data input from the data selector 632 is
The parameters input through the select gate 640 are
The result of such a subtraction count is
The carry generated as a result is applied to the control signal generation circuit 646.
It has a structure that looks like this. If you have such a configuration and want to control the number of refinement stages now,
, through the data selector 632, the narrowing down
From the stage number control register 628 to the down color/register 642
In contrast, refinement stage number control data AVs is provided. On the other hand, the clock terminal of the evening counter 642
is the AE Renoku-9 via the select gate 640.
z pulse signal FP'C output according to the traveling distance of 4)
is input. At this time, when AE Leno <-94 runs
, in the down counter 642, fi,
The 9-stage number control data is controlled by the pulse signal FPC.
AVs is subtracted. Through such operation the down
・When the counter 642 outputs the signal I) -Jf, this
The carry is before the number of pulses input to the pulse signal FPCO.
Indicates that the number of cutting stages control data AVm is matched.
Therefore, the traveling position of the AE lever 94 at that time is
reaches the preset position corresponding to the number of aperture control stages of lens device 2.
This shows that the Therefore, enter the carry
The control signal generating means 646 that is
8 by clamping the AE lever 94.
The number of aperture stages of the lens device 2 is adjusted according to the aperture stage number system.
It is possible to preset to the same value as the control data AVs.
It is. In addition, when performing shirt time control now, the data
Through the selector, the Nyatsuta second control register 62
From 6 to down counter 642, shirtta seconds
Decimal data of the control data TV is given.
. Note that this down counter 642 is
After adding “1” to the data, the data is multiplied by 8.
, capture this data. On the other hand, the down counter
The select gate 640 is connected to the clock terminal of 642.
The output pulse of the frequency dividing circuit 620 is inputted via
. At this time, the frequency dividing circuit 620
From the register 614, the shutter time control data TV
The data of the integer part is retrieved through 618.
The frequency is divided by a pulse signal of 1/8 of the reference time.
The down counter 64 outputs a pulse.
2 is the output of the frequency dividing circuit 620.
Subtracted based on pulse. Through such operations, the
When the carry is output from the down counter 642, this
The carry is when the number of output pulses of the peripheral path 620 is small.
Matches data regarding shutter time control data of less than or equal to
This indicates that the Nyatsuta time control data
This indicates that the actual time corresponding to the data has elapsed. subordinate
Therefore, the control signal generating means 64 to which the carry is inputted
6 controls the shutter speed through the shutter speed control means 400.
By starting the shutter trailing curtain, the shutter speed can be set as follows:
In the real time corresponding to the shirt time control data TVs
It is something that can be controlled. In addition, we will explain in more detail about the shutter speed control.
If so, the shirt time control data TVs is 1/
It is given as 8-step precision data, and this data
Now, let TVs −P + s, −(18)
Ku. However, p and α are integer values. This monitor is standard
For the interval Y. TR= Y X 2(P”ρ (19)
This corresponds to the actual exposure time. However, di
In a jitter-like circuit, in order to calculate 2 (P + g), it is necessary to
Since the circuit 5 becomes extremely complex, in this embodiment, 2P (1 + Xi) (2
0). Therefore 1. Actual exposure time TR is TR = YX2PX (1 + rental) (21)
It will be expressed as. Furthermore, this formula is. Since it can be replaced with TR=-X2PX(8+α)(22), divide it with the frequency divider circuit 620.
Create a frequency-divided pulse of ¥×2P, and use this frequency-divided pulse to
8+α data taken into counter 642
Decrease the count by counting the actual time in seconds
It is possible to obtain TR. Note that the constant generating circuit 616 specifies the self-second time.
Compensate for data that needs to be determined and delays in mechanical operation.
At the same time, the operation of the release means 396
The data for determining the time and the 2 Hz
Data for generating on/off signals is output.
Both are frequency-divided by the frequency dividing circuit 620, and
After being converted into real time, the control signal generating means 646
and said shutter release means 396. Aperture
Control means 398. Regarding the shutter speed control means 400
This is the basis of the output control signal. Next, we will discuss the detailed operation of this output control section 364 and its realization.
The detailed circuit configuration for this will be explained. In the camera system of this embodiment, the camera device
The control state is divided into eight states. This means that the operation of the camera device passes through various sequences.
This is because the control circuit operates like an electric leopard.
This is because it is necessary to correspond to such a sequence. This camera system specifies the eight control states mentioned above.
I am creating CC0-CC7 signals to do this, but the C
The operation of the camera device corresponding to each signal from co to CC7 is as follows.
This will be explained according to FIG. The state of the CCO signal is determined by the input control unit 360.
Analog data acquisition and A-D conversion, central
Calculation by the control phloem 362, each calculation by the output control unit 364
This is a cycle that repeats the display of seed data, and then shuts down.
(■) until the release button 18 is pressed.
cc in loop. The signal is retained. In this state, the photographer has 7 eyes.
Various data can be displayed on the digital display 402 in the printer 13.
You can check the display and change the setting data.
Ru. Note that the EDSP signal is “1” or the power is turned on.
As long as the first CALE signal after input is not output, this
The state of the cco signal should be maintained. The state of the CC2 signal corresponds to when the self-timer is operating.
During this cycle, the digital display 402
Although the display of various data is stopped, the input control unit 360
Photometric or analog data capture and A
-D conversion and calculations by the central control unit 362 are performed repeatedly.
During this period, the LED lamp 32 (described later) is turned off.
to let the photographer know that the self-timer is operating.
Close. Furthermore, from the state of this cco signal, the CC2 signal
The transition to the state occurs when the 5ELF signal is “1”.
When the release button 18 is pressed, the SR signal goes off.
iIc is performed (1). In addition, CC2@ issue
state, the 5ELF signal becomes “O” or E
'If the DSP signal is "1"', the camera device will
The state returns from the state of the 2 signal to the state of the CCO signal (II). CC3 to CC6 signals are in perfect condition, camera device mechanism part
Transition in parallel with 358 mechanical sequence transitions
, and when the state changes to the CC3 signal state, the aperture control
Power to the control means 398 is started, and the AE lever 94 is clicked.
The lamp mechanism is biased toward the clamp release side, and the AE lever 9
4 is now drivable. By the way, the state of this CC3 signal is based on the self-timer operation.
CC2f'i when the state of the CC2 signal in progress is completed
(■) or shutter release.
When the button 18 is pressed, the 5ELF signal becomes “0”
, transition directly from the state of the CCO signal (
厘) Obtained depending on the situation. Note that the state of the CC3 signal is at a certain predetermined time.
It is held for a while and then shifts to the CCI signal state (
Vl). - In this CC1 signal state, the camera device mechanism part
The shutter release means 396 of 358 is energized and the
Trigger mechanism to start the mechanical sequence
The state of the CCI signal to be operated is also set to a predetermined value.
It is held for a certain period of time and then transferred to the next CC5 signal state.
(■), but depending on the operation of the trigger mechanism, the camera
The mechanical 7-counse of the device starts running. The state of the CC5 signal is an aperture control cycle,
According to the mechanical sequence, ``mirror up''
, the movement of the AE lever 94, etc. are performed. This C
In the state of the C5 signal, the travel distance of the AE lever 94
The narrowing down stage is based on the pulse signal FP that is output accordingly.
A subtraction count of the numerical control data AVs is performed, and the
If the number of pulses of the pulse signal FPC matches the data AVs,
or, if not, a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
Later, the state of this CC5 signal will be changed to the CC4 signal.
A transition to state (1) is performed, but at this time the above-mentioned
The power supply to the control means 398 is stopped and the AE lever 9
4 is clamped and its movement is restricted. That is, C with
While in the C5 signal state, the body 4 side of the lens device 2
The aperture shiver will be reset from the beginning. Note that the state of this CC5 signal is determined at certain times.
After the time has passed, it ends and transitions to the CC4 signal state.
, the number of pulses of the pulse signal FPC is equal to the data AVs.
This is the case when the lens device 2 side
If the aperture preset is set manually or automatically.
Applicable when the minimum aperture value AMAX is selected.
It is something that will be done. Note that when entering this CC5 signal state, the shutter rear curtain
In order to regulate the running, the shutter speed control means 400 is
energization starts. Note that in this CC5 signal state, the aperture preset
and the aperture adjustment of the lens device 2 by the aperture drive lever 98.
The scanning operations are performed in parallel. Next, when the CC5 signal changes to the CC4 signal state,
, the shutter front curtain runs as a mechanical sequence progresses.
Start a line. With the start of this Nyanota first curtain,
Exposure to the film surface does not start immediately.
, because there is a mechanical lag time, compensate for the time with
The state of this CC4 signal, including the meaning of
Ru. Next, exposure is started by the start of the shutter front curtain.
Then, the CTST signal is input, but the CTST signal of
Therefore, the state of this CC4 signal is the same as the state of CC6 signal.
Transfer (IX). The state of the CC6 signal is the shutter speed control cycle.
After entering the CC6 signal state, start the shutter speed control.
Measurement of real time leading to data TVs and reference time Y is performed.
Then, the time corresponding to the shutter speed control data m has elapsed.
After that, the state of CC6 signal changes to the state of CC7 signal.
Yes (X) In this CC7 signal state, energize first.
Is the current state of the shutter speed control means 400 released?
The second shutter curtain starts and the film surface is
Stops exposure. , after the end of line A of the shutter rear curtain.
The mechanical sequence includes a mirror and aperture drive lever
Make a quick return. By the way, when the BDSP signal is 1", the
Switch SW2 linked to release button 18
As long as the signal SR from
The state of the signal is maintained, and when the SR signal becomes "0"
At the point, the state of the CC6 signal returns to the state of the CCO signal.
(Xll) o This is a pulp photography model.
In the mode, the release button 18 controls the shutter speed.
This function is designed to be used for direct manual control.
be. Also, the status of the CC7 signal is already in progress even after the shooting is finished.
Finder 13 displays the data that forms the basis of exposure control.
The so-called post display that can be confirmed within
state. When this CC7 signal state is entered, the digital
The operation restriction of the screen display 402 is lifted and various shooting information is displayed.
Information will be displayed, but this shooting information has already been displayed.
This is related to exposure control. In addition, this CC7 message
The state of the signal changes from the CC6 signal state to the CC7 signal state.
If the signal SR is “1” at the time of transition
, that is, the shutter release button 18 continues to be pressed.
This condition exists when the signal SR is “
0”, it immediately returns to the CCO signal state (X
I). Also, the state of the CC6 signal changes to the state of the CC7 signal.
If the signal SR is already “O” at the moment
The shutter release button 18 has already been released.
The system transitions to the CC7 signal state.
After that, it immediately returns to the CCO state. Also, even if the shutter release is in the CC7 signal state,
・Even if button 18 is kept pressed, as explained earlier,
Film winding is done by motor drive device or manually.
When the raise is performed, the system changes from the state of the CC7 signal.
It will return to the CCO signal state. This is the motor
・When shooting continuously depending on the drive device, the system
Hold shutter release button 18 pressed.
This is an important function in realizing this. As mentioned above, in the camera system of this embodiment,
In other words, the output control unit 364 controls the CCO to CC7 signals.
The sequence of each signal CC0-CC7 explained above,
Shutter relinquishing means 3 in the states of each of the signals
96. Aperture control means 398° Shutter control means 400
The state of the energization signal to the electromagnetic solenoid is
This is shown in the explanation diagram. In addition, in FIG. 93, FCI, Fe2. Fe2 is the CC
This is the basic signal for obtaining the O to CC7 signals. Now, the control signal generation circuit 646 and the CCO to CC7 signals
Before explaining the number, the number of refinement control stages data A
Based on V, S and shutter time control data TV (for control purposes)
obtain the underlying configuration/operation and other temporal control signals.
This will be explained in terms of configuration operations. FIG. 94 shows the shutter speed control register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
14. Constant generation circuit 616. Select Goo) 618.
This figure shows the detailed configuration of the frequency dividing circuit 620.
618A to 618D are shown in detail in FIG. 66.
Constructed from integrated circuit element CD4019 showing detailed logic diagram.
There are four select gates as shown in Fig. 30.
It constitutes the select gate 618 of. The frequency dividing circuit 620 also includes an integrated circuit element MC14536 (
It is made up of □ Motorola family. Furthermore, this
The integrated circuit element MC'14536 is shown in its block diagram in FIG.
This is the programmer pull timer shown in the diagram.
. This programmer pull timer has a total of 24 steps.
Frequency division is possible, and input from each terminal of A, B, C, and D is possible.
4-bit data input and input from 8b terminal
Separates the pulse signal input from the In terminal based on the signal.
It is configured so that it circulates around the circuit and outputs from the DO terminal.
Ru. In addition, the above A. Input data from each terminal of B, C, and D can be divided up to 16 steps.
, and when the 8b terminal input is 0'', the frequency is further divided by 8 steps.
It's meant to make you do it. In FIG. 94, flip-flop F39 is a clock
the Q output of the frequency dividing circuit 620.
This is for inputting to the n terminal. This example system
In this case, a 64 kHz pulse is used as the clock pulse.
Through such a configuration, the
The In terminal of the frequency divider circuit 620 has a 32 KHz on/off signal.
An off pulse will be applied. This 32 KHz pulse corresponds to the reference time Y described earlier.
This is the basis for making time for /8.
The frequency divider circuit 620 has its input terminals A, B, C, and D.
When all -c"o-c'sb terminal inputs are "1", the
A pattern with a period corresponding to 100 multiplied by 16 KHz from the Do terminal.
It is configured to output a pulse signal. That is,
This frequency divider circuit 620 tri 16 KHz pulse signal
input data from input terminals A, B, C, D and 8
The frequency is divided based on the input signal from the B terminal, and the signal is sent from the O terminal.
This is the line OK ratio output. Note that this frequency dividing circuit 62
(1; t, !J set end terminal metal included, signal #O described later
It is reset according to the input signal from The select gate 618AH has terminals A1 to A4.
From Q1 to Q4 of the shutter speed control register 614,
Input the lower 4 bits of the integer part of the camera second control data TV.
Also, the B1 to B4 terminals have an 8 second cell.
Input the data to obtain the flight time, that is, the “1010” data.
Also, the CC6 signal, which will be described later, is connected to the Ka terminal.
A CC2 signal, which will be described later, is input to the Kb terminal. That is, when the select gate 618A is the CC2 signal,
In between, data regarding the self-second time is stored at the D1 to D4 ends.
output from the child, and the time of the CC6 signal is in the shatter second tense.
The lower 4 bits of the integer part of the control data TV are set to D1 to D4.
Output from the terminal. In addition, the select gate 618B is connected to its A1 to A4 terminals.
In order to specify the time of CC3 and CC4 signals described later,
Fixed data is input, and the Bl-B4 terminal is
Specify a certain time as the CC5 signal time described later.
Fixed data has been input for Furthermore, this CC3
゜The time of the CC4 signal is 2 msec.
Therefore, 01 is used for the Al~A4 terminal.
10" data is input. Also, as the time of the CC5 signal, the AE lever 94
A time of 30m5ec was used considering the travel time etc.
Therefore, the B1 to B4 terminals are
0" data is input. Note that the dust select gate 618B has the Ka terminal turned on.
CC1° CC3 signals are input via gate 0R57.
The Kb terminal receives the CC5 signal input.
ing. That is, this select gate 618B
The time of I and CC3 signals is related to the time of 2m5ec.
outputs the data from the D1 to D4 terminals, and outputs the CC5 signal.
At the time of , the data regarding 30m5ec time is
It is output from terminals 1 to D4. In addition, the select gate 618C is connected to its A1 to A4 ends.
To the child, the above select goo) 6.18A D1 to D4 output
and the select gate to its B1 to B4 terminals.
The D1 to D4 outputs of 618B are input, and the Ka
The terminal receives CC2 signal and C through OR gate 0R55.
The C6 signal is input, and the Kb terminal has an OR signal.
CC1 signal, CC through gates OR56 and OR57
3 signals and CC5 signals are input. That is, this select goo)618C is CC2°CC
At the time of the 6 signal, the D of the select gate 618A is
1 to D4 terminal output from the D1 to D4 terminals,
At the time of the CCI, CC3, and CC5 signals, the select
・The D1 to D4 terminal output of 618B is connected to its D1
- It is output from the D4 terminal. In addition, the select gate 618D is connected to its A1 to A4 ends.
D1 to D4 output of 618C (Select Goo)
, and the 2Hz signal explained earlier is connected to the B1 to B4 terminals.
Input the data to create the signal, ie "1101° data"
has been done. Also, the Ka terminal has OR54゜0R.
Te CC1 through 55, 0R56, 0R57. CC2, CC3, CC5, CC6 signals are input
, the Kb terminal is connected to the Kb terminal through the inverter INV47.
An inverted signal of the a terminal input is input. That is, this select gate 618DJ't, CCI
. At the time of each signal CC2, CC3, CC5, CC6,
The DI to D4 terminal output of the select gate 618C
, output from its D1 to D44 children, and the time at times other than the above
, that is, CCO, CC4. The time Kd of each signal of CC7, the 2 Hz signal r (related to
It outputs the data from its D1 to D4 terminals.
. The D1-D4 outputs of the select gate 618D are
are input to each terminal of A to D of the frequency dividing circuit 620, respectively.
Ru. On the other hand, the QO terminal of the shutter time control register 614
The child output, that is, the top bit of the shutter time control data TV.
The cut is a Nando goo receiving the CC'6 signal input.
) From NAND29, inverter INV45, or
to the D terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the circuit 0R53.
is input. In addition, the output of the NAND29 (Nand Goo) is the input
The AC2 signal is input through the converter INV46.
The frequency divider circuit 620
It is input to the 8b terminal of. In the configuration as described above, each signal of CCO to CC7
The A-D input of the frequency divider circuit 620 and the 8b terminal input
Describe the state of force. At the time of CCO, CC4, CC7 signal, select
The Kb terminal input of gate 618D becomes “1”, and
In addition, since the 8b terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1",
Each input terminal of A, B, C, D of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and 8b
Each input of the terminal is 1", "0", 1°, °1" respectively.
. It becomes "1", and therefore the voltage of the frequency divider circuit 620 is set to "1". From the 0 terminal, a 16 KHz pulse is sent in steps of 1101 degrees.
A frequency pulse output, that is, a 2 Hz pulse output is made.
This will result in At the time of the CC2 signal, select gate) 618
Bl~B4 terminal input of A is select gate 618C
, 618D to A, B, C, j5 of the circuit 620.
Since the input to the terminal and the 8b terminal input becomes “0°,
Each input terminal of A, B, C, D of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and 8b
Each input of the terminal is °0", "1", and 0" respectively. '1°, it becomes "0", and therefore, the frequency of this frequency dividing circuit 620
16KHz pulse from Do terminal to signal line O
Pulse output obtained by dividing the frequency by "1010" steps plus 8 steps, i.e.
A pulse output with a period of 16 seconds will be made. Note that this pulse with a period of 16 seconds is
The time when the rise from “0” to “1”, that is, 8 seconds after the start of branching
The time that has elapsed is considered as the end of the self-timer time.
It is used as such. Next, at the time of CC3 and CC1 signals, select
A1 to A4 terminal input of 618B is selected
- The frequency divider circuit 620 through the gates 618C and 618D.
It is input to the A, B, C, and D terminals, and is also input to the frequency divider circuit 620.
Since the 8b terminal input is 1", A and B of the frequency divider circuit 620
,C. Each input terminal of D and each input of terminal 8b are set to “0°”.
, °1", "1", °0", "1", so this
From the DO terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 to the signal line 0, 1
Pulse output with 6 KHz pulse divided by 0110° steps
, that is, a pulse output with a period of 4m5ec will be made.
. Note that this pulse with a period of 4 m5 ec is
At the time when it first rises from 0° to 1°, that is, after the start of frequency division,
The CC3 or CCI signal ends after 2m has elapsed.
Used as a point in time. At the time of CC5 signal, select gate 4618
The B1-B4 terminal input of B is the select gate 618C
, 618D to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency divider circuit 620.
and the 8b terminal input of the frequency divider circuit 620 is “
1”, each input of A, B, C, and D of the frequency divider circuit 620
Each input of power terminal and 8b terminal is “0”°1”, respectively.
“0”, “1”, @1! Therefore, this frequency divider circuit
16KHz from the Do terminal of the 620 to the signal line O
Pulse output obtained by frequency-dividing the pulse by 1010 steps, that is, 6
Pulse output with a period of 4m5ec will be made.
, this pulse with a period of 64m5ec is the first
32m from the time when it rises from 0" to °1", that is, after the start of frequency division.
The point when 5ec has passed is the end point of the CC5 signal.
I am using it. At the time of the CC6 signal, the select gate 618
A1 to A4 terminal input of A, that is, shutter time control data
The lower 4 bits of the integer part of the TV are the select gate 61.
A, B' of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through 8C, 618D,
It is input to the C and D terminals, and the shutter speed control data is input to the
When the most significant bit of the integer part of the data TV is “0”, the frequency is divided.
The 8b terminal input of the circuit 620 becomes "1", and the
The most significant bit of the integer part of the TV is "
When it is 1", the D terminal input of the frequency divider circuit 620 becomes 1".
, 8b terminal input becomes "0°. Therefore, from the DO terminal of the frequency divider circuit 620, 1
A pulse signal of 6 KHz is applied to the shirt timing control data.
Y of the above formula obtained by frequency division based on data
A pulse signal corresponding to ×2p will be outputted. Note that this pulse signal is later compared to 8+α of the above set.
This is used to count down the corresponding data.
The shutter starts at the end of the down count.
After the curtain started running, actual time in seconds passed.
It is used to detect things. FIG. 96 shows the shutter speed control register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
26. Refinement stage number control register 628° data select
Kuta 632. Down counter 642° select game
This figure shows the detailed configuration of the board 640.
The detailed logic diagram of the data selector 632 is shown in FIG.
A selector using two integrated circuit elements CD4019 shown in parallel.
gate, and a narrowing control register.
Input the QO~Q7 terminal output of 628 to its B7~BO terminal.
Also, the shutter speed control register 626
Q5 to Q7 terminal output, that is, the shutter speed control data T
Connect the 3 pits below the decimal point of Vs to the A2 to AO terminals.
It has been entered. Also, this data selector 632
The °1” signal is input to the A3 terminal, and the A4 to A
7 terminal is grounded. That is, this data selector
632 is shown in the formula (b) above in AO to A3
However, it is receiving input from 8+α puta, and BO-
B7 terminal receives the input of the stop-down stage number control data AVs.
This is translated by Ketimo. In addition, this data selector 632
Inputs the CC4 signal to the Ka terminal and the CO3 signal to the Kb terminal.
Therefore, at CC3 time, this data
The selector 632 narrows down the number of stages from its DO to D7 terminals.
The control data ^Vs is output, and this data is output at CC4 time.
The data selector 632 selects the data from its DO to D7 terminals.
) will output the 8+α data of the equation. The DO~D7 output of this data selector 632 is down.
- It is input to JO to J7 of counter 642, and PR
There is no CO3 signal at the E terminal via the OR gate OR59.
However, when the CC4 signal is input, the down counter
The data selector 642 selects DO to D7 of the data selector 632.
Captures and stores the output data of the terminal. By the way, this down counter 642Fi, Fig. 34
The detailed logic diagram is shown in
Consists of two CD4029 integrated circuit elements.
A down counter whose clock terminal CLK input
Based on the power, input from the JO to J7 terminals and stored.
The result is a carry (borrow).
–), a signal indicating this is sent from the CO2 terminal.
It will be output. This CO terminal output signal is normally °1”
and becomes 0'' when a carry occurs.
, this signal is clipped synchronously with the clock pulse CP.
・It is input to the D terminal of flop F40, therefore,
The subtraction count by this down counter 642 is completed.
If so, from this flip frog F40 terminal
In order to show this, the clock...is a signal synchronized with the Kurusu CP.
The signal is output to signal line O. On the other hand, this down counter 642 has its clock terminal
NAND gate NAND31NA'ND29 for CLK
At the time of the CC5 signal, the FP double signal input is received.
(Nand Goo) Through NAND31, NAND30
At time CC6, the DO terminal output voltage of the frequency dividing circuit 620 is
That is, it receives the signal input from the signal line O. Therefore, this
The operation of the down counter 642 is shown in the sequence shown in FIG. 93.
The explanation will be based on At the time of this down counter 642IriCC3 signal
, the output data of the refinement stage number control register 628 is
from the JO to J7 terminals through the data selector 632.
Memorize information. Next, move to the CC5 signal time.
and Nando Goo) NAND30. Through NAND31
The FPC signal is input and stored at the time of the CO3 signal.
The narrowing down stage number control data AVII is sent according to the FPC signal.
count down, and as a result, the subtraction count ends.
Once completed, the CO2 terminal output signal will shift from °1° to “0”.
go At this point, AE Leno (-94 is the
Preset the amount of refinement corresponding to the number of stages control data AVs.
This means that the vehicle is traveling to a position where it will be hit. Of course,
The amount of travel at this time is determined by the AE control means 398.
(Mechanical delay time until clamping of −94
It goes without saying that the amount of compensation will be taken into consideration as appropriate.
do not have. At this time, the CO2 terminal output signal became °0".
is detected by clip-flop F40 and its d output
The AE lever 94 is connected to the aperture from the terminal to the signal line 0.
The vehicle has traveled to the position corresponding to the number of stages control data AVs.
In order to show this, a signal synchronized with the clock]5 CP is output.
Power is what is done. Also, when this down counter 642FiCC4 signal
In between, the Q5 to Q7 ends of the shutter speed control register 626
The child output data, that is, the small output data of the shutter speed control data TVs.
In addition to the data below several points, the least significant bit of the integer part it
The data with “1” set in the bit corresponding to t is effectively
As integer data, that is, multiplied by 8 as 8+α data,
The data is output from the JO to J3 terminals through the data selector 632.
Learn and memorize. Next, move to the CC5 signal time.
Then, NAND gate NAND 30, NAND3
1 to the signal line 0 to the frequency divider circuit 620. The terminal output will be input to the clock terminal CLKK.
, to this signal line 0, at the time of CC6, as explained earlier.
As shown above, the time that is 1 times the reference time Y, that is, the 16KHz pattern
minute signal based on Nyatsuta time control data TVs.
A pulse output with the cycle ζ pulse period Y x 2p is performed.
Therefore, the 8+α stored at the time of the CC4 signal
is down according to the pulse signal with a period of Y×2p.
・Count, °As a result, the subtraction count ends.
Then, the C02m child output signal changes from "1" to 0'. At this point, after entering CC6 time, Y×2p×(8
+α) time has elapsed, which means that the amount of time in seconds has passed.
Approximate real time corresponding to control data TVs (=P+')
This gave me some time. At this time, the CO2 terminal output signal
°0" is detected by flip-flop F40.
CC is connected from the Q output terminal -' to the signal line O.
After entering the state of 6 signals, the shutter speed control data is
clock to indicate that the real time corresponding to the TVs has elapsed.
The signal output is synchronized with CPK pulse and CPK.
Ru. FIG. 97 shows a detailed circuit of the control signal generation circuit 646.
It shows the control signals CCO to Ce7 mentioned earlier.
A logic circuit is constructed to obtain the following. In addition, what is indicated by 990 in the same figure is detailed in FIG. 35.
Integrated circuit device CD40 with logic diagram
A decoder consisting of 28 clip flow
F32. F33. Decode each Q output of F34, pCl, FC2, and FC3.
is coded and output as a signal from CCO to CC7.
be. Note that each of the PCI, FC2 and FC3 signals is
In the state shown in Figure 93, each of the clip-flops
F32. F33. Output from the Q output terminal of F34,
These flip 70 tubes F32. F1a, F34
Both are synchronized with clock pulse CP. Now, set conditions for flip-flop F32 as 5FC.
1. Set the reset conditions to RFe5. flip flop F3
3 set conditions °S'F C2. Set the reset condition to RFe5. flip flop F34
Set condition is SFC3, reset condition is RFe5. Said
All flip-flops F32° F1a, F34 die
Set the rect/reset condition as FDR. The fact that the above FDH condition holds means that the flip-flop
Log F32. F33. F34 is clock pulse CP
is reset regardless of , and therefore from decoder 990
There is no "L" output as the ticco signal. That is,
, system II'1 is placed in or returned to the state of the CCO signal.
This will result in The conditions for this FDH are the power up clear signal PU
C is input or the state of the CC2 signal, that is, the self-taper
The EDSP signal becomes “1” during the timer operation, or
The film has not finished winding and the WNUP signal is
°0" and the CC7 signal is not in the "state", or
Winding is completed with the C7 signal, W, NUP
Time when the signal is “1” and corresponds to 2Hz
It is established when . By the way, the CC7 signal is “1” and the WNUP signal is “1”.
, the fact that FDR is established when the 2Hz signal is “1” is due to the system.
While the shutter release button 18 continues to be pressed.
, after the film winding is completed and the next calculation result is not completed.
The time it takes for the results to be loaded into the display register.
This is to enter the next control state after the
Using the drive group, press the shutter release button 1.
This is important when performing continuous shooting while pressing and holding 8.
It is a condition. In addition, the parties involved in satisfying the FDH conditions mentioned above are
nd gate A'ND85. AND86°AND87,
Or gate 0R47, 0R48゜0R49, i7 bar
It is INV42. The fact that the CC2 signal condition is satisfied means that the flip
・Flop F33 is placed in the set state, and the flip flop
Lop F3'2. When the F34 is placed in a reset state,
Therefore, the condition /fiSFC2 is satisfied.
things are needed. That is, in order to create the state of the CC2 signal, Cc. In the signal state, the EDSP signal is °0° and the FD
The condition of H is not satisfied and the signal from signal line O is “
1", that is, the calculation in the central control unit 362 has not been completed.
When the signal from the signal line O is 1", that is,
Data from central control unit 362 to output control unit 364
When the shutter release button is not being transferred
Established when button 18 is pressed and the SR signal becomes “1”
It is necessary that the condition of 5FC2 is satisfied by
Ru. At this time, if the 5ELF signal is 0'',
At the same time, the condition of 5FC1 also holds, so the system is CC
The state of the CC2 signal changes from the state of the O signal to the state of the CO2 signal.
What's wrong with transitioning without going through a state? Note that when in the state of the CC2 signal, the 5ECF1 signal
If becomes "O" and the SR signal becomes °0",
, RFe5 assumes that self-timer shooting has been canceled.
The condition is satisfied, and the system returns to the CCO state. On the other hand, when the CC2 signal is in the state, the signal on the signal line [phase]
becomes °l”, that is, from the DO terminal of the frequency divider circuit 620
When “↓” is output and the signal on signal line O is °1”
The 5FCI condition is satisfied, and the system is in the CO2 signal state.
Transition. The transition from the CO2 signal state to the CCI signal state is
, when the signal of the signal line [phase] becomes 1°, that is, 2m
When 5ec has passed, the condition of RFe5 will change depending on this.
That's when it was established. The transition from the CCI signal state to the CC5 signal state is
, when the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes 1", that is, 2m
When m has elapsed, the condition of 5FC3 is established due to this.
It's time to do it. The transition from the CC5 signal state to the CC4 signal state is
, the MDSP signal is "0" and the signal line [phase] is active. number is 1
”, that is, the AE lever 94 controls the number of aperture steps.
When the vehicle has traveled an amount corresponding to the data AVs, or when the
When the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes °1", that is, 30m5e
When c has elapsed, the RPCI condition is satisfied.
It's time to do it. The transition from the CC4 signal state to the CC6 signal state is
, the shutter front curtain starts running and the CTST signal reaches “1°”.
This is when the condition of 5FC2 is satisfied. The transition from the CC6 signal state to the CC7 signal state is
, the BDSP signal is “0” and the output of the signal line [phase] is “1”
”, that is, when the shutter speed control data TVs
When the corresponding real time measurement is finished, the 5F
This is when the CI condition is satisfied. Note that while the CC6 signal is in the state, the BDSP signal is “l”.
” and the SR signal becomes “0”, RFe5 and
The RFe5 condition is met and the system returns to the CCO signal state.
Ru. Also, when the CC7 signal is in the state, the SR signal becomes 0".
Then, the conditions of RFCI, RFe5, and RFe5 are satisfied.
The system then returns to the state of the CCO signal. In addition, those involved in 5FC1 are at-goo.
G AND79. AND80. AND87゜na
NAND gate NAND5. NAND6. NAND7, N
ANDI 6. NAND23. (7 barter INV36,
INV37. INV38. INV39, flip
・Logical configuration based on 70 tube F35. Also, the AND gate A is involved in RFCl.
ND81. AND90. Nando Goo) NAND8. N
AND9. NANDIO, NANDll, NANDI9
, inverter INV4.4. Flip flop F31
, OR Gate OR50. This is a logical configuration based on 0R51 and 0R52. Also involved in 5FC2 is NAND Gate N
ANDI 7. NAND18. NAND24, flip
・Flotsub F30. F31. Depends on inverter INV48
This is a logical configuration. Also involved in RFe5 is Nando Game.
G NAND12. NAND14. NAND2
0, NAND8. NAND9.7 lip/70 lip P3
6, AND gate AND81. AND88, Oage
Inverter INv37゜INV38. I
This is a logical configuration based on NV44. Also, NAND Gate NA is involved in 5FC3.
ND13. AND gate AND89゜or gate 0
R51, inverter ■Nv43° flip, 70 knob F
It is 37. Also involved in RFe5 is the NAND gate N
AND 9, NAND 14. NAND21. This is a logic circuit based on an inverter INV37. Note that from this control signal generation circuit 646, the frequency dividing circuit
direct to the direct reset terminal R of the line 620.
A reset signal is provided through the signal line O. The condition for outputting “1” to this signal line O is the CC7 signal.
When the SR signal becomes “0” in the state of
1 condition, 5FC2 condition. Are the RPC20 conditions and 5FC30 conditions satisfied?
During the period between 1 pit of the first clock pulse C and P.
Therefore, depending on this direct reset signal, the above
All contents of the circuit 620 are cleared. Furthermore, it is involved in outputting l” to this signal line O.
NAND9゜NAND22. NA
ND25. NAND26°NAND 27. NAND
28. Inverter INV37, INV40. Or
This is a logical configuration consisting of a gate 0R50. Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, the
release means a96, m control means 398, shutter
An energizing signal is applied to the motor speed control means 400.
However, for the shutter release means 396,
, 4 energizing signals are seen at the time of the CCI signal, and the aperture control hand
For stage 398, when CC3, CC1, CC5 signals
An energizing signal is applied between the shutter speed control means 400 and
, the energization signal is applied at the time of CC5, CC4CC6.
Given. In order to realize this operation, the shutter release hand
The CCI signal is applied directly to stage 396, and the aperture
AND gate AND 82 for control means 398
Inverter IN of PCI signal and CC7 signal via
An inversion signal is given by V41, and the shutter speed control hand
For stage 400, F
C3C3b is supplied with the output signal of the inverter INV41.
It is something that can be obtained. Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, as shown in FIG.
Flip float, direct reset end of F23
Direct reset to child R via signal line @
giving a signal. This is applied to the output control section 364 during the exposure control operation.
, new calculation data is input from the central control unit 362.
It is for the purpose of prohibiting things, and gate AND
84, the flip-flop F32. F34's
When the AND condition of each Q output is satisfied, this signal becomes “1”.
”.Furthermore, to explain, this control signal generation circuit 646
indicates that the self-timer is operating and
The LED indicator 32 blinks to indicate that the power is normal.
A control signal is output to the drive circuit 404 to
FIG. 98 shows the configuration of the drive control circuit for this LED display 32.
Shown below. In the figure, 800 is a 15-stage frequency divider circuit.
So, 15 stages of 64KHz clock nokurusu CP.
It rotates around the clock and generates a 2Hz on/off signal. This 2
The Hz signal is fed to an AND gate AND 100
There is. Also, indicated at 808 is a battery check circuit.
Atsuzo, no (When checking the power, the remaining battery power
is configured to output a “1” signal when the
It is. The output of the battery check circuit 808, the CC
2 signals through the OR gate 0R100.
de gou) is given to ANDloo, and this and
・The output signal of ANDloo is the LED drive circuit 40
4 is given. In such a configuration, a CC whose self-timer is in operation
2 signal is “1” or battery check result
, if the remaining battery power is sufficient, the LED driving circuit
A 2Hz on/off signal is given to 404,
Therefore, the LED display 32 flashes. The configuration of the camera/stem in this example is not fully explained.
However, as stated above. In addition, in what form is each data used for calculations?
This is shown in the comparison table in Figure 99. Here, the subject brightness BV
, film sensitivity S■, shutter speed TV, aperture value AV,
Open aperture value A Vo *Minimum aperture value AMAX, exposure
Amount EV, each apex system of aperture setting from the strobe side
/8-step precision 8-pit binary code for each column.
In addition, AD conversion can be performed in the input control section.
changes to analog data when
The conversion digital value is the same as <1/2 of 8 pits with stacking degree.
It corresponds to the hexadecimal code. Note that the bending error ROM 528 shown in FIG.
For a given open aperture value AVo, the equation shown in Fig. 100 is
Outputs the binary code data of the bending error AVc as shown below.
It is something. In addition, the aperture value display decoder/ROM 7 shown in FIG.
02. Shutter speed display decoder ROM704. symbol
Each manual binary code and display of display decoder ROM706
A data comparison table is shown in Figure 101. In the system of this embodiment, the data is
It can be read using binary codes as shown in the comparison tables in Figure 0 and Figure 101.
The calculation routines shown in Figure 70 are
It is based on binary data as shown in the lever comparison table.
. Therefore, in this specification, the parts that have been insufficiently explained will be
Alternatively, the arithmetic circuit shown in the block diagram shown in Figure 79,
Perform any operation according to the operation instructions shown in Figure 69.
etc., for each operation shown in Figure 70.
And Figure 99. In addition to Figure 1ooq and Figure 101, all other drawings
A person skilled in the art can easily infer by comparing
believe As mentioned above, according to the present invention 11, Figs. 70(a) to 70
As shown in 1@, the calculation steps in each calculation routine
Since the numbers are the same, the computation time remains constant. follow
equipment that has a high need to update data at regular intervals.
Even when used in combination with
It is possible to perform correct processing using I-pulses, and is extremely useful.
It has a beneficial effect.

[Brief explanation of the drawing]

DMW of the camera system to which the camera system according to the first embodiment of the present invention is applied! J. @:l! ! @4R diagram for highlighting the case where the lens device 2 and the L-di 4 of the two-wheeled camera shown in the first illustration are in the shade. Figure 3: Hiroshin's Reception 2 On the 2nd side, the 111I of each lever in the mackerel is shown with the same alertness reset to 1? '1 Takeaki-0 JllEJ-Company lens device 2 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where the diaphragm and wax are not grisset. FIG. 5 is a three-dimensional view showing an example of a strobe applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an external photometer applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an incident light type exposure meter applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of a motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment. ! Figure jg9 is an explanatory diagram of finder information when viewed through the finder windows 1 and 3 of the camera device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of finder information shown in FIG. FIG. 11(g) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the photographing mode during strobe photography. FIG. 11 [F]) is a logical explanatory diagram showing the relationship between each shooting mode of the camera. FIG. 12 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting digital data regarding film sensitivity from the FiAsA sensitivity setting dial 4o. Figure 13 shows the states of timing pulses TBI to TB6.
A time chart to explain. FIG. 14 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting information regarding the open aperture value of the lens device 2, the state of the aperture ring, and the aperture drive lever. Figure 15 is a comparison diagram of binary code and gray code. FIG. 16 is a principle diagram of a conversion circuit from Gray code to binary code. FIG. 17 is a logical explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the flip block shown in FIG. 16. FIG. 18 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting data set using the dial 34 and the state of the mode changeover switch 38. FIG. 19 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the input timing of various data and information. FIGS. 21 and 22 are specific configuration diagrams for inputting the states of various switches. FIG. 23 is a specific configuration diagram for detecting and inputting the traveling distance of the AE lever 940. FIG. 24 is a schematic block diagram of a strobe photography device. FIG. 25 is a schematic block diagram of an external photometer. FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram of an incident light type exposure meter. FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 28 is a schematic configuration diagram showing the functional configuration of mechanical parts of the camera system shown in FIG. 27. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between each photographing mode based on TTL photometry and external photometry and the calculation routines corresponding thereto. FIG. 30 is a schematic block diagram of the control circuit of the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a circuit configuration diagram of a 1fi clock pulse CP generation circuit. FIG. 32 is a time chart showing the output pulse waveform of the system pulse generator. FIG. 33 is a specific configuration diagram of the system pulse generator. FIG. 34 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4029. FIG. 35 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4028. FIG. 36 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the set circuit 520. FIG. 37 is a detailed circuit diagram of the gray binary converter. FIG. 38 is a detailed circuit diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4035. FIG. 39 is a logical configuration diagram of the transmission gate shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 40 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4042. FIG. 41 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14539. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MCI4539. FIG. 43 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element MC14539. FIG. 44 is a specific circuit configuration diagram of a signal separation circuit and a doubling circuit. FIG. 45 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the condition signal storage circuit.
~ FIG. 46 is a timing chart for explaining detection of a pulp signal. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of CU and AO multiplication signal logic. FIG. 48 is a detailed block diagram of the input control section. FIG. 49 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device MC14520. FIG. sd is a logic diagram of one of the counters shown in FIG. 49. FIG. 51 shows a counter 558 and a flip 70 tube 560.56 based on the integrated circuit element MCI4520 shown in FIG.
2 configuration diagram. FIG. 52 is a configuration diagram of a buffer register 564 based on a combination of integrated circuit elements CD40350. FIG. 53 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element MCI4512. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14512 shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a time chart for explaining the operation of the input control section. FIGS. 56 and 57 are time charts for explaining the state of A-D conversion in the input control section. FIG. 58 is a logic configuration diagram of input bus selector 578. FIG. 59 shows flip-flops F18 and F1 shown in FIG.
A time chart explaining the operation of 9. FIG. 60 is a block diagram of the condition register 574.
,,. FIG. 61 is a circuit configuration diagram when the circuit shown in FIG. 60 is implemented using an integrated circuit element. FIG. 62 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4015. FIG. 63 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of a signal switching circuit and a D register. FIG. 64 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4021. FIG. 65 is a block diagram of the control system and logic circuit 598 of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 66 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4019. FIG. 67 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4024. FIG. 68 is a block diagram of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the output code of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 70 shows the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a comparison between an address, an instruction, and an operand code. FIG. 71 is a configuration diagram of an output logic circuit of address decoder 600. FIG. 72 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element MCI4514. FIG. 73 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element MCI4514. FIG. 74 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 598. FIG. 75 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the data selector 502 shown in FIG. 30, the fixed tenter ROM 534, and the circuits and paths for inputting the maximum aperture p@hMp, x of the photographing lens device 2 used. FIG. 76 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4013. FIG. 77 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 592. FIG. 78 is a block diagram of multiplexer 594. FIG. 79 is a logic diagram of the arithmetic circuit 500. FIG. 80 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 596. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of signals and data on bus lines, input bus lines, and output bus lines. figure. FIG. 83 Fi is an output timing chart of the synchronous circuit shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 84 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram including the demultiplexer 610 and the output control register 622. FIG. 85 is a detailed logic configuration diagram of a data acquisition circuit for display. FIG. 86 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032. FIG. 87 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032. FIG. 88 is an operation timing chart of the circuit shown in FIG. 85. . FIG. 89 is a detailed block diagram of the display control circuit 624. FIG. 90 is a plan view of the digital display 402. Figure 91 is a detailed logic diagram for capturing data for control. #! Figure 92 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the output control section.
chart. FIG. 93 is a sequence explanatory diagram based on the flow chart of FIG. 91. FIG. 94 shows the shutter speed control register 614 and the constant generation circuit 616. Select gate 618° frequency divider circuit 620
Detailed configuration diagram. Figure 95 shows the block diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14536.
diagram. FIG. 96 shows a register 628 for temporarily controlling the shutter speed and distal 26° aperture stage number. Data selector 632.
Down counter 642. A detailed configuration diagram of the select gate 640. FIG. 97 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the control signal generation circuit 646. FIG. 98 is a circuit configuration diagram of a drive control circuit for an LED display. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the contrast between data and binary code. - FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating the contrast between the input aperture value of the bending error ROM 528 and the binary code of the output error. FIG. 101 shows an aperture value display decoder ROM 702. Shutter speed display decoder ROM704. It is a figure explaining the comparison of each manual binary code of decoder ROM706 for symbol display, and display data. 1;Og--・ROH-512・-・1'Of""
yA$/7. Evening, Applicant Canon Corporation ((L) Cb>(C) /46) /412! /44 (Tonneau (C) (
d) (e> (f) mg Yokota Xie kt14N)/HA7 1st 2nd Figure z7β4 8th Figure

Claims (1)

[Claims] A combiator having means for storing a plurality of arithmetic control instructions for executing a plurality of arithmetic control routines,
Combiator 0 characterized in that the number of addresses of the storage means from the start to the end of execution of each arithmetic control routine is the same.